Elite Service Manual Apr 2017

ACL Elite/Elite Pro Service Manual
P/N 00018112114 R03 • March, 2017

ACL Elite/Elite Pro Service Manual
Copyright © Instrumentation Laboratory, March, 2017

This publication and any and all materials (including software) concerning the products of the IL [[[Undefined
variable Primary.ACL_Elite-Elite_Pro]]] instrument are of proprietary nature and are communicated on a strictly
confidential basis; they may not be reproduced, recorded, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted or disclosed in
any way and by any means whatsoever, whether electronic, mechanical through photocopying or otherwise,
without IL’s prior written consent.
Information contained herein is believed to be accurate. In any event, no responsibility, whether express or implied,
is assumed by IL for or in connection with the use thereof, or for infringement of any third party rights which might
arise therefrom, or from any representation or omissions contained therein. Information is subject to change and/or
update without notice.
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Foreword
P/N 00018112114 Elite / ElitePro Service Manual Revision 03 March 2017
This Service Manual contains information necessary to install, service, maintain and troubleshoot the
Instrumentation Laboratory ACL Elite / ElitePro system.
This Service Manual is intended for IL field engineers, or service engineers from organizations duly
recognized and authorized by Instrumentation Laboratory, who have been previously trained on how to
use, maintain and troubleshoot the IL ACL Elite / ElitePro model.
For detailed information on Operator’s interface and other user related topics, reference the ACL Elite /
ElitePro Operator’s Manual.
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system is compatible with the diverse requirements for supply voltage and
frequency encountered throughout the world.
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system conforms to the directives and standards of the Community European
89/336/EEC + 92/31EEC + 93/68EEC and certified by CE marking. This system is approved to CE
standards EN55011:1991 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A; EN50082-1:1997 and EN61010-1993 + A2:1995
(IEC 1010-1).
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system also conforms to the directives and standards of the CSA and certified by
CSA marking. This system is approved to CSA standards with licence number LR24215 and produced
under CSA certification number 161648/1121145.
All instruments bear the CE and CSA monograms.
This publication and any and all materials (including software) concerning the products of IL ACL Elite / Elite Pro Systems are of
proprietary nature and are communicated on a strictly confidential basis; they may not be reproduced, recorded, stored in a retrieval
system, transmitted or disclosed in any way and by any means whatsoever, whether electronic, mechanical through photocopying or
otherwise, without IL’s prior written consent.
Information contained herein is believed by IL to be accurate: in any event, no responsibility, whether express or implied, is assumed
hereby by IL for or in connection with the use thereof, or for infringement of any third party rights which might arise therefrom, or
from any representation or omissions contained therein.
Information is subject to change and/or updating without notice.
Manufacturer EU Authorized Representative

Instrumentation Laboratory Company Instrumentation Laboratory SpA
180 Hartwell Road Viale Monza 338 - 20128 Milan, Italy
Bedford, MA 01730 U.S.A. Telephone: 39-2-25221
Telephone: (781) 861-0710
Instrumentation Laboratory Co.

180 Hartwell Road, Bedford Ma. 01730
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 1 General Information
This chapter of the manual contains general information about the ACL Elite/ElitePro
system(s), including its use, measured parameters, presentation of results, hardware
description and operation, additional features and procedural limitations.
Description and use of the ACL Elite/ElitePro Operator’s Interface is addressed in a
separate chapter of this manual. This chapter includes the following sections:
1.1 Product Use ......................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Measured Parameters .......................................................................................... 2
1.3 Presentation of Results ........................................................................................ 3
1.4 Instrument Description and Operation ................................................................ 4
1.5 Additional Features ........................................................................................... 21
1.6 Procedural Limitations ...................................................................................... 22
1.7 Symbols Chart ................................................................................................... 23
Chapter 1 – General Information Page 1 of 23

1.1 Product Use
The IL ACL Elite/ElitePro systems are fully automated, high productivity analyzers
designed specifically for clinical use in the hemostasis laboratory, for coagulation
and/or fibrinolysis testing.
The systems provide results for both direct hemostasis measurements and calculated
parameters.
1.2 Measured Parameters
The ACL Elite/ElitePro systems are used to perform the following tests:
Coagulometric Tests
• PT- (Prothrombin Time and PT-Based Fibrinogen concentration)

• APTT (Activated Partial Thromboplastin Time)
• TT (Thrombin Time)
• Single Factors (VII, X, V, II, XII, XI, IX, VIII)
Absorbance Tests
• Antithrombin
• Heparin Xa
• Protein C
• Plasmin Inhibitor (alpha-2-antiplasmin)
• Plasminogen
• Fibrinogen-C QFA (Clauss method)
Immunological Tests
• D-Dimer
• von Willebrand Factor
Special Tests
• ProClot (clotting Protein C)

• Protein S
• APCR-V
Page 2 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

• Pro-IL-Complex *
• Hepatocomplex *
NOTE: An (*) indicates that the test is not available in the United States.
Profiles
The user may program Profiles on patient samples to be performed on a random

access basis. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for additional information on this
subject.
Tests Groups
Some tests can be run together as a group, thus saving time when the number of
samples to be analyzed is relatively small. Following are some examples:
• PT-FIB/APTT
• PT-FIB/APTT/TT
Double Tests
The ACL Elite/ElitePro offers the user the capability to set up double tests. Refer to
the Operator’s Manual for additional information on this subject.
1.3 Presentation of Results
The ACL Elite/ElitePro offers the following choices to display and print results of
testing:
• s (seconds)
• R (Ratio)
• NR (Normalized Ratio)
• INR (International Normalized Ratio)
• % (Percent activity)
• U/mL (units/mL)
• mg/dL (for example for Fibrinogen)
• g/L (for example for Fibrinogen)
• ng/mL (for example for D-Dimer)
• microg/L (for example for D-Dimer)
• micromol/L
• IU/mL (International Unit)
• User configurable unit

1.4 Instrument Description and Operation
The ACL is a family of fully automated computer-controlled, microcentrifugal

analyzers.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro systems incorporate a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) unit that
displays the status of the instrument, permits the user to select desired procedures and,
through the use of menus and options, guides the operator through these procedures.
Information and instructions are entered into the system either via a Touch Screen
device, through a standard PC keyboard or through a serial or USB mouse.
When sample testing is initiated, the samples and reagents are sequentially pipetted
into a 20-cuvette polystyrene rotor (loading process). Sample and reagents are then
mixed by centrifugation process. The mixing is carried out by a combination of rapid
acceleration and braking actions that are effective in thoroughly mixing the liquids.
Reaction measurements (data acquisition) via the photometer are made while the rotor
is spinning.
The ACL measures the parameters at 37 oC ± 1 oC (98.6 oF ± 1.8 oF), at an ambient
temperature from 15 oC to 32 oC (59 oF to 89 oF). However, if the ACL is in a
temperature controlled environment where the ambient temperature is held constant,
the measurements are made within a narrower temperature range: 37 oC ± 0.25 oC.
The results are displayed on the LCD and printed by the (optional) external printer,
and/or sent to a host computer. The ACL performs automatic calibration, offers a
series of utility programs for the operator and manages a complete quality control
program.

1.4.1 Main hardware components
The ACL Elite/ElitePro analyzers include several hardware components and modules,
which interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
This section contains descriptions of those components and their functions as well as
the operations that take place during the analytical process.
The figure below highlights some of the main components of the ACL Elite/ElitePro,
as viewed from the front of the system.

More information about the other components on the instrument is given in Chapter 3
“General Description.”
The following sub-sections provide item descriptions:
1.4.2 Sample Tray
1.4.3 Reagent Area
1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area
1.4.5 Rotor loading and Analysis Area
1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
1.4.7 Keyboard
1.4.8 Interface Connectors
1.4.9 Internal Cooling System
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader
1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner
1.4.12 External Printer
1.4.13 USB Port for All-in-One Utility (Newer Models)
1.4.14 Floppy Disk Drive (Older Models)

1.4.2 Sample Tray
The ACL Autosampler system includes a rotating sample tray that contains:
• 40 x 14.2 mm diameter positions for cups and primary tubes, and
• 10 x 23 mm diameter positions to hold accessory materials such as calibrators,
diluents, reagent vials, etc.
Three different sample trays can be used with the ACL system, each one appropriate
for different size primary tubes: 3 mL, 5 mL and S11.5; all of them can be used for
0.5, 2 or 4 mL cups.
3 mL Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm) 181108-99

5 mL Primary tube, 5 mL total volume (13x75 mm and/or 13x100 mL) 181108-98
S 11. Sarstedt type primary tube, 3 mL volume (11.5x66 mm) and/or
5 mL volume (11.5x92 mm) 181812-85
NOTE: The dimensions and volumes mentioned above are all nominal values.

WARNING: Do not access sample or reagent area while probe arm is operating.
Additional Reagents Positions
The ten internal positions of the sample tray - A1 to A10 - are used for placing
materials such as calibrators, diluents or reagents in a choice of containers such as 23
mm vials (10 mL filling volume), 18 mm vials (4 mL filling volume) or cups.
Adapters are needed for the 4 mL vials and cups as seen in the picture below.

Normally, position A1 is usually reserved for a cup containing calibration plasma

(normal pool) and position A10 is reserved for a cup containing IL Factor Diluent, for
use in the calibration procedure.
1.4.3 Reagent Area
The ACL Elite reagent area consists of 8 reservoirs labelled R1 to R8, and the ACL
ElitePro reagent area consists of 12 reservoirs labelled R1 to R12, designed to hold
reagent containers. An area alongside the vial holes is designed to hold the vial caps
while the vials are in use.
Positions R1 to R4 are cooled by a Peltier-effect temperature regulator and are
equipped with a stirring mechanism, (magnetic stirbar).
Positions R5 to R8 are used for reagents at room temperature; these positions do not
have a stirring mechanism.
Positions R9 to R12 (ACL ElitePro), are cooled by a Peltier-effect temperature
regulator however are not equipped with a stirring mechanism, (magnetic stirbar).
The reagents in positions R1 to R6, and R9 to R12 (ACL ElitePro) are aspirated with
the internal needle (reagent needle) while the reagents placed in positions R7 and R8
are aspirated with the external needle (sample needle).
All twelve reagent positions can hold 28 mm vials (16 mL filling volume). Smaller
diameter vials require the use of color coded adapters.

Grey: for 10 mL vials

requiring magnetic stirrer
Purple: for 8 mL vials

not requiring magnetic stirrer
Green: for 4 mL vials

not requiring magnetic stirrer
Dark Blue: for sample tray 4ml

Vials and cups
1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area
The rinse / waste system of the ACL Elite/ElitePro consists of a removable Rinse /
Waste Reservoir positioned between reagent positions R4 and R5. A plastic tube is
connected to the reservoir that drains the waste from the reservoir to a waste container
outside the analyzer (left hand side) where the waste is collected.
The Rinse / Waste Reservoir which is always filled with Wash-R emulsion, is used as
a washing basin for the dispensing needles in-between cycles; the liquid waste is then
drained and collected in the waste container on the outside of the analyzer for proper
disposal.

WARNING!
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
1.4.5 Rotor Loading and Analysis Area
The area of the analyzer where the reaction cuvettes are loaded and the analysis takes
place is located under the rotor holder cover in the center of the instrument, on the
right side of the reagent area. This area includes:
• The reaction cuvettes (rotors) storage system and mechanisms involved in the
transport of the rotors, (excluded on ACL Elite).
• The plate where the rotor is placed during loading and analysis (Rotor Holder).
• The hardware components responsible for ensuring proper mixing of reagents
and samples in the cuvettes.
• The optical system used to make the analytical measurements.
Rotor (reaction cuvettes)
The disposable precision reaction cuvettes, made of UV-transparent acrylic, are

radially arranged in groups of 20. The 20-cuvette unit is called a rotor.
Each wedge-shaped cuvette contains two compartments, a small one near the center to
hold the sample and/or reagent and a larger one that holds reagents only. A partial
dam between both compartments maintains their contents separate during the loading
process; as centrifugal action starts, the sample/reagent in the inside compartment
flows over the dam to mix with the contents in the large compartment. The reaction
and analysis take place within the large, outside compartment, while the rotor is
spinning.


Rotor Exchange Module (REM)
The Rotor Stack, the Rotor Transport and the Rotor Arm compose this assembly.
(excluded on ACL Elite)
• Rotor stack
Before their use, rotors are stored in the rotor stack that holds up to 12 rotors
(240 cuvettes). The rotor stack compartment, which may be accessed from the
top of the analyser on the right side, can be filled at any time (continuous rotor
loading) either manually (one rotor at a time) or using a special rotor refill tool
(up to 10 rotors at a time).
The rotor stack area is thermostatically controlled in order to keep the rotors in
a temperature range between 36°C and 39oC and the rotor stack is insulated to
help thermal-regulation.
The ACL Elite has a smaller rotor storage area thermostatically controlled
between 36°C and 39oC. Rotors are manually placed into the storage area.

• Rotor Transport
Below the rotor stack, a rotor transport mechanism moves the bottom rotor out
to make it available to the rotor arm mechanism.
• Rotor Arm
The robotic arm takes the rotor and inserts it into the rotor holder. This is the
area where the rotor will remain during the loading and analysis process. Once
analysis is completed, if the rotor is fully utilized (or if requested by the user),
the rotor arm takes the rotor and discards it into the rotor waste container.
The ACL Elite does not contain the robotic mechanism to place rotors onto the
Rotor Holder. With the ACL Elite rotors are manually placed onto the Rotor
Holder prior to sample loading and analysis, and manually removed when the
analysis cycle is completed.
Rotor Holder and Rotor Loading
The Rotor Holder is an aluminium disk that holds the rotor in place during loading
and analysis. The rotor holder is thermostatically controlled to a temperature of 38.5 ±
0.5o C to insure 37 oC inside the cuvette.

The loading of samples and reagents into the reaction cuvettes involves the action of
the sampling / dispensing arm and needles. When starting with a new rotor, cuvette 20
is generally filled with a normal pool of calibration plasma. The last position of each
run is usually filled with the Wash-Reference Emulsion aspirated from the one-litre
bottle housed against the back wall of the analyzer. The remaining 18 rotor cuvettes
(1-18) are filled with samples and reagents as required by the programmed request.
Rotor Waste Area
The used rotors are dropped inside the Rotor Waste Container. This container is
accessed from a door in the right front area of the analyzer for removal and disposal of
the used rotors, as seen in the figure below. With the ACL Elite rotors are manually
removed from the rotor holder after analysis is complete and may be disposed of in the
Rotor Waste container or other suitable method.

WARNING!
on this area.
1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
This module consists of a Liquid Crystal Display, 12-inch active matrix (LCD), which
has Touch Screen capability, allowing all operations to be carried out using the LCD.
The LCD guides the operator during the analytical process and displays calibrator data
and patient results. It is also used to display calibration curves, and to perform several
utility programs that are easily accessible through this input device.
The LCD screen system reproduces 256 colors, and shows numeric and alphanumeric
characters. The interaction with the operator is also made user friendly by the
availability of graphics and icons. The screen is divided into three areas:
• The upper section displays “Status area and main menu.”
• The central section displays “Working area.”
• The lower section displays “Toolbar area.”

1.4.7 Keyboard
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has a standard computer keyboard with mechanical keys that
allow the user to access the various operating modes of the instrument.
Although the instrument is equipped with and supports the USA keyboard layout, the
ACL software itself also supports the layout for the following languages: German,
French, Spanish, Italian and English (UK).

1.4.8 Interface Connectors
• USB connectors (4) to interface USB mouse, USB External Barcode Scanner,
and/or USB Printer.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro includes an interface for a USB external barcode scanner that
allows reading reagent barcodes. The external barcode scanner is a standard accessory
for the ACL ElitePro system and an optional feature for the ACL Elite system.
• RS-232 C Interface for Host
The ACL Elite/ElitePro contains an RS-232C interface (DTE Standard) for the output
of data to a central computer (Host) or a personal computer. Communication to a host
computer is via ASTM protocol.
• RS-232 C Interface for an optional serial mouse
(mouse must be serial mouse, PS-2 mouse with adaptor is not supported)
• Ethernet not supported in this software release
• External Printer Output (parallel port)
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has an output for an optional external printer. Two emulation
protocols are available for printers: ESC/P2 (Epson like printers) and HP-PCL 5 (for
HP like Laser Printers).
• Standard PC keyboard

1.4.9 Internal Cooling System
The system is cooled by the fans mounted on the internal right and left sides of the
analyzer. An air filter prevents dust from entering the system.
A two-level alarm warns the user when the internal temperature of the instrument rises
above damaging levels. The first level alerts the operator of the temperature rise and
displays a warning. The second level switches off the instrument.
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader
The on-board barcode reader, a standard feature of the ACL Elite/ElitePro, is located
in the sampling area as indicated in the figure below. A small window indicates its
position.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes:
• Codabar
• Code 39
• Code 128
• Interleave 2 of 5
When using barcoded sample tubes, it is important to position them in the sample tray
so the labels are facing the outside of the sample tray. This will allow a correct reading
of the labels by the on-board barcode reader.

1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner
The external barcode scanner for the ACL Elite/ElitePro is able to read numerical and
alphanumerical IL Reagent bottle labels. The maximum barcode label length readable
is 6 cm with a resolution of 0.2 mm.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes.
• Code 128
1.4.12 External Printer (optional)
An external 80-column printer can be interfaced to the ACL Elite/ElitePro.

Two emulation protocols can be used: ESC P2 or HP-PCL 5.
The ESC P2 is a typical Epson like protocol while the HP-PCL 5 is a typical Hewlett
Packard like protocol for Laser and /or Inkjet printers.
1.4.13 USB Port for All-in-One Utility (Newer Models)
A USB port is mounted in the upper right part of the ACL Elite/ElitePro. The USB
port is accessible by pushing both sides of the small door to open it.
You can use the USB port located on the front of the ACL Elite/Elite Pro for backup,
data store and load operations.
The instrument automatically detects USB storage devices at startup and when
inserted into the instrument.
When multiple USB storage devices are installed (i.e., flash drives, other remote
storage media) the instrument issues a message stating that only the first device
detected is in use.
WARNING: To avoid infecting the instrument with a software virus, use only the
USB storage devices (flash drives) supplied with the instrument. These storage
devices are formatted to FAT* standard. The NTFS# standard is not supported.

1.4.14 Floppy Disk Drive (Older Models)
A floppy disk drive is mounted in the upper right part of the ACL Elite/ElitePro. The
drive is accessible by pushing both sides of the small door to open it. This device is
used for some of the utility programs.
1.5 Additional Features
This section provides information on any additional features improved in the ACL
Elite/ElitePro.
The following sub-sections provide item descriptions:
1.5.1 Standby Status
1.5.2 End of the Cycle
1.5.3 Power Loss
1.5.4 Setup and Utility Programs
1.5.5 Fault Detection
1.5.1 Standby Status
If the ACL Elite/ElitePro is left ON for a period longer than 30 minutes without any
operator action, the system moves into the Standby status. The LCD screen goes
blank. Pressing the Touch Screen reactivates the display and allows the system to
resume normal operation.
When the system enters the Standby status, all motors are deactivated to reduce power
consumption and the LED source is switched off. While the instrument is in the
Standby status, an automatic priming cycle of Wash Reference Emulsion solution is
performed every 30 minutes. The Database is saved when the instrument goes into
the Standby status.

1.5.2 End of the Cycle
At the end of each analytical cycle, an audible signal notifies the operator that the
cycle has been completed.
1.5.3 Power Loss
The ACL contains a Hard Disk Drive to store the database in the event of a power
interruption. The instrument performs an automatic save of the database to retain the
data every entry into standby or when exiting from the main program to power the
system off.
The instrument has an internal clock that keeps track of the date and time.
1.5.4 Setup and Utility Programs
The instrument incorporates several utility programs that allow certain functions to be
changed or set according to the user’s needs. These programs also help in
troubleshooting.
For additional information, refer to Chapter 2 “Operator Interface Description” in this
manual.
1.5.5 Fault Detection
The system automatically monitors faults to ensure accuracy of sample data and
proper system performance. Fault monitoring includes display of alarms and
warnings.
For additional information, refer to Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” in this manual.
1.6 Procedural Limitations
The operating range of the ACL Elite/ElitePro is 15 to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF) and at up

to 85% Relative Humidity (not condensing).
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has been tested per EN61010-1 to insure there are no safety
hazards within the temperature range 5 to 40ºC (41 to 104 oF) and functional
performance characteristics are resumed when the instrument re-enters the range of 15
to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF).

1.7 Symbols Chart
The following chart displays the various symbols that may be associated with the
ACL Elite/Elite Pro system.
CE Mark Temperature Use By Manufacturer Batch Code

Limitation
Biological Risk ATTENTION: CAUTION: NOTE: ATTENTION:

See Instructions Risk of electric Important user Consult
For use Shock Information Documents
Catalog Number Serial Number In Vitro Authorized Contains

Diagnostic Representative sufficient for <n>
Device tests
Protective Earth Off (supply) On (supply) End of Life

Conductor Disposal (WEEE)
terminal -Earth
Do Not Actuate

Chapter 2 Operator Interface Description
This chapter is designed to familiarize the service engineer with the Operator Interface
(OI) items used during the process of requesting and performing analytical and service
operations, such as the data input devices, elements within menus, buttons and icons.
This chapter includes the following sections:
2.1 Screen Areas and Main Commands Description. ............................................... 1
2.2 Available Input Devices ...................................................................................... 7
2.3 Instrument Status................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Passwords .......................................................................................................... 10
2.5 Analysis and Service Program Menu Description ............................................ 11
2.1 Screen Areas and Main Commands Description.
This section provides information about the Operator Interface displayed on screen.
The basic interaction with the ACL Elite/ElitePro is done through menus which allow
access to sets of related functions (analysis, calibration, QC, set-up, diagnostics, etc.)
and through the use of windows, dialogue or message boxes to input or retrieve
information.
The screen is divided in the following three main areas:
2.1.1 Status area and main menu
2.1.2 Working Area
2.1.3 Toolbar Area
NOTE: On the screen, any disabled object (menu, check-box, and button) is displayed
dimmed and it cannot be selected.
2.1.1 Status Area and Main Menu
This is the upper part of the screen that contains the following items:
• IL Logo
• Indication of current instrument status (see section 2.3)
• Date and Time
• Windows -Like Menu bar (see section 2.5)
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description Page 1 of 14

2.1.2 Working Area
This is the central area of the screen, which display windows containing data,
commands or messages.
Within the ACL Elite/ElitePro screens these items are grouped or contained in three
different types of defined windows that are following.
Standard window
In the analysis menu, this is a larger area that contains sets of related data, which can
be edited by the user by means of command buttons.
In the service menu, or in any common menu, this is an area that contains
configuration and setting options with command buttons.
Dialogue box
This is a small area used to prompt the user to choose one of several options (OK,
Abort, Retry, Ignore, Cancel, Yes, No).
Message box
This is an area used only to provide information.
Command buttons
Allow the user to select options, cause actions and get from one part of the software to
another.
The buttons are positioned in different areas depending on the screen.
Some are identified with text that is self-explanatory of the action.
Some are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Command Command / Action
Buttons Icons
Confirm
Cancel
(Dimmed if Edit action not allowed)
Page 2 of 14 Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description


Buttons Icons
Print
Host
Delete
Add
Add an item to the list.
Remove
Remove an item from the list.
Transfer
Transfer an item from one list to another.
Details
Information
Provide information in different languages.
New Sample


Buttons Icons
Extract Sample Data
Note
Patient Name
Patient Details
Save
Save information to USB drive or floppy disk.
Inside the standard windows, “Check boxes” may be present which allow the user to
“mark” an item. If a check box or button is in mutual exclusion with another check
box or button, there is a frame wrapping the two, along with “graphic” information.
Following is the table with all possible icons and their corresponding meanings.
Icon Meaning
ERROR
To call attention to high priority failures and fault messages.
WARNING!
To deliver different kinds of messages. For example to warn
the user of a “not allowed/wrong” operation, or of
“problems/errors” detected by the instrument during or after
an operation.

Icon Meaning
QUESTION
To request confirmation by the user before starting an
operation or before cancelling an action.
INFORMATION
To offer general information. In some boxes, but not always,
the message is followed by a request for confirmation.
2.1.3 Toolbar Area
This is the bottom part of the screen, which contains a series of command buttons for
immediate and easy access to particular functions.
The status of the buttons (Active or Dimmed) is dependent on the instrument status,
but independent from the type of information displayed in the working area.
The buttons are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Toolbar Command Command / Action
Buttons Icons
Short Turn Around Time (STAT)

Urgent sample. Pressing this button opens a window that guides
the operator. Confirmation is required.
Instrument Status
Informs the operator about the status of the operation in progress.
Close/Open Cover
This operation is disabled if there is a possible interference with
the instrument operation.


Buttons Icons
STOP
Confirmation is required.
Resume
Starts the operations paused due to a STAT request.
Data Base View

The system goes back to the database view or “Main” screen.
Host Status
This icon appears only during communication with the Host to
inform the operator about the status of this action.
Printer Status
This icon appears only during printing to inform the operator
about the status of this action.
WARNING!
This icon appears when there is at least one warning. Press to
open “Warning List.”
Exit
Allows the operator to exit the Service menu.


Buttons Icons
Log Out
Allows the operator to exit the Analysis menu.
Confirmation is required. It is mandatory to follow the proper
Log Out sequence (pressing the Log Out Icon), before powering
off the instrument.
Reagent Status
Indicates status of reagents by color change
QC Status
By pressing icon, a screen is displayed indicating the last 100 QC
results. A red ! in the icon indicates a QC error.
Start or Resume Run
2.2 Available Input Devices
This section provides information about the available input devices and their use in
different screens.
Following are the specific sub-sections for each device:
2.2.1 Touch Screen
2.2.2 Standard PC Keyboard
2.2.3 Mouse
2.2.4 External Bar Code Reader
2.2.1 Touch Screen
The main information input device for the user is the touch screen.

To start an “enter command” or “edit value” action the operator touches the area to be
edited, which results in the immediate display of the numerical keypad (if enabled).
If the information to be entered is strictly numerical, the editing is done directly on the
keypad.
If the information requires alphanumeric characters, the input is done through the
external keyboard.
The editing action may be closed by pressing the "Confirm" or the "Cancel" buttons or
in some cases by touching a different area of the screen (implicit confirmation).
Once the confirmation is done, the system performs an automatic check on the entered
value. If an error situation is detected the user is notified by means of dialogue boxes
and the editing action is reactivated.
The touch screen supports auto-repeat functions in order to make lists easier to scroll.
2.2.2 Standard PC Keyboard
The main function of the PC keyboard is to enter and edit data in the alphanumeric
fields.
To start the editing action, select the field to be edited. Move the cursor from the
current object (it may be the default object if the window was just opened) to the
desired object by pressing [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB].
To close the editing action press [Enter] or select another active object or move the
cursor by pressing the [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB] keys. In all cases, closing the editing
action causes the system to activate checks on the entered data and the user is notified
of any error conditions by means of a dialogue box. If the editing action has been
implicitly closed (touching a different area of the screen) the fault condition of the
entered value will be changed to the pre-existing one.
Pressing the [ESC] key without activating any control may also close the editing
action; in this case the value returns to the pre-existing one.
Main and secondary menus may be selected using the keyboard. Pressing [ALT]
+Character opens the menus; selections within the secondary menus are done using
the Character key.
The keyboard may also be used to activate the Toolbar functions ( [F 1] to [F 10] ).
Pressing [ALT]-[TAB] allows shifting from an activated window to another visible
window. Pressing [CTRL + F4] will activate the Log Out function.
2.2.3 Mouse
The serial mouse or USB mouse is a device that may be used as a selecting device in
place of touching the screen. If at the instrument turn on the mouse is connected to the
proper port of the Interface Board then the Mouse arrow pointer is displayed.

2.2.4 External Barcode Reader
The external barcode reader is a device used to “read” the information encoded in IL
reagent barcode labels.
2.3 Instrument Status
Located in the upper part of the screen, within the “Status Area”, this item identifies
the current state of the instrument as one of the following.
SYSTEM INIT (BOOT/START-UP)

This indicates that the instrument, after the turn on, is performing start-up operations
(Initializing).
LOG-IN
This indicates that the instrument is inoperative and is waiting for the inputting of the
User Identification and the Password of the operator (see section 2.4).
READY
This indicates that there have been no blocking errors detected, there are no analytical
operations in progress and the instrument is ready to start.
OPERATING
This indicates that either an analytical function is in progress (Calibration or Sample
Analysis) or a diagnostic function is being performed.
HOLD
This identifies a system "pause" reached during an analytical session (STAT request,
no rotors, etc.). In order to continue the current session, select “Resume” (green flag
icon in the Toolbar).
FAILURE
This indicates that the system has detected a blocking malfunction for a software
problem or mechanical assembly (devices, temperature control, etc.).
STAND-BY
This is the status into which the instrument moves automatically after 30 minutes of
inactivity. The LCD lamp in the video module is turned off and its status led becomes
green. Both the coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are off and the system
performs a Database check then becomes inoperative.

To exit from the stand by status enter any command (Touch the screen, press any key
etc.).
SERVICE
This is the status assumed when the instrument is in the Service program or in its
menus.
To gain access to the Service program it is necessary to insert the proper identification
password at the LOG-IN prompt, (User: Service, Password: System Fix) and then
select on the windows like menu bar “Diagnostic” and then “Service.”
The Service program contains all the software tools and utilities to allow the Service
Engineer to perform a complete check out and adjustment of the whole instrument.
In the Service program the coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are turned on for
default.
To exit from the Service program select the “Exit” button on the Toolbar.
NOTE: When the “Exit” button is touched, the system performs an initialization of
the instrument.
During this initialization all the motors are moved to the home position and the
instrument attempts to recover from any errors before access to the Analysis program
is allowed.
2.4 Passwords
This section contains the available passwords implemented in the instrument software
together with the description of the allowable functions.
Following are the Log-In passwords:
User Password Gained functions description
LabManager level 3 Gain access only to the Analysis program.
Service System Fix Gain access to all Service and Analysis programs
NOTE: User name and password are case sensitive. In the User as in the Password
fields pay attention to type correctly the “Upper/Lower Case letters” and the “spaces.”
Otherwise the system shows an “Error” message box.
Following is a Service program password:
Password Function description
ACL8 Allows the service engineer to Reset the Test Counter.
Note: The password is required only if in the Test Counter Menu, the
Reset button is touched.

2.5 Analysis and Service Program Menu Description
This section contains an overview of the configuration of the Windows like Menu
bars contained in the two main programs.
Each of the two programs is basically composed by specific menus (in the Analysis
program: Analysis, QC and Calibration, while for the Service program: Service) and
by common menus (Diagnostic, Setup and Utility).
Specific information about the Analysis menus is provided in the Operator Manual.
A quick description of the menus that are common in the two programs is also
provided. Following are the specific sub-sections.
2.5.1 Analysis Program Windows-Like Menu Bar
2.5.2 Service Program Windows-Like Menu Bar
2.5.3 Common Menu Description
2.5.1 Analysis Program Windows-Like Menu Bar
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the location of the menu in
the Analysis program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker ().
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.
The “Analysis Windows-Like Menu Expanded Diagrams” is available in the figure
2.5.1 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings.”
2.5.2 Service Program Windows-Like Menu Bar
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the location of the menu in
the Service program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker ().
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.

The “Service Windows-Like Menu Expanded Diagrams” is available in the figure

2.5.2 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings.”
2.5.3 Common Menu Description
This sub-section is designed to provide information on the menus that are common
and present in both the Analysis and the Service program. More information about
these 3 menus is provided in the Operator’s Manual.
Following are the specific sub-section for these 3 menus.
• Diagnostic
• Setup
• Utility
Diagnostic
Following is the table with the description of the functionality of each option in the
“Diagnostic” menu.
Option Description
Priming This performs a priming cycle of the fluidic system with
Wash-Reference Emulsion by means of the Dilutors.
Cleaning This performs a configurable cleaning cycle of the Needles
Block with Cleaning Solution by means of the Dilutors.
Maintenance This is a schedule that reminds the operator of dates and/or
notes about the instrument maintenance actions.
Temperature Control This screen allows monitoring of the temperatures of the
heating and cooling systems.
Needles Position This is a test that allows the operator to verify/adjust the
Needles Block position.
Session Error History It’s a table where are traced by the system the errors that
occurred during the last session.
Logbook It’s a table where the system saves a trace of the last 100
actions of the operations on the system configuration.
Service This option allows the Service Engineer to access the
Service program (proper password required to activate).

Setup
“Setup” menu.
Option Description
Tests This is a second level menu with options that allow the
operator to configure the analytical tests.
Profiles This is a second level menu with options that allow the
operator to configure the analytical profile tests.
Liquids This is an option that allows the operator to configure the
liquids used by the instrument.
Interfaces This is a second level menu, with options that allow the
operator to configure the interface with the internal /
external device.
System Configuration This is an option that allows to the operator to configure the
system.
Date / Time This is an option that allows the operator to set the date and
the internal clock time.
Units This is an option that allows at the operator to select the
measuring units for the data.
Utility
“Utility” menu.
Option Description
Upgrade IL Library This option allows the operator to upgrade the IL library
present in the system with new liquids, tests and profiles.
Backup / Restore This option allows the operator to backup or restore the
current system configuration (for Hardware, QC, AR, and
Patients).
Archive This option allows the operator to store the data (QC, AR,
Patients database and Calibration) on floppy disks using the
.”TXT” format. If required these floppy disks are then
readable from a PC.
Software This option allows the operator to check the software ID,
and/or upload and upgrade the instrument software.
Save Last Rotor Map This option allows the operator to save on floppy disk the
raw data of all the rotors analyzed in the last session using
the .”TXT” or .”DAT” formats. If required these raw data
disks can be viewed on a PC.

Option Description
Save Trace This option allows the operator to save on floppy disk the
file where the instrument stores any operation performed
and any command received. If required, this file may be
delivered to IL for troubleshooting purposes.
Debug This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).
Testing This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).

Chapter 3 General Description

This chapter contains general descriptions about the ACL Elite/ElitePro system,
including the use and functionality.This chapter includes the following sections:
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description ....................................................................... 1
3.2 Main Optic System Description .......................................................................... 4
3.3 Electronic Description......................................................................................... 8
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description......................................................... 39
3.5 Software Description......................................................................................... 40
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 7.0 of this manual for specific adjustment procedures and
locations.
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description

This section provides information about the fluidic system functionality during the
analysis and on its components.
The fluidic functions are sampling, dispensing and flushing the system.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro fluidic system includes the components described in the
following sub-sections.
3.1.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle
3.1.2 Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves
3.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly
3.1.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle

This is a plastic bottle containing 1 L of silicon emulsion that is used as a wash
solution for the Needles Block and for the optical reference of the Coagulimetric
Channel.
A capacitive sensor located inside the bottle detects the Wash-Reference Emulsion
level.
Chapter 3 General Description Page 1 of 40

3.1.2 Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves

The Dilutor Chamber is an acrylic block with two cylinders which contain a stainless
steel piston and an O ring / Teflon seal.
A stepping motor and lead screw on which the fork actuator for the piston is mounted
drives each piston.
Volumes up to 140 µl can be aspirated or dispensed. Since the pistons do not touch
the walls of the chambers in which they move, the volume of the liquid dispensed
depends entirely upon the accuracy of the piston and the travel.
The travel is determined by the stepping motor and driving lead screw.
NOTE: Due to the critical adjustment and burn-in procedure required after the O ring
replacement, no service action must be attempted at sub assy level in the field.
In order to keep different liquids separate in the same fluidic line (ex: The in line
Wash-Reference Emulsion and sample or reagent) the instrument loads a small air
bubble between the two liquids.
Page 2 of 40 Chapter 3 General Description

The two Electro-Valves are mounted within the Dilutors Chamber, each one
connected to one of the pistons. Two Electro-Valves are electronically controlled and
connect the pistons to the Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle as well as to the two
needles of the Needles Block mounted on the Sample Arm.
The “Instrument Fluidic System Diagram” is provided in Figure 3.1.2 Drawing 1 of
the Chapter 10 “Drawings.”
3.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly

Two stainless steel needles (External for Sample, Auxiliary Material and Reagent and
the Internal for Reagent only) are mounted on the end of the Sample Arm that is
moved by the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
The Sample Arm allows the Needles Block to move in the proper positions and to
perform with the dilutors the following operations.
• Aspiration of sample, reagent and auxiliary material from their respective
locations.
• Dispensing into the internal and external compartments of the reaction
cuvettes within the rotor.
• Washing of the needles with Wash-Reference Emulsion in the Rinse/Waste
Reservoir.
Two specific capacitive sensors connected to the Needle Block are used to detect the
level of the liquid around the sample (External) and reagent (Internal) needle.
These liquid sensors are integrated into the ACL analytical cycles in such a way that
their operation does not affect the throughput of the system.
For all analytical cycles the verification by the sensors is done “in-line” during the
loading phase. The sampling arm stops when the needle is just below the liquid
surface to allow proper aspiration of the programmed amount of liquid.
Following is the sequence of the sensor operations during a cycle.
1. self-check
2. liquid test
3. washing
4. final sensor self-check

Operators are warned of sensor failures. Results for a sample for which the system
detected insufficient volume will appear with a warning. In the case that all sample
containers in the sample tray are empty the cycle will be aborted after the final self-
check. No other warnings appear on the video or on the printer.
3.2 Main Optic System Description

This section provides information about the optic system onboard used by the
instrument to perform the analysis on the samples / reagent reaction during the
acquisition cycle as well as on its main components.
The ACL uses two different optic principles to measure the hemostasis parameters:
• The light scattering (nephelometry) used for the Coagulimetric Channel.
• The light absorption used for the Chromogenic Channel.
Emerging Chromogenic
Light Channel
Scattered
Light
Rotor Sample
Cuvette Coagulimetric
Channel
Incident
Light

The rotor cuvette loading and analysis area also houses two optical systems for
analysis: Coagulimetric (nephelometric method) and Chromogenic (absorbance
method). Following are the specific sub-sections:
3.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel
3.2.2 Chromogenic Channel
3.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel

The ACL coagulimetric channel uses the light scattering method.
The system measures the rise in turbidity caused by the formation of the clot, within
the rotor cuvettes.
When a ray of light passes through a medium containing finely dispersed matter in
suspension, the ray is diffused by the particles (light scattering) due to the reflection
and refraction phenomena.
The diffused light is measured at 90° with respect to the incident light (see next
Figure). This system is known as nephelometric measurement.
Nephelometric analysis is particularly suited for the determination of the very finely
dispersed matter. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.
The coagulimetric channel uses a high efficiency light emitter diode (LED) as light
source (wavelength is 660 nm approx.).

The light radiation coming from the LED is transferred to the Rotor Holder using an
optic fibre system.
Due to the narrow bending radius required connecting the LED output to the rotor
mounting assy, the use of a very flexible optic fibre is required.
For this reason a multiple fibres system, composed by a large number of single fibres
(about 1000), is used.
The optic fibre is locked to both the emitter side and the rotor side, using 2 set screws.
NOTE: When the optic fibre is locked on the diode side, the applied torque cannot
exceed 90° degrees CW or CCW at the rotor holder side.
A specific circuit, powered by the Switching Mode Power Supply Board with the +12
Vdc, provides a constant current to the diode.
The light emitter is also equipped with a “LED OFF” line, coming from the Motor
Board (Board #5), which de-activates the LED when the instrument enters the Stand-
by status.
The light generated by the light emitter diode is transmitted through the optic fibre and
is scattered by the reaction mixture present in the rotor cuvette. This scattered light is
read by using a solid state optical detector, which is installed below the Rotor Holder
and is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3) through a
coaxial cable.
3.2.2 Chromogenic Channel

The Chromogenic Channel is based on the light absorption principle.
A polychromatic source of light hits the cuvette content.
The radiation passes through the solution contained in the cuvette and the unabsorbed
portion of light reaches the photocell that transforms the light energy of the ray
striking it into an electrical signal. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.

The Chromogenic Channel uses a Halogen lamp with an effective life of 1000 hours.
The main characteristics of the lamp are the following:
• Voltage: 6 V
• Wattage: 10 W
The lamp is installed into an appropriate socket that allows an easy installation into
the Source Lamp assy. The Halogen Lamp Socket can be replaced by accessing the
area through a removable cover inside the rotor waste area, in the center of the
instrument. In case of replacement of the halogen lamp, attention must be paid to
avoid that fingerprints are left on the lamp bulb.
The Chromogenic Lamp is powered at a regulated voltage, generated by a particular
electronic circuit located onto the Switch Mode Power Supply. The circuit is provided
with protections against open circuit and short circuit.
The lamp is activated only during the chromogenic cycles, and when the instrument is
in the Service programs.
The lamp beam passes through an optical filter that “removes” the infrared radiation
(named antiheat filter) in order to avoid damage to the fibre, caused by the high
temperature present near the lamp. The filter is mounted in the Halogen Lamp
Assembly. The beam passes through a quartz optic fibre, and then is fed to the rotor
through a focusing system, composed by an optic condenser (the two lenses).
The assembly composed by the focusing system plus the optic fibre is called Optical
Collimator Assembly.

One end of the optic fibre is secured to the source lamp assembly by means of a
setscrew, while the other end, is secured below the rotor mounting assembly.
The quantity of radiation unabsorbed by the cuvette contents, passes through a 405 nm
interference filter and than is detected by an optical sensor (solid state photodiode).
Both the optical detector and the filter are mounted in the Rotor Holder Cover.
The photodetector is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensor Board #3 through
a coaxial cable.
NOTE: The optical path width for the Chromogenic Channel is 0.5 cm (cuvette
height). The absorbance values provided by the analyzer are normalized to 1 cm.
These values are generally double the ones obtained on other ACL models, for which
the absorbance values are strictly the ones obtained for the 0.5 cm cuvette path.
3.3 Electronic Description

This section describes the electronic system of the instrument.
NOTE: See “Chapter 10, Drawings” to view figures referenced in this section.
Electronic drawings and explanation of the logical functionality are also included.
Following are the specific sub-sections:
3.3.1 Interconnection Schematic
3.3.2 Quick Reference Board Functions Table
3.3.3 Quick reference Board function Diagram
3.3.4 CPU Master Board #1
3.3.5 Slave Board #2
3.3.6 Acquisition & Sensors Board #3
3.3.7 Rotor Exchange Module Board #4 (Excluded in ACL Elite)
3.3.8 Motors Board #5
3.3.9 Photometric & Temperatures Control Board #6
3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board
3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit
3.3.12 Interface Board
3.3.1 Interconnection Schematic

The purpose of this drawing is to clarify the starting point and the route of each major
signal present in the Instrument.
The major modules are logically grouped. An exception is made for the big Module
Interconnection Board which is split for better identification of each single module
driven.

The “Mother Board and Interconnections General Block Diagrams” is available in

Figure 3.3.1 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “drawings.”
3.3.2 Quick Reference Board Functions Table

This sub-section is designed to describe the circuits on the main boards and the main
modules and parts driven. Following is the board function table.
BOARDS MAIN COMPONENTS / MODULES / PARTS
CIRCUITS CONTROLLED / DRIVEN
• Main Microprocessor • Hard Disk and Floppy Disk

• IDE Hard Disk, Floppy Disk • LCD Board (LCD)
CPU Master controller • Speaker
Board # 1 • Serial/Parallel/USB Port • Interface Board (Mouse,
controller Printer, Keyboard, Ethernet
• Ethernet controller and USB ports)
• RAM Memory stick
PC104 Board • Arcnet controller • Communication with Slave

• Serial Port controller Board # 2
Only on Non- • Interface Board (Host port)
Atom CPUs • Touch Screen Board (Touch
Screen)
SBC (replaces
• Main Microprocessor • Hard Disk and Floppy Disk
CPU Master
• IDE Hard Disk, Floppy Disk • LCD Board (LCD)
Board #1 and
controller • Speaker
PC 104
• Serial/Parallel/USB Port • Interface Board (Mouse,
Board)
controller Printer, Keyboard, Ethernet
• Ethernet controller and USB ports)
• Arcnet controller • Communication with Slave
• Serial Port controller Board # 2
• RAM Memory • Interface Board (Host port)
• Touch Screen Board (Touch
Screen)
• Slave Microprocessor • Communication with PC104

Slave • Arcnet controller Board
Board # 2 • Serial controller • Control of Boards #3, #4, #5
and #6
• Internal Bar Code Reader


• A/D Converter • Coagulimetric &

• Coagulimetric & Chromogenic Optical
Chromogenic optic channels channels
Acquisition & amplification circuit • Sample Tray Optical Sensors
Sensors • Samples Tray detectors • Liquid Level Detection Board
Board # 3 circuit (Needles Block)
• Needles Sensors drive circuit • Reference Emulsion Sensor
• Reference Emulsion • Analysis Compartment Cover
presence circuit Hall sensor
• Analysis Compartment
Cover Hall Sensor circuit
• REM Slave Microprocessor • Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor

• Power switching step-up 24Vdc
12v-24v • Rotor Arm Vertical Motor
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor 24Vdc
drive circuit • Transport Motor 24Vdc
• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor • REM Motors Dual Channel
Rotor drive circuit Optical Switch
Exchange • Transport Motor drive circuit • Rotor Stack & Rotors Waste
Module • REM Motors Dual Channel Full Infra Red Sensors
Board # 4 Optical Switch reading • Rotor Arm & Rotor Stack
circuit Electromagnets
(excluded in • Infra Red sensors drive • Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
ACL Elite) circuit • Rotors Waste Presence
• Electromagnets drive circuit Detector
• Rotors Feed Stack Cover
Hall sensor circuit
• Rotors Waste presence
detector circuit


• Power switching step-up • Autosampler Motor 12Vdc

12v-26v • Sample Arm Horizontal
• Autosampler drive circuit Motor 12Vdc
• Sample Arm Horizontal • Sample Arm Vertical Motor
Motor drive circuit 26Vdc
• Sample Arm Vertical Motor • Reagent Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
drive circuit • Sample Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
• Reagent Dilutor Motor drive • Magnetic Stirrer Motors
Motors circuit 26Vac
Board # 5 • Sample Dilutor Motor drive • Dilutor Electro-valves 12Vdc
circuit • Coagulimetric Channel LED
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors 12Vdc
drive circuit • Motors Dual Channel Optical
• Dilutor Electro-valves drive Switch (W/O REM Motors)
circuit
• Coagulimetric Channel LED
drive circuit
• Motors Dual Channel
Optical Switch reading
circuit (W/O REM Motors)
• +5VREF generator circuit • Rotor Motor 70Vdc

• Rotor Motor drive circuit • Analysis Compartment Cover
• Rotor Cover Motor drive Motor 12Vdc
Photometric & circuit • Thermoregulation Rotor
Temperaturs • Rotor Holder Holder
Control Thermoregulation • Thermoregulation Peltier 1
Board # 6 • Peltiers Thermoregulation • Thermoregulation Peltier 2
• Rotor Transport (ACL ElitePro)
Thermoregulation • Thermoregulation Transport
• Rotors Stack Plate
Thermoregulation • Thermoregulation Rotors
Feed Stack
• Power line filter • All modules

• Voltages generators
Switching • Main current protection
Power Supply circuit
Board • Voltages protection circuit
• Chromogenic Lamp
Protection circuit


Interface
Board
• USB 1.1 Hub takes single • USB ports on Interface Board
USB port and generates 4 • If USB port is shut down the
USB ports unit must be rebooted to re-
• Overcurrent protection for enable the USB port to active
each individual USB port state
(USB port will be disabled
if overcurrent detected)
3.3.3 Quick Reference Board Functions Diagram

This sub-section provides a graphical representation of the hardware components
correlation. The “Quick Reference Board Function Diagram” is available in Figure
3.3.4 CPU Master Board (Board # 1) & PC104 Board

The CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board, located between the system Card
Housing and the Dilutor Assembly, are powered through the Switching Power Supply,
which provides a +5Vdc (DGT) and +12Vdc (DGT).
The CPU Master Board (Board #1) has a Personal Computer architecture design.
The “CPU Master Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure 3.3.4
Drawing 1, while the “PC104 Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure
The main functions reported in the following outline are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (see 3.3.4.a)
• Software runtime.
• Internal devices control.
• External devices control.
• Communication with PC104 Board.
PC104 Board General Block Diagram (see 3.3.4.b)
• Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).

• External devices control.
• Touch Screen control.

3.3.4.a CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (See Figure

3.3.4 Drawing 1)
Software Runtime
At the instrument power on the CPU Master downloads from the Hard Disk Drive
both the Operating System and the Application software. A local MEMORY BANK is
used during the software runtime. After downloading, the Board #1 starts system
initialization testing the instrument hardware through the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The control of the MEMORY BANK is achieved through the SYSTEM & DRAM
CONTROLLER and the MEMORY CONTROLLER. The Hard Disk Drive control is
performed through the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER and the PERIPHERALS
STANDARD CONTROLLER.
In addition to the Operating System and Application software the Hard Disk Drive
also allows Patient and Analytical Database storage.
The CPU Master Board reads the internal device configuration, through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER from the BIOS MEMORY.
Internal Device Control
The internal devices of the instrument controlled from the Board # 1 are:
• The active matrix LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) controlled by the VGA
CONTROLLER and the VIDEO MEMORY (through the LCD ACTIVE
MATRIX CONNECTOR CN6). The VGA CONTROLLER can also support
standard PC monitor (through PC MONITOR CONNECTOR P1), and/or
passive matrix LCD (through the LCD PASSIVE MATRIX CONNECTOR
CN11).
• The Floppy Disk Drive controlled by the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the FLOPPY DISK DRIVE CONNECTOR CN22).
• The Hard Disk Drive (located under the CPU Master Board) controlled by the
PERIPHERAL STANDARD CONTROLLER (through the HARD DISK
DRIVE CONNECTOR CN23).
• The SPEAKER (located on the rear of the system Card Housing) controlled by
the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER (through the UTILITY
CONNECTOR CN21).
External Devices Control
The external devices controlled by Board # 1 (through the Interface Board) are:
• The standard PC Keyboard controlled from the SYSTEM & DRAM
CONTROLLER (through the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN21).
• An external Ethernet interface controlled from the ETHERNET
CONTROLLER (through the ETHERNET CONNECTOR CN4).
• An external Parallel Printer controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the PARALLEL PORT CONNECTOR CN26).

• A PC serial Mouse controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD

CONTROLLER (through the MOUSE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN30).
(Or the USB mouse port on newer devices.)
• Four USB ports (version 1.1) are connected to a integrated USB standard
controller thru connector CN24.
Communication with PC104 Board
The CPU Master Board communicates with the PC104 Board through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER and the PC104 CONNECTOR CN13 – CN14 – CN29.
The CPU Master Board receives the signal RESET from the Mother Board through
the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN21. This signal is generated from the Slave Board
(Board # 2) and is sent also to the PC104 Board.
The Board # 1 provides to the PC104 Board a +5Vdc (DGT).
3.3.4.b PC104 Board General Block Diagram (See Figure 3.3.4

Drawing 2)
Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
The CPU Master Board communicates to the PC104 Board through the connector
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board interfaces with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the ARCNET
CONTROLLER, which is connected with the ARCNET CONNECTOR CN5 (CN4
could also be used as it replicates CN5 pinout, being parallel connected).
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION &
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUIT.
External Device Control
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board, through the SERIAL CONTROLLER, controls the MODEM –
HOST – BAR CODE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN7 – CN8 – CN9. These
serial ports though the Interface Board allow the instrument to communicate with the
external devices.
Touch Screen Control
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board through the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BOARD SERIAL
LINE CN6 and the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BOARD POWER CN3, controls
the Touch Screen Board located inside the Display assembly.
3.3.5 Slave Board (Board # 2)

The Slave board (Board #2) is located on the system card housing and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides a +5Vdc (DGT).

The Slave Board is equipped with a microprocessor (MCU U1), a resident memory
bank and a circuitry handling various interrupt signals that are sent to the board.
Multiple data and address busses are employed: (D0 - D15 and A0 - A23) are used to
connect the MCU U1 to the internal bus (DB0 - DB15 and AB0 - AB23). The internal
busses are then buffered to external data and address bus (SLD0 - SLD15 and SLA0 -
SLA23) through which the Slave board communicates with the Boards # 3, # 5 and
# 6.
The “Slave Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure 3.3.5 Drawing 1 of
Slave Board General Block Diagram (see 3.3.5.a)
• Main Reset circuits.

• Power supply presence circuit.
• Communication Section (see 3.3.5.b).
• Memory Section (see 3.3.5.c).
• Glue Logic Section (see 3.3.5.d).
Communication Section (see 3.3.5.b)
• Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1).
• Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader.
Memory Section (see 3.3.5.c)
• Programs run time and data storage.
Main Logic Section (see 3.3.5.d)
• Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus.
• Interrupt controller.
3.3.5.a Slave Board General Block Diagram (See Figure 3.3.5

Drawing 1)
Main Reset Circuit
The RESET CIRCUIT U3 generates the signal RESET used to initialize the whole
system. The RESET CIRCUIT can be triggered by any of the following
devices/signals:
• The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 (Main Logic Section).

• The signal INIT generated on the Switching Power Supply.

• The local microswitch RESET SWITCH SW1 (used only for manufacturing
testing purposes).
The LED LD1 is illuminated only when the signal RESET is present.
Power Supply Presence Circuit
The LED LD4 is illuminated always while the Board # 2 is powered with +5Vdc
(DGT).
3.3.5.b Communication Section (See Figure 3.3.5 Drawing 2)

Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1)
The Slave board communicates with the CPU Master Board by means of an Arcnet
connection, using a dedicated cable and connector P6 (P7 could also be used as it
replicates P6 pinout, being parallel connected). The data transmission is handled by
the ARCNET CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U27.
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION CIRCUIT ISO1
– ISO2. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG1, connected to the LED LD2, provides a
dedicated power supply to the TRANCEIVER CIRCUIT U29. A further circuit
controlled by the CANBUS CONTROLLER U28 is present but not used on the Slave
board.
Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader
A serial communication is achieved by the SERIAL CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U31 –
U32. The serial controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION
CIRCUIT ISO3 – ISO10. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG2, connected to the LED
LD3, provides a dedicated power supply to the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 – U34 – U35.
The serial communication line TX0 – RX0 coming from MCU U1, is also linked to
the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 – U34 – U35, which handles the serial communication
line TXD4 – RXD4 to the REM board (board # 4).
Signals TRIGBARC, TX1 – RX1 are respectively utilized for both enabling
(TRIGBARC) and communicate (TX1 - RX1) with the internal Bar Code reader.
The serial ports P8 - P9 - P10 are not used during the normal operations. Use of these
ports is limited to the manufacturing process when the board is connected to external
devices, which program the resident logic.
3.3.5.c Memory Section (See Figure 3.3.5 Drawing 3)

Programs run time and data storage
A few memory devices are employed to support the MCU U1 on the Slave Board,
these are:
• The SERIAL EPROM U2 is directly linked to a serial port of the MCU U1.
• The RAM STATIC MEMORY BANK U22-25 linked to MCU U1 through the
data bus DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19.

• The FLASH EPROM MEMORY U14 - U21 linked to MCU U1 through the
data bus DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19. The MCU U1 is also
connected to the BOOT LOADER EPROM U26 from, which downloads the
boot program by sending the command CSBOOT while initializing.
3.3.5.d Main Logic Section (See Figure 3.3.5 Drawing 4)

Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus
The MCU U1 is connected through the data bus D0 - D15 to the INTERNAL DATA
BUS TRANSCEIVER U4, which outputs DB0 - DB15 as local data bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local data bus BD0 - DB15, is then linked to the EXTERNAL DATA BUS
TRANSCEIVER U7 – U36. These devices output SLD0 - SLD15 (slave data bus),
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The address bus A0 - A23 links MCU U1 to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS
BUFFER U5 – U6 which outputs AB0 - AB23 as local address bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local address bus AD0 - AD23, is then linked to the EXTERNAL ADDRESS
BUS BUFFER U8 – U9. These devices output SLA0 - SLA23 (slave address bus),
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The control signal R/W is fed to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 –U6
which outputs a signal BR/W connected to the MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12. The EPLD
generates the individual control signals RD and WR which are routed to the
INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 –U6 where they get converted into BRD
and BWR. The EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 buffer the
commands and output the commands SLRD and SLWR which become control signals
of the external data and address bus.
The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 also handles the chip select signals for the local
devices as well as the board select commands. The board select commands (BS0 -
BS3) are fed to the EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 which
provide outputs SLBS0 - SLBS3 to the Board # 3, # 5 & # 6 located on the system
Card Housing.
Interrupt controller
Possible interrupts generated outside the Slave board are input via the EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 and then routed to the INTERRUPT
CONTROLLER EPLD U13. The EPDL U13 handles the interrupts following a
scheme of priority and sends signals IRQ1 - IRQ7 to the MCU U1.
The interrupts, which can be generated and logged into the Slave board are as follows:
• INIT (Initial Reset):This signal is raised from the Switching Power Supply and
has the purpose of keeping the system reset for a pre-defined period of time
thus allowing the power supply voltages to reach stability.

• POWERFAIL: This signal is raised from the Switching Power Supply, which
can detect a lack of supply voltage, and may lead to a decrease of the dc
voltages thus impairing proper functioning of the logic.
• STS: This can be raised by the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3) when
the A/D conversion has been accomplished and the data is available on the
bus.
• ELETFAIL: This can be raised by the Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board #
4) in case of malfunction of an electromagnet thus impairing proper rotor
displacement.
• ROTCUV and ROTCUVZ: These can be raised by the Motor Board (Board #
5) and are utilized to highlight a possible malfunction of either the rotor motor
or associated device, such as the Dual Channel Optical Switch.
• ROTFAIL: This can be raised by the Photometric & Temperature Control
Board (Board # 6) in case of a malfunction of the Rotor Motor.
3.3.6 Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3)

The Acquisition & Sensor Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc
(ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The Acquisition & Sensors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the signals SLD0 - SLD15 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7
“slave address bus.” This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD,
SLWR, RESET as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS0.
The “Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure
Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (see 3.3.6.a)
• Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply.

• Control signals for Switching Power Supply.
• Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.b).
• Channel Amplifier Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.c).
• Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see paragraph 3.3.6.d).
• Needles Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.e).
• Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.f).
• Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.g).

Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see 3.3.6.b)
• A/D Conversion for most important signals.

• Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
• Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors.
Channel Amplifier Section (see 3.3.6.c)
• Optical channel amplification.
Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see 3.3.6.d)
• Container on Sample Tray detection.
Needles Sensor Section (see 3.3.6.e)
• Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle.
Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see 3.3.6.f)
• Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle.
Analysis Compartment Cover Hall Sensor Section (see 3.3.6.g)
• Analysis Compartment Cover position detection.
3.3.6.a Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (See

Figure 3.3.6 Drawing 1)
Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply
The Switching Power Supply, in case of malfunction, sends two warning signals to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3). The signal THERFAIL is raised by the
Switching Power Supply in case the temperature of the environment reaches a level
(about 60 C°), which is dangerous for the Switching Power Supply. If overheating is
detected (about 75 C°) the Switching Power Supply enters the Protection Mode
shutting down the power to the instrument.
The second signal MISSLAMP is raised by the Switching Power Supply when the
current for the Halogen Lamp gets too low.
Both signals enter in the PARALLEL I/O U5 and are read by the Slave Board.

Control signals for Switching Power Supply
The Slave Board (Board # 2) sends to the PARALLEL I/O U5 two control signals for
the Switching Power Supply. The first is the signal LAMPWR that controls the
Halogen Lamp status.
The second is the signal PWROFF that controls the +9Vdc, +12Vdc and +70Vdc
power voltage status.
3.3.6.b Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (See Figure 3.3.6

Drawing 2)
A/D Conversion for most important signals
Following are the most important signals converted:

• COAG – CHROM for the Analysis Compartment Optical Channels reading.
• TPELT1 for the Peltier temperature detection.
• TPELT2 for the second Peltier temperature detection (ACL ElitePro).
• TROT for the Rotor Holder temperature detection.
• TFSLITTA for the Transport Plate temperature detection.
• TFSILOS for the Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection.
• +5VREF for the 5V Reference voltage detection.
• SCUVINT for the Sample Tray internal ring container detection.
• SCUVEXT for the Sample Tray middle and external rings container detection.
• SLIQ for the liquid presence detection.
• SFLUSH for the Reference Emulsion level detection.
• SHALL for the Analysis Compartment Cover closed detection.
The Board # 3 uses the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U1 to select that signal will
convert the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. This selection is driven by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the control signals MUX0 - MUX3 to the multiplexer.
The EPLD U6 controls with the start signal ADRC and the end signal ADSTAT the
conversion process of the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. The EPLD U6 controls
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9 that allows the EPLD of work with the
Rotor Motor’s speed during acquisition at 600 or 1200 Rpm, and introduces a delay in
the acquisition time pre-selected in the Curve Adjustment Service menu (see section
7.2 for Coag. and section 7.3 for Chrom.). The EPLD U6 receives from the
PARALLEL I/O U5 the control signals AACQ to select the static or the dynamic
acquisition and the signals SCALF to select the delay for Coag. Ch. or Chrom. Ch.
The EPLD U6 receives the signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ from the Motors Board
(Board # 5) and they are very important signals to synchronise the data acquisition.

Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2)
When the new data is ready the EPLD U6 receives the signal ADSTAT from the A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11, then enables the BUFFER 3-STATE U12 – U13 with
the signal RDADC and sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors
The timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10 is used to produce the frequency
FREQST for the work of the Magnetic Stirrer Motors drivers on the Motors Board
(Board # 5).
3.3.6.c Channels Amplifier Section (See Figure 3.3.6 Drawing 3)

Optical channel amplification
The Optical sensor of the Coagulimetric Channel is located under the Rotor Holder.
This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board through a coaxial cable
that enters in the specific amplifier’s box. The sensor’s signal enters in the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U17 – U21, and the output COAG is one of the most
important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmers RV1 used to adjust the Offset and RV2 used to adjust
the Gain during the instrument testing (see section 7.2).
The Optical sensor of the Chromogenic Channel is located under the Analysis
Compartment Cover. This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board
through a coaxial cable that enters in the specific amplifier’s box. The sensor’s signal
enters in the AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U20 – U22, and the output CHROM is one of the
most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This
circuit is composed also by the trimmers RV4 used to adjust the Offset and RV3 used
to adjust the Gain during the instrument testing (see section 7.3).
3.3.6.d Samples Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (See

Figures 3.6.6 Drawing 4 and Drawing 5)
Container on Sample Tray detection
The Autosampler is designed to accept patient samples, as well as calibrants on the

same tray (Sample Tray).
Forty positions are available to load patient samples. Two rings (outermost and middle
ring) can accept twenty cup/tubes each. A third ring (innermost) is available on the
Sample Tray and up to ten positions can be loaded with calibrants, controls and/or
reagents.
Two optical sensors are located in the Autosampler housing with the purpose of
detecting the presence of the containers in the Sample Tray. The internal sensor is
placed in the internal wall while the external sensor is placed in the external wall of
the Autosampler housing. Both the sensors detect the presence of the containers using
the refraction principle.

The power section for the infra red light emitter of the sensors is controlled by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the enabling signals ESCUV – ESCUVINT –
ESCUVEXT to the EPLD U6.
The Sample cup/tubes can be placed in the Sample Tray on two different rings. As the
sample cup/tubes can be placed on both the outermost and the middle ring, two
different levels of current are needed to drive the external sensor which shall detect
the presence of sample containers located either close (outermost ring) or far (middle
ring).
To select the most appropriate current level, the EPLD U6 sends the AUTOC signal to
the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 which through the signals SCUVL1 – SCUVL2 set the
current level output at the CURRENT GENERATOR U43A – U46A.
The trimmer RV6 allows the adjustment of the current in the emitter during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3). The outputs of the power circuit for the
external sensor are ANLED1 – KD1.
The auxiliary materials containers are placed in the innermost ring of the Sample Tray
and are detected by the internal sensor. The trimmer RV7 allows the adjustment of the
current in the emitter during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The outputs of the power circuit for the internal sensor are ANLED2 – KD2.
The external sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET1 which is filtered and amplifier to produce the signal SCUVEXT. This
signal is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
To select the right work’s level, the EPLD U6 sends the controls signal AUTOC to the
SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 that can link the trimmer RV10 to control the gain of the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U27A.
The trimmer RV10 allows, for the outermost ring, the adjustment of the amplifier gain
for the receiver signal during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
Another control signal is BLIVSCUV which is sent to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT
U48A to select the right work level and produce the logical signal PCUVEXT, then
this signal is read from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls
the LED DL1 that is lighted when the sample containers are detected during the
Autosampler / BCR Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The internal sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET2 witch is filtered and amplified to produce the signal SCUVINT, one of the
most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
The circuit produces also the logical signal PCUVINT which is read from the
PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL2 that is
lighted when the auxiliary materials containers are detected during the Autosampler
Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).

3.3.6.e Needles Sensor Section (See Figure 3.3.6 Drawing 6)
Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle
The Liquid Level Detector Board, connected to the needles block assembly, sends the
signals AGOSS for the sample needle and AGOSR for the reagent needle to the
Acquisition & Sensors Board. The EPLD U36 selects with the enabling signals
EAGOS - EAGOR the sample/reagent needle sensor signal. The EPLD U36 also
controls with the signals EAUTOZEROS – RAUTOZEROS the reading or the reset of
the auto-zero circuit. The selected signals enter in the specific circuit and produce the
output signal SLIQ, which is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
The EPLD U36 sends the control signals GXL1 – GXL2 to the SWITCH CIRCUIT
U51 which, according with the cycle in progress, sets the gain of the AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT U39B by connecting either the trimmer RV11 (for the Reagent) or RV12
(for the Sample) as appropriate.
The trimmer RV11 and RV12 allow the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the
output SLIQ during the instrument testing (see section 6.3.1). The signal SLIQ is also
compared with one of the three threshold signals SG1 – SG2 – SG3, this selection is
controlled by EPLD U36 to produce the logical signal PSAGO, then this signal is read
from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL4
that is lit when the liquids are detected during the Needles Sensor Test (see sub-
section 7.4.1). The PARALLEL I/O U5 sends to the EPLD U36 the signal EAGHITIP
aimed at enabling the entire liquid detectors circuit and the signal LGT2 to enables the
timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9.
3.3.6.f Reference Emulsion Presence Section (See Figure 3.3.6

Drawing 7)
Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle
The sensor located inside the cap of the Reference Emulsion bottle detects the volume
of the liquid in the bottle. The PARALLEL I/O U5 enables with the signal ECLKLIQ
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10, which outputs the clock signal
CLKSENSE, amplified and used with the name of CLKSINE as a reference. This
signal CLKSINE is sent to the sensor and returns to the board attenuated with the
name of BFLUSH. The signal attenuation is proportional to the missing volume of
Reference Emulsion, so the signal MFLUSH is the amplified reading of the sensor.
The EPLD U6 – U36 controls through the signal SFLH the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26.
This circuit then selects between the inputs MFLUSH and CLKSINE the output signal
MSENSE. The signal MSENSE is then amplified and output as SFLUSH from the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U24. The signal SFLUSH is then converted in the Multiplexer
& Acquisition Section.
The trimmer RV9 allows the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the output signal
SFLUSH during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.4.1). The trimmer RV8
allows the factory adjustment of the amplifier gain for the reference signal CLKSINE.

3.3.6.g Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (See Figure

3.3.6 Drawing 8)
Analysis Compartment Cover position detection
The magnetic sensor, located under the Fluidic Plate on the left side of the Analysis
Compartment, detects the presence of the magnet placed in the Analysis Compartment
Cover and outputs the signals COVDET1 – COVDET2 for the Acquisition & Sensor
Board. The circuit output, signal SHALL, is one of the most important signals
converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. The trimmer RV5 allows the
adjustments of the amplifier for the output signal SHALL during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.9.1). The signal SHALL is also used to generate the signal
PHALL which enters in the DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 to control the LED DL3 which is
illuminated when the cover is closed.
3.3.7 Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board # 4) (excluded from

ACL Elite)
The Rotor Exchange Module Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and
powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT),
+15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The R.E.M. Board is equipped with a microprocessor (CPU U1) and a resident
memory bank. The R.E.M. Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the serial communications line TXD4 – RXD4.
The “Rotor Exchange Module Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure
The main functions reported in the following summary are further expanded and
Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.7.a)
• Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch.

• Rotors Waste container presence detection.
• Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection.
• CPU ready condition circuit.
• Transport Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b).
• Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c).
• Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d).
• Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e).
• Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f).

Transport Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b)
• Transport Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c)
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d)
• Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e)
• New and used Rotors presence detection.
Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f)
• Rotors loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack.

• Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.a Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (See

Figure 3.3.7 Drawing 1)
Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch
Three Dual Channel Optical Switches are mounted on the Transport and on the Rotor
Arm assembly to detect the positions of the motors. The motor position is coded by an
Encoder disk or flag located on the movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch
sends to the Board # 4 the signals read on the Encoders. These signals enter in the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U27 – U28 – U29, which output the signals: SLOT_CAS –
EDGE_CAS for the Transport Motor, SLOT_ROT – EDGE_ROT for the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor and SLOT_HIG – EDGE_HIG for the Rotor Arm Vertical Motor.
These signals are routed directly or through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U6 into
the CPU U1.
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the CPU U1
to detect possible “motor failures.”
Rotors Waste container presence detection
The status of the mechanical switch, located inside the Rotors Waste container
compartment, is read through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U27, which outputs the signal
DOOR_WST to the CPU U1.

Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection
The magnetic sensor, located over the Rotors Feed Stack, is activated by a magnet
embedded inside the Feed Stack cover. The magnet sensor status is read through the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U30, which outputs the signal COP_SILOS to the CPU U1.
CPU ready condition circuit
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 controls the LED DL1, which is lit when the CPU
U1 is ready.
3.3.7.b Transport Motor Section (See Figure 3.3.7 Drawing 2)
Transport Motor drive circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Transport Motor
movement. The CPU U1 controls the TRANSPORT MOTOR DRIVER U14 – DX1,
whose output signals are the motor phases M1A – M1BB. The CPU U1 uses the
demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal M1_PWR_ENA to the driver
circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the presence of the signal MO_CAS
generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction. The TRANSPORT MOTOR
DRIVER U14 – DX1 is powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10.
The jumpers in M1 are factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
3.3.7.c Rotor Arm Motors Section (See Figure 3.3.7 Drawing 3)
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM
HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 – DX2, whose output signals are the motor
phases M2A – M2BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the
enable signal M2_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to
check the presence of the signal MO_ROT generated by the driver only if there is a
malfunction. The ROTOR ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 – DX2 is
powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M2 are
factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM VERTICAL
MOTOR DRIVER U18 – DX3, whose output signals are the motor phases M3A –
M3BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal
M3_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the
presence of the signal MO_HIG generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction.

The ROTOR ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U18 – DX3 is powered by the
LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M3 are factory pre-set to
obtain the full or half steps as required.
3.3.7.d Memory & Communication Section (See Figure 3.3.7

Drawing 4)
Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The CPU U1 controls through the data bus D0 – D7, the address bus A8 – A15, and
the BUFFER 3-STATE CIRCUIT U3, the RAM MEMORY U4 and the ROM
FLASH MEMORY U5, used for the program’s run-time and data storage.
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the enable signals to the memories.
The serial communication line of the CPU U1 is linked with the SERIAL I/O
CIRCUIT U8, which handles the serial communication line TXD4 – RXD4 to the
Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.e Infra Red Sensors Section (See Figure 3.3.7 Drawing 5)
New and Waste Rotors presence detection
Three optical sensors are located on the Rotor Exchange Module assy, with the
purpose of detecting the presence of the rotors along the route. This route begins in the
Rotors Feed Stack and ends in the Rotors Waste container. Two optical sensors are
located in the Rotors Feed Stack and one above the Rotors Waste container.
These three sensors detect the presence of the rotors using the refraction principle.
The upper sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of new rotors in the storage area of the Rotor Stack (over the mechanical
movements).
This sensor is powered by the POWER CIRCUIT Q7, which provides the signals
AFCS and CFC.
The sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the signals
FCS, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_STR. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmer PT1 used to adjust the signal during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).
The lower sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of a new rotor on the Rotor Transport plate.
AFCC and CFC.
FCC, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_CAS. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7.

This circuit is composed also by the trimmer PT2 used to adjust the signal during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).
The sensor located above the Rotors Waste container allows the system to detect the
conditions of “Waste container full.”
AFCW and CFC.
FCW, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_WST. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmers PT3 used to adjust the reading of the signal during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.2).
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the signal CK_LED, which is used to
enable the circuit.
3.3.7.f Electro Magnets Control Section (See Figure 3.3.7 Drawing

6)
Rotor loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack
Three similar mechanisms achieve the rotors loading on the Rotor Exchange Module
assembly. One of them is the Caliper, located over the Rotor Arm, used to load and
unload the Analysis Compartment and to move the used rotors to waste. Two of them
are located inside the Rotors Feed Stack to allow the correct rotors loading. These
mechanisms use three identical electromagnets. The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2
controls the POWER CIRCUIT Q1 – Q2 – Q3 – D7 – D8, which outputs the signals
used to power the electromagnets.
These signals are EMCL for the Caliper, EMS1 for the upper movement inside the
Rotors Feed Stack and EMS2 for the lower one. The signal EM_SUPPLY is used as
common to recover the high current produced during the electromagnet opening.
Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2)
The RESISTIVE CIRCUIT controls the signals for the electromagnets and sends the
warning TEM_CLM for the Caliper, TEM_ST1 for the upper movement, TEM_ST2
for the lower movement, and the signal 24V_MOT for the LOCAL GENERATOR
+24VPW. These signals are read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX
CIRCUIT U7. If a warning signal is active the CPU U1 commands the EPLD U2 to
disable the electromagnet with the failure and sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to
the Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.8 Motors Board (Board # 5)

The Motors Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered through the
Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), and +12Vdc (PW).

The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 “slave address
bus.” This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS2.
The “Motors Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure 3.3.8 Drawing 1 of
The main functions reported in the following summary are further expanded and
Motors Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.8.a)
• Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted
on the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the
Rotor Motor and the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor.
• Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board
# 2) and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
• Dilutor Electro Valves control.
• Coagulimetric Channel LED status control.
• Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b).
• Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c).
• Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d).
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e).
Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b)
• Autosampler Motor drives circuit.
Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c)
• Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

• Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d)
• Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit.

• Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit.
Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e)
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives circuit.

3.3.8.a Motors Board General Block Diagram (See Figure 3.3.8

Drawing 1)
Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted
on the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the
Rotor Motor and the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor
The positions of the motors are coded by Encoder disks or flags located on the
movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch sends to the Board # 5 the signals
read on the Encoders associated. These signals are:
• SMALOW – SMAHIGH for the Autosampler Motor
• SMOLOW – SMOHIGH for the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor
• SMVLOW – SMVHIGH for the Sample Arm Vertical Motor
• SMDREAG for the Reagent Dilutor Motor (uses a Single Channel Optical
Switch)
• SMDSAMP for the Sample Dilutor Motor (uses a Single Channel Optical
Switch)
• SMRTLOW – SMRTHIG for the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor
• SMRLOW – SMRHIGH for the Rotor Motor.
These signals enter in the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 – U8 then in the PARALLEL I/O
U1, which is controlled through the “slave data and address bus” from the Slave
Board (board # 2).
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the Slave
Board to detect possible “motor failures.”
Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board # 2)
and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
The Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on the Rotor Motor is very important to
achieve a proper reading during the Analysis Acquisition. Its signals SMRLOW –
SMRHIGH through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 – U8 enter the EPLD U41, which
sends the signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #
3) and to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Dilutor Electro Valves control
The Slave Board controls through the “slave data and address bus” the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which communicates the request status for the Electro Valves to the DRIVER
CIRCUIT U5. This driver energize/de-energize the Electro Valves through the power
signals EV1 – EV2.

Coagulimetric Channel LED status control
The Slave Board controls through the “slave data and address bus” the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which output enables the power circuit Q1 to send the signal LEDOFF to the
Coagulimetric Channel LED.
3.3.8.b Autosampler Motor Section (See Figure 3.3.8 Drawing 2)
Autosampler Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Autosampler
Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT
U24 controls the AUTOSAMPLER MOTOR DRIVER U21 – U22, which output
signals are the motor phases MFA1 – MFA4.
The Autosampler Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40, factory adjusted by means of the trimmer RV6.
The trimmer RV3 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U24.
3.3.8.c Sample Arm Motors Section (See Figure 3.3.8 Drawing 3)
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The EPLD U42 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U34 controls the SAMPLE ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U31
– U32, which output signals are the motor phases MFO1 – MFO4.
The Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U40.
The trimmer RV4 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U34.
Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U38 controls the SAMPLE ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U35 –
U36, which output signals are the motor phases MFV1 – MFV4.
The Sample Arm Vertical Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. This circuit is also powered from the
LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW U40. The trimmer RV5 is factory adjusted to set the
reference voltage to the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U38.

3.3.8.d Dilutors Motors Section (See Figure 3.3.8 Drawing 4)
Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Reagent Dilutor
U16 controls the REAGENT DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U13 – U14, which output
signals are the motor phases MFR1 – MFR4.
The Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40. The trimmer RV1 is factory adjusted to sets the reference voltage to the
demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U16.
Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Dilutor
U20 controls the SAMPLE DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U17 – U18, which output
signals are the motor phases MFS1 – MFS4.
The Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40. The trimmer RV2 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the
3.3.8.e Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (See Figure 3.3.8 Drawing

5)
Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives stage
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Magnetic Stirrer
Motors movement. The EPLD U43 controls the MAGNETIC STIRRER MOTOR
DRIVER U25 – U26 – U27 – U28, which outputs signals are the motor phases
AGTR1A – AGTR4B. The driver circuit is powered from the LOCAL SWITCHING
POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. These driver circuits work with AC motors, so they
need the frequency signal STFREQ (50 Hz) from the Acquisition & Sensors Board.
The REFERENCE VOLTAGE GENERATOR U39 and the THRESHOLD CIRCUIT
U11 allow to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 – U12 to detect a possible
malfunction of the magnetic stirrers. In case a malfunction is detected the
COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 – U12 outputs the warning signals ALAGTR1 -
ALAGTR4. These warning signals are read through the PARALLEL I/O U1 by the
Slave Board, and by the EPLD U43 that turns off the magnetic stirrer motor raising a
fail warning.
3.3.9 Photometric & Temperatures Control (Board # 6)

The Photometric & Temperatures Control Board, is located in the system Card
Housing, and powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the

+5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA), +9Vdc (PW), +12Vdc (PW) and
+70Vdc (PW).
The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 “slave address
bus.” This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS3.
The “Photometric & Temperatures Control Board General Block Diagram” is
available in Figure 3.3.9 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings.” The main
functions reported in the following outline are further expanded and presented on
specific paragraphs.
Photometric & Temperatures Control General Block Diagram
• Rotor Motor Section (see 3.3.9.a).

• Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.b).
• Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.c).
• Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d).
• Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e).
Rotor Motor Section (see 3.3.9.a)
• Rotor Motor drives circuit.

• Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see 3.3.9.b)
• Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see 3.3.9.c)
• Rotor Holder temperature detection and control.
Peltier Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d)
• Peltier temperature detection and control.

• +5VREF generator circuit.
Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e)
• Transport plate temperature detection and control.

• Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control.

3.3.9.a Rotor Motor Section (See Figure 3.3.9 Drawing 2)
Rotor Motor drives circuit
The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Rotor Motor movement. The EPLD U5 controls the ROTOR
MOTOR DRIVER U7 – U8 – U10 – U14, which output signals are the motor phases
RF1 – RF4.
The Rotor Motor drive circuits are powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW
U13.
Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2)
The circuits ROTOR MOTOR DRIVER U7 – U8 – U10 – U14 send the signals
VSENSE1 – VSENSE2 to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12, which is aimed to
detect possible motor failure. If a failure is present this circuit outputs the signal
IRFAIL, which enters the BUFFER CIRCUIT U2. The buffer sends the interrupt
signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The Slave Board disables the interrupt ROTFAIL through the PARALLEL I/O U4,
which sends the signal ROTCLR to the EPLD U5. The EPLD U5 controls with the
signal NROTCLR the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18, which sends the signal CLFAIL to
reset the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12.
If there is a warning for high current, the driver circuits output the signals AACHOP –
BBCHOP, which are used to disable the EPLD U5
3.3.9.b Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (See Figure

3.3.9 Drawing 3)
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.
• The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor movement. The
EPLD U5 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U37 controls the
COVER MOTOR DRIVER U15 – U16, which outputs signals are the motor
phases MFT1 – MFT4.
• The Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit is powered from the
LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW U13.
• The trimmer RV6 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the

3.3.9.c Rotor Thermoregulation Section (See Figure 3.3.9 Drawing

4)
Rotor Holder temperature detection and control
The thermistor located inside the Rotor Holder sends the signal SROT1 – SROT2 to
the Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR1, the reference resistance R59 and to the
trimmer RV1. When the jumper JR1 is on the check position the trimmer RV1 allows
the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR1 is in the reading position
the signal SROT1 – SROT2 is amplified and outputs as TROT, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature of
the Rotor Holder, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INCOIL to the EPLD U6. The EPLD U6 controls the thermoregulation circuit, which
provides the signal Z1 – FOTGND to the heating coil of the Rotor Holder. The circuit
that provides the power is also composed of:
• The PACKET DELAY CIRCUIT U26A – U21 output signal TASTD, which
controls the timing of the sinusoidal wave signals packet.
• The PHASE DISPLACEMENT CIRCUIT U22 output the signal COMROT
that, with the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19, controls the phase of the sinusoidal
wave signal generated by the OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT U23.
• The IMPULSE GENERATOR U24 generate the signal that triggers the
POWER CIRCUIT Q11 that activates the LC oscillator circuit providing
heating to the rotor holder. The trimmer RV2 is factory set to obtain the most
suitable time shift to the power signal and avoid overcurrent which may
damage the POWER CIRCUIT Q11.
3.3.9.d Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (See Figure 3.3.9

Drawing 5)
Peltier temperature detection and control
The thermistor located inside the Peltier sends the signal SPELT1 to the Photometric
& Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR2, with the reference resistance R86 and to
the trimmer RV3. When the jumper JR2 is on the check position the trimmer RV3
allows the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR2 is in the reading
position the signals SPELT1 is amplified and outputs as TPELT1, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
the Peltier, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal INPELT1
to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONPELT1 to active the

CURRENT GENERATOR CIUCUIT U32A, which provide the current signal +VP1
to the Peltier cell used to cool the Peltier assembly.
Another identical circuit, as reported in fig. 3.3.9 Drawing 5, is present on the Board #
6 for the ACL 1000, but not used in the ACL Elite.
+5VREF generator circuit
The Board # 6 has a dedicated voltage generator circuit, called REFERENCE

VOLTAGE GENERATOR +5VREF U29, which provides the signal +5VREF.
This reference signal is used in the temperature control sections and is also sent for the
conversion to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The reference value is factory pre-set through the trimmer RV4.
3.3.9.e Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (See Figure 3.3.9
Drawing 6)
Transport Plate temperature detection and control
The thermistor located inside the Transport Plate sends the signal SSLITTA to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSLITTA to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
the Transport Plate, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18. This circuit outputs the signal ONSLITTA
to activate the POWER CIRCUIT Q10, which provides the current signal PSLITTA to
the heating pad used to heat the transport plate.
NOTE: The Transport Plate temperature detection and control is not used on the
ACL Elite. On the ACL Elite a jumper resistor pack is installed to simulate Transport
Plate temperature.
Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control
The thermistor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack sends the signal SSILOS to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSILOS to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
the Feed Stack, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONSILOS to
active the POWER CIRCUIT Q14, which provide the current signal PSILOS to the
heating pad used to heat the Rotors Feed Stack.
For the ACL Elite, this circuit controls the rotor storage area pre heating.

3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board

The Switching Power Supply Board, located under the dilutor assembly, provides to
the instrument +5VDGT, +12VDGT, +15VANA, -15VANA, +9VPW, +12VPW,
+70VPW and +6VLAMP.
The Power Entry provides the signal LINE-IN that allows the operation of the
Switching Power Supply. This signal must be in the range from 100-120Vac to 220-
240Vac (50-60 Hz).
The “Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram” is available in Figure
3.3.10 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings.” The main functions reported in the
following outline are further expanded and presented on specific paragraphs.
Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram (see 3.3.10.a)
• Line filter.
• Automatic identification of the line voltage.
• Control & Protection stage for all the generators.
• Sends the ready signal to the system.
• Control the turn off of the power voltages.
• Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit.
• Communicate warning status to the system.
3.3.10.a Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram

(See Figure 3.3.10 Drawing 1)
Line filter
The Switching Power Supply Board has a LINE FILTER integrated on board.
Automatic identification of the line voltage
The Board through the POWER FACTOR CORRECTION BOARD PCB1 identifies
the line voltage connected to the instrument, and sets the Switching Power Supply
Board as appropriate. The line voltage acceptable for the Switching Power Supply
Board are100-120Vac to 220-240Vac (50-60 Hz).

Control & Protection stage for all the generators
The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the voltage generators, and
protects them from short circuit or high voltage. If one of these problems is present on
the voltage GENERATOR +5VDGT, +15VANA and -15VANA, the POWER
CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sets to “Protection Mode”, turns off all the dc voltage and
lights the LED DL1. To recover proper working conditions it is necessary to switch
the system OFF for at least 20 seconds prior switching it back ON.
The TRIMMER RV2 – RV3 – RV4 – RV5 – RV6 are used to adjust the digital and
analog voltage outputs. The Test Points TP1 – TP9 are used for factory testing of the
Switching Power Supply Board.
Sends the ready signal to the system
At the instrument turn on, the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the dc
voltage outputs, when all of them are stabilized, sends the signal INIT to the Slave
Board (Board # 2).
Control the turn off of the power voltages
When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receives the signal POWEROFF from
the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), it disables the power voltages
GENERATOR +9VPW, +12VPW and +70VPW.
Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit
When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receive the signal LAMPWR from the
Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), enables the GENERATOR +6VLAMP that
turns on the Chromogenic Lamp.
Communicate warning status to the system
The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sends three warning signals to the system in
case of malfunction, which are detected as follows:
• The signal POWERFAIL is sent to the Slave Board (Board # 2) if the output
voltages are lower than the 80% of the normal value, or in any case before that
the Switching Power Supply is turned off.
• The signal THERFAIL is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3)
if the environment temperature is over 60 C°. If this temperature rises up to
read 75 C°, the Board sets to “Protection Mode” and turns off the instrument.
• The signal MISSLAMP is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3)
if a Short Circuit or a no load is detected on the GENERATOR +6VLAMP.

3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit

This sub-section provides information about the Instrument Ground System, in order
to help the service engineer in the assembling of the circuit placed in whole the
Instrument.
The diagram of the “Instrument Ground Circuit” is available in Figure 3.3.11 Drawing
1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings.”
3.3.12 Interface Board

The interface board provides serial and USB connections to peripheral devices such as
printer, mouse, keyboard and barcode scanner as well as communication to a host
system. A parallel printer port is also supported. The Interface Board connects to the
Pentium CPU.
NOTE: If the USB ports detect an overload the USB Hub disables that port or. To re-
enable the USB ports the instrument must be re-booted. The interface board is also
protected by 2 onboard fuses.
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description

This section contains a list of the main hardware components and modules, which
interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
The Figure below highlights some of the main hardware components of the ACL
Elite/Elitepro as viewed from the front of the instrument, while the main electronic
boards and system interconnection ports are located on the rear of the system.

1. Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle with liquid level sensor.

2. Dilutors Assy.
3. Autosampler Housing with internal BCR and presence sensors for cups/tubes on
Sample Tray.
4. Reagent Tray Area with Peltier Assy for Reagents cooling & stirring. (positions R9-
R12 ACL ElitePro only).
5. Sample Arm with liquid level sensors in the Rinse / Waste position.
6. USB or floppy drive port (covered).
7. LCD display with Touch Screen.
8. Rotor Stack Assy. (rotor pre-heating area for ACL Elite).
9. Rotor Holder automatic Cover.
10. Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm Assy. (excluded on ACL Elite).
11. Rotor Waste Container compartment with presence and status sensors.
12. Alphanumeric Keyboard.
13. Adapters Area.
14. Liquid Waste Outlet.
3.5 Software Description

This section contains a general description of the main software and its physical
location in the system.
At start up, the instrument shows the CPU Master Board (Board #1) BIOS boot
screen with the CPU Master initialization.
Then the system loads the operating system and the application program from the
Hard Disk Drive and performs the initialization of both the electronic boards and the
modules.
The Hard Disk Drive stores all the software of the instrument, both the application
program (Analytical and Service programs) and backup files of the software working
on the Slave Board (Board #2) and R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
These two specific softwares are stored in the memories located onboard the Slave
Board and the R.E.M. Board where are located two slave microprocessors.
The two microprocessors load the software directly from the memories (Flash Eprom)
at the instrument turn on.
In order to load a new software revison in the instrument or download the software
from the Hard Disk Drive to the boards memories, the software upgrade procedure has
to be performed as described in the sub-section 7.16.

Chapter 4 Parts Replacement

This chapter contains general descriptions about the operations required to replace the
main assemblies as well as the electronic boards and the covers present on the ACL
Elite/ElitePro system.
4.1 Parts Replacement ............................................................................................... 1
4.2 Instrument Covers Removal.............................................................................. 27
4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement ....................................................................... 28
CAUTION: Prior to any part replacement insure that the unit is turned off and power
cord disconnected.
4.1 Parts Replacement

This section is designed to guide the Service Engineer through the replacement of the
major assemblies contained in the Instrument.
Following are the specific sub-sections for each module.
4.1.1 Autosampler Assy Replacement
4.1.2 Peltier 1 Assy, Peltier 2 Assy Replacement
4.1.3 Sample Arm Assy Replacement
4.1.4 Rotor Holder Assy Replacement
4.1.5 Rotor Exchange Module Replacement. (excluded on ACL Elite)
4.1.6 Rotor Cover Assy Replacement
4.1.7 Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
4.1.8 Dilutors Replacement
4.1.9 Display Replacement
4.1.10 Hard Disk Drive Replacement
4.1.11 Rotor Preheater Assy Replacement (ACL Elite only)
4.1.1 Autosampler Assembly Replacement
The Autosampler Assembly is composed of a grey upper support called Flange

Adjustable that is moved by the mechanical assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate,
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement Page 1 of 29

called Autosampler Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system
through the Module Interconnection Board.
Procedure to Remove the Autosampler Assy
Materials / tools necessary: Standard tools

Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure:
1 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Flange Adjustable.
2 Remove the Flange Adjustable.
3 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Internal Ring Sensor to the Fluidic Plate.
4 Remove from the Module Interconnection Board the connectors P72, P73, P74
and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11
Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
5 Remove the 4 column screws that mount the Autosampler Movement Assy to
the Fluidic Plate.
6 Remove the Autosampler Movement Assy.
The Autosampler Movement Assy includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws)
• 1 Autosampler Internal Ring Sensor (fixed with 1 strap)
Procedure to Replace the Autosampler Assy
Page 2 of 29 Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Autosampler
Assy” paying attention to the position of the Internal Ring Sensor cable with
respect to the encoder disk.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Autosampler Motor as described in
the sub-section 7.6.5.
3 Follow the procedure for the Autosampler Assy module centering as described
in the sub-section 7.7.2.
4 Perform the check out & adjustment for the Internal/External Rings Sensors as
described in the sub-section 7.5.3.
5 Perform the verification/adjustment of the Needles Sensors as described in the
sub-section 7.4.
4.1.2 Peltier 1 Assy, Peltier 2 Assy Replacement
The Peltier 1 Assembly is located under the Fluidic Plate and is connected to the
system through the Module Interconnection Board.
Procedure to Remove the Peltier 1 Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P121, P122, P123, P124, P126 and the 2 ground
cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the
chapter 10 “Drawings”).
2 Remove the 3 screws that secure the Peltier 1 Assembly.
3 Remove the Peltier 1 Assembly.
The Peltier 1 Assy includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Peltier Temperature Sensor (fixed with 2 screws and 1 strap)
• Stirrer Motors (removable after removed the black dissipater, which is fixed
with 3 screws located under the black dissipater)

Procedure to Replace the Peltier 1 Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Peltier 1 Assy”
paying attention to the location of the cables on the rear of the assembly.
2 Verify with a Magnetic Stirrer Bar the functionality of the 4 Stirrer Motors.
3 Verify that the Peltier 1 thermoregulation system works correctly as described
in the sub-section 7.14.
Procedure to Remove Peltier 2 Assembly (ACL ElitePro)

Peltier 2 Assembly
Precaution
following procedure.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the Sample Arm Movement Assembly to gain access
to the Peltier 2 Assembly for removal. To remove the Sample Arm Movement
Assembly refer to Section 4.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly Replacement.
1. Remove the sample Arm Movement Assembly.
2. Remove the connectors P131 and P132 and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument
Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3. Remove the 3 screws that secure the Peltier 2 Assembly.
4. Remove the Peltier 2 Assembly.
Procedure to Replace the Peltier 2 Assy (ACL ElitePro)

Precaution
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the Sample Arm Movement Assembly to gain access
to the Peltier 2 Assembly for removal. To remove the Sample Arm Movement
Assembly refer to Section 4.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly Replacement.
1. Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Peltier 2 Assy”
paying attention to the location of the cables on the rear of the assembly.
2. Replace the Sample Arm Movement Assembly. (Refer to section 4.1.3).
3. Perform all Sample Arm Movement and Sample Arm Assembly alignments as
described in sections 7.6.3, 7.6.4, 7.7.1, and 7.7.4.
4. Verify that the Peltier 1 thermoregulation system works correctly as described in
the sub-section 7.14.
4.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly Replacement
The Sample Arm Assembly is composed of an upper support called Sample Arm and
a lower assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate, called the Sample Arm Movement
Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the Module
Interconnection Board.
Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm

Precaution
1 Loosen the knob, located on the rear of the Sample Arm, which fixes the
Needles Block.
2 Remove the Needles Block and then remove its connector for the liquid
sensor.
3 Remove the upper cover of the Sample Arm fixed with a screw.
4 Remove the Liquid Level Detection Cable from the Needles & Wash-R
5 Loosen the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support.
6 Remove the Sample Arm.
The Sample Arm includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Needles Block
• 1 Liquid Level Detection Board
• 1 Liquid Level Detection Cable

Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the Sample Arm as described in the above procedure.
2 Remove the connectors P91, P92, P93, P94 and the 2 ground cables (see
“Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
3 Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
4 Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
The Sample Arm Movement Assy includes the following spare parts:
Procedure to Replace the Sample Arm Movement Assy

Sample Arm Centring Tool
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Sample
Arm Movement Assy.”
2 Center the shaft of the assembly in the hole of the Fluidic Plate using the
Sample Arm Centering Tool.

3 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample Arm Horizontal and
Vertical Motor as described in the sub-section 7.6.3 and 7.6.4.
Procedure to Replace the Sample Arm

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm.”
2 Follow the procedure for the module centering of this assembly as described in
the sub-section 7.7.1. and also the procedure to fine adjust the Needles Block
Assy position as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
3 Perform the Liquid Level Sensor test as described in the sub-section 7.4.
4.1.4 Rotor Holder Movement Assy Replacement
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Rotor
Holder Movement Assy is connected to the system through the Photometer Interface
Board.
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.

2 Remove the connectors P140, P141, P143, P144, P145, the Coag. Coaxial
Cable from the Board #3 and the 3 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground
Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3 Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
4 Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Dual Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screws)
• 1 Rotor Holder Snap (fixed with 1 side screw)
• 1 Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable (fixed with 1 setscrew and 1 screw for the
ground cable)
• 1 Optical Collimator Assy (fixed with 2 screws)
• 1 Brushes Assembly (fixed with 2 screws and soldered at 2 wires)
• 1 Photometer Interface Board (fixed with 3 screws)
• 1 Coagulimetric Channel LED (fixed with 2 screws and 1 set screw)
• 1 Optic Fiber Assy for Coagulimetric LED
Following are notices about particular Spare Parts replacements:
• Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable must be located in the bottom of the sensor
housing and insure the Black Spacer is located between the Coagulimetric
Sensor and its glass windows under the Rotor Holder.
• Optical Collimator Assy must be placed in the bottom of its housing and the 2
screws must be properly tightened. The other side of the Optical Collimator
must be placed in the bottom of its Halogen Lamp Assy housing paying
attention not to damage the fibre when tightening the setscrew.
• Brushes Assembly must be aligned so that the four brushes completely touch
the two rings under the Rotor Holder.
• Coagulimetric Channel LED and Fibre must be located with the Optic fibre in
the bottom of the Rotor Holder housing (see Coagulimetric Channel in section
7.2).

Procedure to Replace the Rotor Holder Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Holder
Movement Assy.”
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Motor as described in the
sub-section 7.6.1.
3 Follow the procedure for the module centering of the Rotor Holder as
4 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Holder works correctly
as described in the sub-section 7.14.
5 Perform the tests for both the Coagulimetric and the Chromogenic Channels as
described in sections 7.2 and 7.3.
4.1.5 Rotor Exchange Module Assembly Replacement (not included on

ACL Elite)
NOTE: Section 4.1.5 is not applicable to the ACL Elite.

The Rotor Exchange Module (REM) Assembly is composed of several mechanical
assemblies assembled on a common support, located under the Fluidic Plate, called
Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The REM Assembly is located to the right of the Rotor Holder Cover and is covered
by the REM Cover. This includes the Rotor Stack module cover that allows the
insertion of new rotors in the Rotor Stack.
On the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) are located: the Rotor Arm, the Rotor
Transport and the Rotor Stack. Under the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is
located the Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The Rotor Transport mechanical movement
is not removable as it is incorporated in the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).

The whole REM is connected to the system through the Upper and the Lower REM
Interconnection Boards. Following are the specific paragraph for the REM sub-
modules replacement.
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module (Basic) Replacement
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Arm Assembly is composed of an upper support called Rotor Arm and by a
lower assembly, located under the REM and a common support under the Fluidic
Plate, called Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the
system through the REM Upper and Lower Interconnection Board.
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm

Precaution
1 Remove the connector P112 of the Electro-Magnet.
2 Loosen the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support securing the
arm to the shaft.
3 Remove the Rotor Arm.
The Rotor Arm includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Spring for Rotor Arm
• 1 Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws)

Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P104, P105, P107, P108 and the ground cable (see
“Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
2 Remove the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) as described in this sub-
section at the paragraph 4.1.5.d.
3 Remove the 3 nuts that fix the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
4 Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
The Rotor Arm Movement Assy includes the following spare parts:
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Arm Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to remove the Rotor Arm
Movement Assy.”
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Rotor Arm Horizontal and Vertical
Motor as described in the sub-sections 7.6.8 and 7.6.9.

Procedure to Replace the Rotor Arm

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm.”
2 Follow the module centering procedure to align the Rotor Arm at the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.6.
3 Follow the module centering procedure to align the REM at the Rotor Holder
as described in the sub-section 7.7.7.
4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Transport Assembly is composed of a black upper support (like a Rotor
Holder) called Rotor Transport and by a mechanical movement (moved by the
Transport Motor) incorporated in the REM Assy (Basic) located under the Fluidic
Plate. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the REM Lower
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Transport

Precaution
1 Remove the connector P111 of the thermoregulation.
2 Loose the 3 screws that fix the Rotor Transport.
3 Remove the Rotor Transport.
The Rotor Transport doesn’t include a spare part.

Procedure to Replace the Rotor Transport

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor
Transport.”
2 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Transport works
correctly as described in the section 7.14.
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assy Replacement
The Rotor Stack Assy is located on the right side of the REM The whole assembly is
connected to the system through the REM Upper Interconnection Board.
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Stack Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P113, P114, P116, P117, P118, P119 and the ground
cable (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter
10 “Drawings”).
2 Remove the 3 screws, located under the common support, which fix the Rotor
Stack Assembly (see “Rotor Exchange Module Replacement” figure 4.1.5
Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3 Remove the Rotor Stack Assy.
The Rotor Stack Assy includes the following spare parts:
• Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws)
• Spring for Rotor Stack 1 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor (fixed with a screw)
• 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper
• 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower

Procedure to Replace the Rotor Stack Assy

Silos Alignment tool
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Stack
Assy.”
2 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Stack works correctly as
described in the section 7.14.
3 Follow the module centering procedure to align the Rotor Stack and the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.5.
4 Perform the Optic Sensor test for the Rotor Stack as described in the sub-
section 7.5.1.
5 Verify that the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor works correctly as described in the
sub-section 7.9.2.
6 Perform the RA – SL – RH test as described in the sub-section 7.7.9 to verify
the proper rotors movements inside the Rotor Stack.
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) Replacement
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is an assembly that incorporates the black
REM Common Support plate, the Rotor Transport mechanical movement and the
Transport Motor.
Procedure to Remove the REM Assy (Basic)

Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
2 Remove the 2 screws, which fix the Coag. Channel LED without removing the
Optic Fiber.
3 Remove the Rotor Arm as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.a.
4 Remove the Rotor Transport as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.b.
5 Remove the Rotor Stack as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.c.
6 Remove the connectors P103, P104, P105, P106, P107, P108, P109, P110 and
the 2 ground (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the

7 Raise the Instrument on the 2 Main Support legs.

8 Remove the 5 fixing screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole
assembly (See the “REM Common Support Position 3” in the drawing “REM
Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
9 Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly push down the left side of the
REM Common Support (See the “REM Common Support Position 2” in the
drawing “REM Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the
10 Remove the whole REM Common Support following the arrows (See the
“REM Common Support Position 1” in the drawing “REM Replacement”
available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
11 Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy fixed with 3 nuts.
The assembly that includes the black REM Common support plate, the Rotor
Transport mechanical movement and the Transport Motor is called Rotor Exchange
Module Assy (Basic).
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Rotor Transport Motor (fixed with 4 screws)
• 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full (fixed with 4 screws)
Procedure to Replace the REM Assy (Basic)

Precaution
1 Secure with the 3 nuts the Rotor Arm Movement Assy in place.
2 Put the whole REM Common Support under the tilted Instrument (See the
“REM Common Support Position 1” in the drawing “REM Replacement”

3 Following the arrows lift the right side of the REM Common Support, paying
attention to center the 3 Rotor Stack fixing point holes in the Fluidic Plate (See
the “REM Common Support Position 2” in the drawing “REM Replacement”
4 Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly lift the left side of the REM
Common Support (See the “REM Common Support Position 3” in the
drawing “REM Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the
5 Secure the 5 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole
assembly (See the “5 REM fixing points”).
6 Now follow in the opposite direction from the point 7 to the point 1 the
procedure for removing the REM Assy (Basic).
7 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Transport Motor as described in
NOTE: It’s required to perform the relevant check out procedures for all the other
assemblies that had been removed.
4.1.6 Rotor Cover Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Cover Assembly is composed of an upper cover called Rotor Cover, by a
mechanical support called Arm with Pulley and by an assembly, located under the
Fluidic Plate, called Rotor Cover Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected
to the system through the Photometer Interface Board.

Rotor Cover Assy
Arm with Pulley
Rotor Cover Belt
Rotor Cover
Movement Assy
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the 3 screws, located on the lower black side, which fix the upper
white support.
2 Remove the 2 screws, located on the metallic mechanical arm, which fix the
black lower support.
3 Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
The Rotor Cover includes the following spare parts:
• 1 Chromogenic Coaxial Cable (connected to the Board #3).
• 1 Filter Optical 405 nm (located in the black “Filter & Sensor Housing”, fixed
with 5 screws, and held in the bottom with a white spacer).

• 1 Chromogenic Sensor Board (located in the Filter & Sensor Housing color
black and fixed with 6 screws).
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Cover Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover”
paying attention to the clearance of the optic parts.
2 Perform the tests for the Chromogenic Channel as described in the sub section
7.3.
Procedure to Remove the Arm with Pulley

Precaution
1 Remove the Rotor Holder as described in the sub-sections 4.1.4.
2 Remove the Rotor Cover and the Rotor Cover Movement Assy as described in
this sub-section 4.1.6.
3 Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
4 Remove the Arm with Pulley (fixed with 4 screws).
The Arm with Pulley includes the following spare part.
• 1 Rotor Cover Belt
Procedure to Replace the Arm with Pulley

Precaution
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Arm with Pulley”,
paying attention to secure the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable in a proper position to
prevent damage during the Arm with Pulley movement.

Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover Movement Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
2 Remove the connectors P143, P144 and the ground cable (see “Instrument
Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3 Remove Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.4.
4 Remove all the 5 Boards in the Card Housing.
5 Remove the bulkhead and the 2 fixing knobs located inside the Card Housing.
6 Loosen the 3 screws that fix the Cover Movement Assy.
7 Loosen the tension of the Rotor Cover Belt lifting the Cover Movement Assy
and free the belt from the pulley holding the motor encoder at the top.
8 Remove the 3 loosen screws and the Cover Movement Assy.
The Rotor Cover Movement: Motor assemblies are unique with respect to the encoder
attached to the motor. Make certain to order the correct motor for the model
instrument (Elite or Elite Pro) you are working on.
Rotor Cover Encoders:

Positions of importance for the Rotor Cover:

ELITE ELITE PRO
Open: 36 Open: 51
Intermediate: 0 Intermediate: 0
Closed: 100 Closed: 100
Mechanical Stops: Mechanical Stops:
10-25 Minus (-) signs 2-5 Minus (-) signs
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Cover Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary: Rotor Cover Motor Centring Tool

Rotor Cover Encoder Centring Tool
Precaution
1 Assemble the Rotor Cover Movement Assy (without tightening the 3 screws).
2 Lift the Rotor Cover Movement Assy and, with the Encoder at the top, insert
the Rotor Cover Belt on the Rotor Cover Motor pulley.
3 Using the Rotor Cover Centering Tool in the niche between the support and
the assembly, push down the Rotor Cover Movement Assy until the Rotor
Cover Belt reaches the proper tension (take as example the tension of the other
belts on the assemblies in the instrument). In this condition tighten the 3
screws paying attention to the horizontal positioning of the assembly.
4 Loosen the 2 setscrews that fix the Encoder to the motor shaft, rotate the
Encoder until it is in the middle of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor.
5 Lower the Encoder until its upper side is horizontal and about 1 mm above the
upper side of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor then tighten the 2
setscrews.
Dual Channel
Optical Switch
NOTE: If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder Centering Tool.

6 Assemble and fix with 2 knobs the bulkhead located inside the rear of the Card
Housing.

7 Insert and connect the 5 Boards in the Card Housing.

8 Assemble the Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section
4.1.4.
9 Connect P143, P144 and the ground (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure
3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
10 Assemble the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
11 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Cover Motor as described in
4.1.7 Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
The Halogen Lamp Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Halogen Lamp Socket
is powered directly through the Switching Power Supply Board.
It is possible, without removing the Front Cover, to change the Halogen Lamp Socket
Assy through the Rotor Waste compartment.
Procedure to Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the connector of the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy.
2 Remove the power connector from the Switching Power Supply Board (fixed
with 2 screws) and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit”
figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3 Remove the REM Cover.
4 Remove the 2 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate that fixes the Halogen Lamp
Assy.
5 Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy paying attention not to damage the Optical
Collimator Assy.
6 Remove the Optical Collimator Assy loosening the setscrew.
The Halogen Lamp Assy includes the following spare part:
• 1 Halogen Lamp Socket (fixed with 1 knob and 1 screw)

Procedure to Replace the Halogen Lamp Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Halogen Lamp
Assy” paying attention not to damage the Optical Collimator Assy when
tightening the setscrew.
2 Perform the “Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment” test as described
in the sub-section 7.3.1.
4.1.8 Dilutor Assy Replacement
The Dilutor Assy is located under the rectangular Transparent Cover behind the
Sample Tray. The Dilutor Assy is connected to the system through the Module
Procedure to Remove the Dilutor Assy

Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P81, P82, P83, P84, P85, P86 and the ground cable
(see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).

2 Remove the fluidic tube that connects the Wash-R Emulsion Bottle to the T
Connector.
3 Remove the 2 fluidic tubes that connect the 2 Dilutor Electro-Valves to the
Needles Block.
4 Remove the 3 screws that fix the Dilutor Assy.
5 Remove the Dilutor Assy.
The Dilutor Assy includes the following spare parts:
• Single Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screw)
• 1 Dilutor Chamber (fixed with 2 screw)
• Dilutor Electro-Valve 3 Way (fixed with 2 screw)
• 1 T Connector
Procedure to Replace the Dilutor Assy

Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Dilutor Assy.”
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample/Reagent Motors as
3 Perform the Volume Check and the Dilutor Test as described in “Dilutor
Module” test in the section 7.8.
4.1.9 Display Assembly Replacement
The Display Assembly is located on a tower support on the right side of the
Instrument. The Display Assembly is connected to the CPU Master Board and to the
PC104 Board through the Display Cable.
Procedure to Remove the Display Assembly

Precaution
1. Disconnect the VGA, Power and Serial Cables from the rear of the monitor.
2. While holding the monitor loosen and remove the black knob. Remove the white
and grey washers.
3. Remove the monitor from the support pole. Remove the metallic washer that sits
between the monitor bracket and the support pole.
clamp
Bracket attached
to monitor
Serial cable
Knob with
washers
underneath Power cable
VGA cable
Procedure to Replace the Display Assembly

Precaution
1. Mount flat metallic washer onto support pole.
2. Mount bracket attached with monitor onto support pole.
3. Mount gray washer so that the outer diameter is touching the surface of the bracket
and the inner diameter raised, then the white washer.
4. Mount black clamping knob onto support pole. Tighten securely.
5. Insert power connector into receptacle at the base of the monitor. Make sure the
orientation of the power cable is similar to what is shown in the picture above.
6. Connect the serial and VGA cables to the monitor.
7. Perform the Touch Screen Calibration procedure as described in section 7.12.

4.1.10 Hard Disk Drive Replacement
The Hard Disk Drive is located under the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104 Board
support in the middle of the rear side of the Instrument. The Hard Disk Drive is
connected to the CPU Master Board through the HDD data flat cable.
Procedure to Remove the Hard Disk Drive

Precaution
1. Remove all the cables connected to the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104 Board.
2. Remove the Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interconnection Board support that is
fixed with 2 screws, and remove Video Cable connector bracket.
3. Remove the HDD with the CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board removing the
2 external screws and loosening the 1 internal screw.
4. Remove the HDD power and data cables connectors.
5. Remove the HDD that is fixed with 4 screws.
Procedure to Replace the Hard Disk Drive

Precaution
1. Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Hard Disk Drive.”
2. Perform the procedures described in the section 7.16 “Software Checking and
Loading.”
NOTE: In order to completely restore the system status on the new Hard Disk Drive
as before the replacement of the damaged one, it is necessary to perform the following
operations:
1. Format and partition the new hard disk drive as described in sub-section 7.16.6.
2. Perform Software Installation procedure as described in section 7.16.5
3. Perform the Upgrade procedure for the IL Library described in the sub-
section7.16.4.
4. Perform the Restore procedure of the last Backup of the system
configurationavailable described in the sub-section 7.16.3.

4.1.11 Rotor Preheater Assembly (ACL Elite only)
The ACL Elite Rotor Preheater Assy is located on the right side of the instrument. The
assembly is connected to the system through the REM Upper Interconnection Board
by connector P117 and the REM Lower Interconnection Board by connector P111.
Three screws mount the Rotor Preheater assembly to the instrument.
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Preheater Assy

Precaution
1. Remove the connectors P111 (Lower Interconnection board) and P117 (Upper
Interconnection Board)
2. Remove the 3 screws, located under the common support, which fix the Rotor
Preheater Assembly.
3. Remove the Rotor Preheater Assy.

Procedure to Replace the Rotor Preheater Assy

1. Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor
PreheaterAssy.”
2. Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Preheater works
correctly as described in the section 7.14.
4.2 Instrument Covers Removal

This section is designed to clarify the Instrument Covers names and positions as well
as the removing / assembling sequence and fixing points.
Following is the Covers lists with the relevant fixing points.
Cover Name Fixing point Note
1 Left Side Cover 3 Screws
2 Right Side Cover 3 Screws
3 Upper Cover 4 Screws Must remove the Left &
Right Side Covers first.
(2 for each side)
4 Rear Cover 2 Screws Must remove the Left & the
(1 for each side + 2 hook
shape on the bottom)
5 Front Cover 6 Screws Must remove the Left &
(2 for each side + 2 under
the Front Lower Plate)
6 Front Lower Plate 2 Knob Must remove the Left &
Right Side Covers and the
Front Cover first.
7 REM Cover No screws Remove with caution the 3
fixing points at pressure.
8…Reagent 3 screws
Transparent Cover
9 Dilutors Transparent No screws Press with cautions the 2
Cover fixing points at pressure.
10 Keyboard Support 4 Screws
(2 for each slider)
The table refers to the drawing “Instrument Covers” in the figure 4.2 Drawing 1 of the
chapter 10 “Drawings.”

4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement

This section provides information on the electronic boards located in several places
inside the instrument that compose the electronic system.
Following is a board list with the proper Check Out & Adjustment required after
board replacement for troubleshooting purposes.
Board Name Check Out & Adjustment Section
CPU Master Board #1 Check Software revision 7.16.1
Test for functionality. 3.3.4
Verify BIOS settings. 7.16.7
No Adjustment Required.
PC104 Board Verify Expansion Module 7.16.8
settings.
Slave Board #2 Check Software revision. 7.16.1
Upgrade SW if required 7.16.5
Test for functionality. 3.3.5
Acquisition & Sensors Test for functionality. 3.3.6
Board #3 Coagulimetric Channel Check 7.2
Out 7.3
Chromogenic Channel Check Out 7.4.2
Liquid Sensors Check Out 7.5.3
Autosampler Optic Sensors
Check Out
7.9.1
Rotor Cover Sensor Check Out
Rotor Exchange Module Check Software revision. 7.16.1
Board #4 Upgrade SW if required (REM 7.16.5
(excluded in ACL Elite) upgrade)
Test for functionality.
REM Optic Sensors Check Out 7.5
Motors Board #5 Test for functionality. 3.3.8
Photometric & Test for functionality. 3.3.9
Temperature Control Temperatures Check Out. 7.14
Board #6

Board Name Check Out & Adjustment Section

Switching Power Supply Test for functionality. 3.3.10
Board No Adjustment Required.
Interface Board Test for functionality. 7.13
Fan control Board Test for functionality. 7.14
Liquid Level Detection Test for functionality. 7.4.2
Board No Adjustment Required.

Chapter 5 Installation & Maintenance

This chapter provides information related to the instrument installation, as
recommendation for the unpacking and the various set-up procedures necessary to put
the system in working condition, as well as operator maintenance procedures.
Sub-sections detailing instrument cleaning and decontamination procedures, plus shut
down and shipment precautions complete this section.
5.1 Installation........................................................................................................... 2
5.2 Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 29
5.3 Shut Down & Shipment Precautions ................................................................ 37
WARNING!
on this area.
WARNING: Do not access the sample or reagent area while the probe arm is
operating.
As a reminder for the technical personnel, the above warning is also directly shown in
those sub-sections describing the maintenance / cleaning actions on the fluidic lines of
the instrument.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance Page 1 of 38

5.1 Installation
This chapter contains all the information necessary to install, set-up and place in
working condition the ACL Elite/ElitePro system.
Before attempting the installation of the ACL Elite/ElitePro system in the laboratory,
inspect the site with laboratory personnel to identify the desired location for the
system and to insure that the environment meets all the requirements for its successful
installation.
In addition ensure that the Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit and the Chromogenic Optic
Test Kit together with the Temperature Probe are available.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
5.1.1 Site Requirements
5.1.2 Unpacking and Inspection
5.1.3 Mounting Instrument Parts
5.1.4 First Turn On Cycle
5.1.5 Instrument Setup
5.1.7 Performance Tests
5.1.7 Installation Procedure and Checklist
NOTE: The ACL Elite/ElitePro system must only be installed either

by IL personnel or IL authorized personnel.
5.1.1 Site Requirements

Following are the specific paragraphs with the required condition to install the ACL
Elite/ElitePro system:
• Ambient condition
• Space requirements
• Electrical requirements
Ambient Condition
The instrument will function correctly in an ambient temperature of 15-32 °C (59 °F

to 89 °F) with a relative humidity of up to 85% (non-condensing).
In accordance with the IEC regulations no instrument failures will occur in presence
of short-term ambient temperature as low as 5 °C or as high as 40 °C.
The instrument should be positioned in an area free from dust, fumes, vibrations and
excessive variations of temperature.
Page 2 of 38 Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance

Space Requirements
Following are the external dimensions and the weight of the ACL Elite/ElitePro
analyser:
Height at display level 60 cm 23.6inches
Height of analysis surface 27 cm 10.6 inches
Width (including LCD) 100 cm 39.4 inches
Depth 60 cm 23.6 inches
Weight 63 Kg 139 lbs.
The heat generated by the instrument during normal operation is exhausted from the
bottom, in the front-right and left side of the unit.
Sufficient space must be allowed around the instrument to permit circulation of air for
cooling.
The instrument must be positioned so that a waste tube can be easily connected on its
left side.
If the operator wishes to work from a sitting position in front of the system, leg-space
should be provided under the front of the instrument.
Electrical Requirements
Voltage
The instrument has been designed to operate correctly with variations of ± 10% on the
nominal line voltage and with line frequencies between 50-60 Hz.
The instrument has a power supply that can operate from 100 to 240 VAC and it
automatically switches to the line voltage required.
WARNING: Check that the nominal line voltage in the laboratory is compatible with
the label on the rear of the instrument as shown in the table below.
Value as shown on the label Values of line voltage for

Normal function
100 – 240 VAC 100, 110, 115, 120, 125 Vac ±10%
220, 230, 240 Vac ±10%
Power Consumption
Check that the line is capable of supplying 350 VA.
NOTE: The average power consumption is about 350 VA, but peak loads or current
surges may exceed this value when turning the instrument on and during the
temperature warm-up.

Line Frequency
The instrument will function at any frequency between 50-60 Hz.
The power cord provided with the system is specifically designed for it and should not
be substituted.
The cord plugs into the Power Entry socket as shown in the figure below.
The Power Entry module includes the ON/OFF switch.
Fuse
The fuses are enclosed in the compartment to the right of the Power Entry socket.
Fuses have to meet the specification 6.3 A – 250 V. Instruments at 100 – 240vac
utilize 2 fuses rated at 6.3 amps.
CAUTION: Prior to accessing the fuse holder to install / replace fuses insure the
unit is powered off and the power cord disconnected. Only use fuses rated for
the specified current and voltage.
Interface ports
The instrument is provided with several connectors, located on the rear, which are
associated with relevant devices.

NOTE: If the USB ports detect an overload situation the USB ports are disabled. To
re-enable the USB ports the Elite/ElitePro instrument must be powered off and re-
booted.
Following are the connectors and the relevant devices.
Connectors Names Devices

1. Host Host Computer
2. Mouse Standard PC Serial Mouse (or USB mouse
port for newer devices)
3. USB External BCR, USB Mouse, USB Printer
4. Ethernet Ethernet (Future)
5. Parallel Printer Parallel Printer
6. Keyboard Standard PC Keyboard

5.1.2 Unpacking and Inspecting

Before unpacking the boxes containing the ACL Elite/ElitePro and accessories,
visually inspect them to verify that there has been no damage done during shipping
and handling.
In case of damage notify the carrier and your IL Representative immediately.
Remove the box containing the rotors and the Start-up kit. Using the Start-up kit list
included in the box, confirm that all the components are present.
Remove the instrument and place it on the working surface.
Remove the adhesive tape used for transport from the various parts.
NOTE: Two people should lift the instrument using the space below
the unit at the front and at the back as shown on the figure below.
In the figure below are highlighted the instrument carrying points
5.1.3 Mounting Instrument Parts

This sub-section provides information about the parts that have to be mounted on the
Instrument before switching it on.
BARCODE READER BRACKET (ACL ElitePro)
Mount the Barcode Reader bracket onto the rear of the LCD Monitor as follows:

1. Remove the monitor mounting bracket (may be white or black) from the rear
of the monitor (4 screws).
2. Place the barcode reader bracket onto the back of the monitor followed by the
original monitor mounting bracket. Secure both brackets to the monitor using
the 4 screws previously removed.
Monitor bracket (may be black or white)

Bracket Bracket mounting
mounting screws 4 places
screws 4 places
Barcode reader bracket mounted under monitor

LCD Monitor mounting bracket
The ACL Elite/ElitePro LCD Monitor must be installed on the instrument during the
installation process. Mount the LCD Monitor as follows.
clamp
Bracket attached
to monitor
Serial cable
Knob with
washers
underneath Power cable
VGA cable
1. Remove cables from plastic bag on support pole and monitor from packaging.
2. Remove clamping knob, white washer, gray washer, and metallic washer from
the monitor support pole.
3. Mount flat metallic washer onto support pole.
4. Mount bracket attached with monitor onto support pole.

5. Mount gray washer so that the outer diameter is touching the surface of the
bracket and the inner diameter raised, then the white washer.
6. Mount clamping knob onto support pole. Tighten securely.
7. Remove clamp from the back of the monitor by loosening screw.
8. Insert the power cable into the clamp. The distance between the clamp and the
end of the power cable connector should be 6 inches. Insert power connector
into receptacle at the base of the monitor. Make sure the orientation of the
power cable is similar to what is shown in the picture above.
9. Mount the clamp to the back of the monitor using screw, split washer, and flat
washer provided. See picture above for location.
10. Connect the serial and VGA cables to the monitor.
Waste Tube
Connect the waste tube to the fitting on the bottom left hand side of the Instrument.
Cut the tube to suitable length to fit into the waste container which must be situated
below the instrument waste outlet port, as shown in the figures below.
NOTE: The horizontal section of the tube should be kept as short as possible and the
free end should not be immersed in the liquid waste container.
CAUTION! The liquid waste from the instrument is to be considered

contaminated and should be disposed of according to the waste management
procedures of the laboratory and in compliance with local regulations (see also
NCCLS GP25-A, Vol. 13 No. 22: Clinical Laboratory Waste Management, Dec.
1993).
In the figure below are reported the Waste tube connection and waste container proper
position.

Rinse, Sample and Reagent Accessories

1. Verify that the Needles Waste-Rinse reservoir is placed in its appropriate
position.
2. Fit the appropriate Sample Tray on its corresponding support.
3. Fit the reagent adapters in their appropriate positions, as shown in the figure
below.
4. Following are the 3 color coded reagent adaptors available for the reagent
positions R1 to R12.
Adaptor Color Reagent Vials
Grey 10 mL vials requiring magnetic stirrer
Purple 10 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
Green 4 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
5. Place 4 magnetic stirrers inside the reagent vials in reagent positions R1 to R4.
Reagent Adaptors for the R1-R12 positions
Different vial adaptors are used for the additional positions on the Sample Tray.
In the figure below are reported the Reagent Adaptors for the Sample Tray A1-A10
positions.

Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle

1. Place a capped 1 litre bottle of Wash-Reference Emulsion in the appropriate
position at the back of the dilutors.
2. Remove the bottle cap and insert the sensor and siphon cap into the bottle.
Insure the sensor and siphon cap is fully seated into the bottle.
3. Make sure that the connectors of the Reference Emulsion Sensor and for the
Liquid Level Detection Cable are properly connected on the Needles & Wash-
R Sensor Interconnection Board.

Positioning of the Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle
Electro-Valve / Needle Block connection

Verify that the two fluidic tubes from the Electro-Valve in the Dilutor Assy to the
Needles Block are tightly connected.
NOTE: The tube from the left hand Electro-Valve fits into the lower position on the
Needles Block (internal Needle, Reagent). The tube from the right hand Electro-Valve
fits into the upper position on the Needles Block (external needle, Sample).
Mouse
Connect the Serial Mouse or USB Mouse to the appropriate port on the rear panel.
External Bar-Code Reader
Connect the External Bar-Code Reader to the USB port in the rear panel. (ElitePro
only)
External Printer (Optional Feature)
Connect the External Printer to its port (Parallel Printer port) in the rear panel.
Fill Rotor Stack with new rotors (ACL ELitePro).
5.1.4 First Turn On Cycle

Before turning the Instrument on, check that the line voltage setting of the laboratory
is in accordance with the Instrument label.
1. Switch the instrument on using the Power Switch on the Power Entry.
The system initializes the instrument with a series of electronics and
mechanics self-checks. During this initialization check that the Sample Arm,
the Rotor Arm and the Rotor Cover may be free to move without obstruction.
Following are some of the messages displayed during the System Init phase.
ACL Starting. Please wait…
Checking Database……Check Ok. Continuing Init.

The Init System phase continues with a progress bar in a window where the
following is displayed.
Init System in Progress. Please Wait.
When the progress bar is full and all the sequence of self-checks is ended, then
the Login window appears.
Touching the USER window it goes in reverse mode.
2. Press Del (Delete Key) on the main Keyboard, the window becomes empty.
3. Type the word “Service.”
Touching the PASSWORD window it goes in reverse mode.
4. Type the word “System Fix” then confirm touching “√.”
The system shows the main Analytical Menu.
5. Touch Utility on the Main Menu Bar then the Software and the Software
Identification option. Check that in the SW Identification screen all the
software is at the lastest revision. The last software revision is also present in
the Instrument Start Up Kit.
6. Check for Magnetic Stirrer bar rotation in the R1 – R4 reagents positions.
NOTE: Any temperature and liquid level sensors warning may be present. In
this case the yellow Warning button on the Tool Bar is active.
7. Touch Setup on the Main Menu Bar then the Date/Time option. Choose the
date format and set the current date and time. Press “√” to accept.
8. Mounting (if needed) the Needles Block and then perform/verify the Needle
Position procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
9. Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu Bar and click the Priming option.
The following Priming screen is displayed during the priming cycle:

During the Priming cycle insure that the air bubbles in the dilutor chambers are
removed. If necessary, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston is
descending and release them before the piston reaches bottom dead point.
Repeat the Priming cycle several times if necessary.
If in the end of the Priming the message “SENSOR FAIL” in the Warning area is
displayed, the priming cycle must be repeated.
1. Check that there are no blockages or leaks in the fluid path and that the liquid
is flowing smoothly from the bottle to the dilutors and from the dilutors to the
needles.
2. Check that the discharge of liquid from the Wash/Rinse Reservoir to the
instrument outlet and then to the liquid waste container is not impaired.
3. Check the Air Cooling System. Verify that the 2 Instrument Fans in the right
hand side of the instrument are operating properly as also the 2 Secondary
Fans on the left hand side. Locate the ventilation filter slider on the right side
of the instrument and verify also that the filter is clean.
4. Before checking the Temperatures wait until all the start up temperature
warnings have disappeared, then enter Diagnostic on the Main Menu Bar and
select the Temperature Control option, which will open the Temperature
Control screen.
As the temperature is continuously checked the screen is constantly refreshed

showing a blink effect. The temperature should be within the following ranges
for each area (as described in the section 7.14).
Rotor Holder 38 - 39 °C
Peltier 10 - 16 °C
Rotor Transport (ACL ElitePro) 34 - 40 °C

Rotor Stack (ACL ElitePro) 34 - 40 °C

Rotor Preheater (ACL Elite) 34 - 40 °C
5.1.5 Instrument Setup

The purpose of this sub-section is to verify that all the main Setup options have been
already set or otherwise to help the customer to make setup selections.
Select Setup from the Main Menu Bar then set the following options.
System Configuration
Patient Database listing
QC Database listing
Reflex Status
Current Language
Sample Tray type
Sensor Enable
HW Enable
Date / Time
Unit
5.1.6 Performance Tests

The following test, which we recommend be carried out at the installation, check the
precision and the linearity of the two Optic Channels as well as the precision and the
accuracy of the dilutors.
1. Perform a Priming cycle then check the Optic Channel precision and accuracy
as described in the sub-sections 7.2.2 (for Coagulimetric) and 7.3.2 (for
Chromogenic).
2. Perform a Priming cycle then check the Dilutors precision as described in the
sub-section 7.8.1 (for Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channel).
3. Perform a Priming cycle then carry out the PT-FIB calibration cycle as
described in the Operator’s Manual.
5.1.7 Installation Procedure & Checklist

The following Installation Checklist should be used as a guide when installing the
ACL Elite/ElitePro instrument.
A reference to detailed procedures contained in the ACL Elite/ElitePro Service
Manual are indicated on the Installation Checklist.

5.1.7.a Initialization
Plug instrument into suitable power source, 100 - 115V or 220V. Turn power on and
wait for instrument to initialize.
1. With login displayed, touch USER on the LCD and type Service.
2. Touch PASSWORD on LCD display and type (including 1 space between
words): System Fix.
NOTE: This procedure is designed to check that adjustments have been performed. If
any step fails the check criteria adjustment is required.
5.1.7.b Procedure
NOTE: See “7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor” for information on the rotor cover
encoder disk and the optical sensor alignment.
1. MAGNETIC STIRRER BARS ROTATION CHECK
Materials / tools necessary Magnetic Stirrer Bars (4)
8.0 mL Bottles (4)
a) Place a magnetic stirrer bar in bottle and place the bottle into each reagent
position R1, R2, R3 and R4.
b) Check that the bar rotates in each position.
c) Remove bottles from reagent positions.
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHECK

a) Touch SETUP→SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
Sensor Liquid, Wash R Emulsion and HW Enable – “REM” and “Additional
Reagents” should be enabled for ACL ElitePro, and disabled for ACL Elite.
Visually check that there is an “X” to the left of these parameters to “Enable”
and no “X” to disable.
b) Touch check (√) to exit.
3. SOFTWARE REVISION CHECK

a) Touch UTILITY→SOFTWARE→SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION.
Check that the software identifications are at the latest versions.
Master SW Identification X.X
Slave SW Identification X.X
REM SW Identification XX.XX
IL Test Library X
b) Touch check (√) to exit.

4. FLOPPY DISK CHECK

Material / tools necessary: 1.44 MB Floppy Disk (formatted)
a) Touch SERVICE→FLOPPY DISK DRIVE TEST. Remove disk from
drive if present.
b) Touch CONTINUE. If a message DISK PRESENT IN DRIVE appears, the
drive has failed this check.
c) Insert a write-protected floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Touch
CONTINUE. A message should appear INSERT DISK… Remove disk
from drive and change the switch on the disk to enable it to read and write,
reinsert disk.
d) Touch CONTINUE.
e) Check that a message OPERATION IN PROGRESS and a test progress bar
is displayed.
It is not necessary to wait for the disk drive to complete this task.
f) Touch ABORT to exit.
g) Touch YES.
h) Touch CANCEL.
5. INTERFACE CHECK
Materials / tools necessary: RS 232 Test Connector
a) Touch SERVICE→INTERFACE TEST.
b) Touch the down arrow on the side of the test name.
c) Touch the bottom down arrow to select RS 232 #2 HW loop.
d) Touch CONTINUE and install RS 232 connector into the mouse serial port.
e) Touch START. The next window must state TEST PASSED.
f) Touch OK.
g) Touch “X” to exit.
h) Touch SERVICE→INTERFACE TEST.
i) Touch the down arrow on the side of the test name.
j) Touch the bottom down arrow to select RS 232 #3 HW loop.
k) Touch CONTINUE and install RS 232 connector into the host serial port.
l) Touch START. The next window must state TEST PASSED.
m) Touch OK.
n) Touch “X” to exit.
o) Verify USB ports functionality by connecting a USB device (ie. mouse,
scanner, etc) to the USB port. Reboot system to allow ACL Elite/ElitePro to
recognize USB device connection and verify USB device functions properly.

6. AUTOSAMPLER MOTOR STEP LOSS CHECK

a) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→AUTOSAMPLER.
b) Touch HOME POSITION. The system moves the autosampler motor until
the home position is achieved.
c) Check that the HOME SENSOR and the POSITION SENSOR are both in
the ON condition.
d) With the step increment set to one (1), repeatedly touch curved CW arrow (or
the curved CCW arrow) until the status changes from plus to minus in the
window to the right of the “Home Sensor” icon. Then reverse the motion by
touching the opposite key until the status changes from plus to minus again.
e) Check that there are a maximum of three (3) missed steps by counting the
minus signs to the left (or to the right) of the reference arrow.
7. SAMPLE ARM MODULE CHECK

Material / tools necessary: Sample Tray
Needle Adjustment Tool
0.5 mL Sample Cups
Cup Adapters
2.0 mm Allen Wrench
a) Lift clear reagent cover, check the centering of the sample arm base to the
cavity in the system cover, and gently lift sample arm up to its upper limit and
rotate it to check that the three (3) set screws are tightened properly.
b) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJ→SAMPLE ARM
MOTOR→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.
c) Touch HOME POSITION.
The sample arm should position itself over the sample tray position for Elite or
reagent position R12 for ElitePro.
d) Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION seven (7) times for
Elite or eleven (11) times for ElitePro.
The sample arm should position itself over the wash station.
e) Gently push sample arm down into the wash station, check that the needles
enter straight into the center of the wash station bath, and then gently lift
sampler arm up to its upper limit.
f) Touch check (√) to exit. Touch NO.
g) Make sure the rotor cover is open (touch ROTOR COVER OPEN icon) and
install the needle adjustment tool into the rotor position.
h) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLE ARM
MOTOR→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.

i) Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION several times to move

the sample arm over the rotor position, touch check (√) to exit, and then touch
NO.
j) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→ROTOR MOTOR.
k) Touch HOME POSITION to set rotor, touch check (√) to exit, and then touch
NO.
l) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLE ARM
MOTORS→VERTICAL ARM MOTOR.
m) Touch HOME POSITION.
n) Touch NEXT DOWN POSITION. The sample arm should go down.
o) Check that the needles align over the reference dots. The needles should be set
so they brush the surface of the reference dots.
p) Touch NEXT UP POSITION, touch check (√) to exit, and then touch YES.
q) Place cup adaptor and 0.5 mL cup in the A1 position of the sample tray, place
0.5mL cups in position 1 and 2 of the sample tray, and then place sample tray
in instrument.
r) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→AUTOSAMPLER, touch HOME
POSITION, touch check (√) to exit, and then touch NO.
s) Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLER ARM
MOTORS→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.
t) Touch HOME POSITION and the sample arm will move to the sample tray
position.
u) Remove the alignment tool from the rotor position and touch ROTOR
COVER (Icon) to close the rotor cover and the gently push the sample arm
down into the A1 position.
v) Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching
the inside diameter of the cup. Gently lift sample arm to the upper limit.
w) Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION. The sample arm will
go to position 2 on the sample tray. Gently push the sample arm down into the
position 2.
x) Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching
y) Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION. The sample arm will
go to position 1 on the sample tray. Gently push the sample arm down into the
position 1.
z) Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching

8. ROTOR EXCHANGE MODULE CHECK (exclude for ACL Elite)

Material / tools necessary: Disposable Rotors
Magnetic Disk
2.0 mm Allen Wrench
a) Touch ROTOR COVER and remove the stack cover to gain access. Check
that the three (3) set screws on the Rotor Arm are tightened properly.
b) Place the magnet disk over the sensor board on the stack and secure with a
piece of tape.
c) Load a stack of fifteen (15) rotors in the rotor stack. Align the notches in the
top five (5) rotors that are above the stack. Empty the rotor waste container
and place it back in the housing.
d) Touch SERVICE→MODULE POSITIONING→RA-SL-RH TEST.
The instrument initializes the motors of the R.E.M., the rotor holder and the
rotor cover. Once initialization is completed, the system starts loading /
unloading until the stack of rotors is exhausted.
e) Check visually that all the rotors in the stack are loaded and removed from the
rotor position. The pliers should secure the rotor around the top of the rotor
when the rotors are being transferred. A message should appear that the waste
container is full.
f) Open the door and remove rotors from container.
g) Reinstall the waste container and the system should start to load and unload
rotors.
h) Touch check (√) to exit.
9. AUTOSAMPLER / BCR CHECK

Material / tools necessary: Sample Tray
0.5 mL Sample Cups (new, unused)
2.0 mL Sample Cups (new, unused)
4.0 mL Bottle
10.0 mL Glass Vials
Bar Code Labels
a) Take a sample tray and prepare an assortment of cups, sample tubes (including
some with bar code labels) and some empty positions.
NOTE: Make sure the cups are clean and free from any scratches.
b) Touch SERVICE→AUTOSAMPLER→BCR TEST.
c) Touch START WITH BCR.
d) Check for presence: when a cup is present there should be a one (1) in that
position. A zero (0) is reported when there is no cup present.

e) Check the bar codes by moving the horizontal scroll bar to the right. Check
that each bar code reported is the same as the bar code in that sample tray
position.
f) Touch check (√) to exit.
10. LIQUID LEVEL SENSORS CHECK

Materials / tools necessary: 1000 Microliter Pipette w/tips
0.50 mL Sample Cup
4.0 mL Sample Cup
Reference Bottle w/500 mL Ref. Sol.
Sample Tray
a) Remove reference bottle from instrument and place the bottle with 500 mL of
reference solution in its place.
b) Touch SERVICE→SENSOR TEST→WASH-R EMULSION VOL.
c) Check that the R-Emulsion value is 500 mL +/- 150 mL. ( adjust RV9,
Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary).
d) Dispense 150 microliters of reference solution in a 0.5 mL sample cup and
place the cup in position 1 of the Sample Tray.
e) Dispense 1500 microliters of reference solution in a 4.0 mL bottle and place
the bottle in the R1 position.
f) Touch SERVICE→SENSOR→NEEDLES SENSOR TEST, and then touch
START.
Check expected values: Position 1 liquid value must be ≥ 3.9 volts. ( adj
RV12, Acq & Sen Bd if necessary). Position R1 liquid value must be ≥ 3.5
volts. ( adj RV11, Acq & Sen Bd if necessary)
g) Touch (X) to exit.
11. TEMPERATURE CHECK: PERFORM D-DIMER CYCLE USING DEIONIZED

WATER
Materials / tools necessary: Green Bottle Adapter
4.0 mL bottle (1)
8.0 mL Bottles (5)
Deionized Water
a) Place 4 mL bottle with deionized water in reagent position R4.
b) Place 8 mL bottles with deionized water in sample tray positions A1, A2, A3,
A4 & A5.
c) Touch SETUP→TEST→VIEW / DEFINE.

d) Enable D-Dimer only, disable everything else.

e) Touch check (√).
f) Touch DOOR EXIT (located in lower right corner, shown with door open and
arrow going out).
g) Touch CALIBRATION→CALIBRATE.
h) Touch START. Wait for cycle to complete (arm will stop).
i) Touch DIAGNOSTIC→TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
j) Check that the four (4) temperature values are within specification shown on
the LCD Display.
k) Remove bottles from reagent position and sample tray.
12. ROTOR HOLDER COVER SENSOR CHECK

a) Touch SERVICE→A / D CONVERTER TEST.
b) Check Cover Sensor (Hall) voltage value. The value must be ≥ 2.7 volts.
(Adjust RV5, Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary.)
c) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to open rotor cover.\
d) Check Cover Sensor (Hall) voltage value. The value must be between 1.4 to
1.9 volts.
e) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to close rotor cover.
13. OPTIC CHANNELS CHECK

Materials / tools necessary: Rotors
1000 Microliter Pipette w/tips
Deionized Water
Reference Solution
NOTE: Instrument must be on for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes.
Offset Check
a) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to open the chamber.
b) Rotate the rotor holder in the analysis compartment to block the LED light’s
optic pathway.
c) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to close rotor cover.
d) Touch SERVICE→A / D CONVERTER TESTS.
e) Check that the coagulimetric and the chromogenic channels’ average voltages
are within the specification range of 0.002 to 0.015 volts. (NOTE: Occasional

spikes above this value are allowed.) On the newer surface mount PCBs,
adjust the A / D voltage to 0.015 volts. No fluctuation should be observed!
Coagulimetric channel: (Adjust RV 1 Acquisition & Sensors Board if
necessary.)
Chromogenic channel: (Adjust RV 4 Acquisition & Sensors Board if
necessary.)
NOTE: It is important to watch the voltage reading for one (1) minute and
observe that the voltage occasionally fluctuates slightly above 0.000.
Gains Check
a) Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→ACQUISITION

ADJUSTMENT.
b) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to open cover. Insure no rotor is in the
chamber.
c) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to close cover.
d) Touch START.
e) Check that the chromogenic (V) value is within the specification: 8.700 +/-
0.050 volts. (Adjust RV3 Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary)
f) Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to open the chamber.
g) Place 200 microliters of the instrument’s reference solution in position 20 of a
new rotor.
h) Insert rotor into chamber, touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover
open) to close rotor cover, and then wait three (3) minutes for temperature to
stabilize.
i) Touch START.
j) Check that the coagulimetric (V) value is within the specification: 2.6 +/- 0.3
volts. (Adjust RV2 Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary.)
k) Touch STOP, and then touch OK.
l) Touch check (√) to exit.
Curves Check
NOTE: Dispensed volume, temperature, and time are critical to the results of this test.
a) Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→CURVE ADJUST
(coagulimetric rotation speed set @ 1200 rpm).
b) Check that the SELECT DELAY (µs) is the same as the value on the
instrument label next to Coag. “1200 DELAY.” (The label is located on the
drawer under the top right hand corner of the keyboard.)

NOTE: If this delay value is incorrect, it will be necessary to change the label when
all of the related tests are completed. Keep records of new values on Checklist.
Procedure:
a) Touch START.
b) Check the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
c) Check that the delay to left of the 1000 value is the same as the SELECT
DELAY value on the LCD display (and the label).
d) Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL. Touch CHROMOGENIC.
e) Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again.
f) Touch START.
g) Check the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
h) Check that the delay to the left of the 1000 value is the same as the SELECT
DELAY value on the instrument label next to Chrom. “1200 DELAY.”
i) Check that the maximum delay delta (i.e., absolute value of the difference)
between coagulimetric and chromogenic values (@ 1200 rpm) on the
Checklist is ≤ 90.
j) Touch the arrow below select channel. Touch COAGULIMETRIC.
k) Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again.
l) Touch the arrow below ROTATION SPEED and touch 600 (rpm).
m) Touch the arrow below ROTATION SPEED again and then touch START.
n) Check and record on the Checklist the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
o) Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL and touch CHROMOGENIC.
p) Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again and touch START.
q) Record on the Checklist the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
r) Check that the maximum delay delta between coagulimetric and chromogenic
values (@ 600 rpm) on the Checklist is ≤ 120.
s) Touch rotor cover icon to open motor cover and remove rotor.
t) Touch rotor cover icon to close rotor cover.
u) Touch “X” to exit.
NOTE: If any of the curve adjustment checkouts fail, check that the gain is correct.
Replace the rotor assembly if curve adjustment still fails.
Fiber Adjustment Check
Remove rotor – this check is performed without a rotor.

a) Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→FIBER ADJUSTMENT
TEST.
b) Touch START.

c) Check that all the cuvette values are < 0.070.

d) Touch SET TO ENVELOPE MODE.
e) Check that all the max. / min. values are < 0.050.
f) Touch STOP and then touch OK.
g) Place clean rotor in chamber.
h) Touch START.
i) Check that the cuvette values are > 0.140.
j) Touch SET TO ENVELOPE MODE.
k) Check that all the max. / min. values are < 0.050.
l) Remove rotor.
14. DILUTOR CHECK

Materials / tools necessary: Graduated Capillary
Blue Dye
Tubing Removal Tool
Green Bottle Adapters (3)
4.0 mL Bottles (3)
8.0 mL Bottle
Deionized Water
Instrument’s Reference Solution
Volume Check
NOTE: Use caution in removing the tubes not to disturb the needles adjustment.
a) Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→VOLUME CHECKS.
b) Touch SAMPLE DILUTOR.
c) Remove top tube from sample arm and connect capillary to the tube. Hold tube
over 8.0 mL empty bottle.
d) Touch START. The instrument will prime and then prompt you to place the
capillary in the blue dye.
e) Touch OK.
f) Check that the dye is aspirated into the capillary and stops in between the top
two (2) lines on the capillary. After ten (10) seconds the dye will be dispensed
and should stop in between the bottom two (2) lines on the capillary. Perform
this check several times to ensure that the results are repeatable and that the
system has been primed properly.

If the liquid consistently sets above or below the two lines, a correction is
required. The correction can be entered in the window SELECT
CORRECTION VALUE. First attempt to decrease or increase the correction
value by 1 unit. The allowable range is –8 to +8. Repeat the test to ensure that
the entered value achieves proper volume dispensing.
NOTE: If a value has changed with respect to the original setting, it is
necessary to change the label when all related tests are completed.
g) Touch check (√) to replace value and exit.
h) Disconnect the capillary from the sample tube and reinstall the tube on the top
of the sample arm. Remove the bottom tube from the sample arm and connect
the capillary to the tube. Hold the tube over the empty 8.0 mL bottle.
i) Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→VOLUME CHECKS.
j) Touch REAGENT.
k) Touch START. The instrument will prime and then prompt you to place the
capillary in the blue dye.
l) Touch OK.
m) Check that the dye is aspirated into the capillary and stops in between the top
two (2) lines on the capillary. After ten (10) seconds the dye will be dispensed
and should stop in between the bottom two (2) lines on the capillary. Perform
this check several times to ensure that the results are repeatable and that the
system has been primed properly.
If the liquid consistently sets above or below the two lines, a correction is
required. The correction can be entered in the window SELECT
CORRECTION VALUE. First attempt decrementing (or incrementing) the
correction value by 1 unit. The allowable range is –8 to +8. Repeat the test to
ensure that the entered value achieves proper volume dispensing.
NOTE: If a value has changed with respect to the original setting, it is
necessary to change the label when all related tests are completed.
n) Touch check (√) to replace value and exit.
o) Disconnect the capillary from the reagent tube and reinstall the tube on the
bottom of the sample arm.
p) Touch check (√) to exit.
Coagulimetric Check
NOTE: Use caution in removing the tubes not to disturb the needles adjustment. Use
tubing removal tool to invert the sample and reference tubes on the sample arm.
(Sample tube onto reference and reference tube onto sample.)
a) Place deionized water in 4.0 mL bottle and place bottle in position R4. Place
the instrument’s reference solution in a 4.0 mL bottle and place in position R1.
b) Touch ROTOR COVER icon to open rotor cover. Install a new rotor in
chamber.

c) Touch ROTOR COVER icon to close rotor cover.

d) Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→DILUTOR TEST.
e) Touch START MANUAL ROTOR LOADING. Wait for instrument to
complete test.
Check that when the test is completed there are no red values displayed.
Coagulimetric specifications: CV% (cuvette 1 to 6) :<=4
CV% (cuvette 7 to 12) :<=5
CV% (Reference) :<=2.5
Mean Reference : 2.0V to 3.0 V
R2 : >=0.997
If there are red values, repeat the test with a new rotor. If instrument fails again
(red values at the end of the test), corrective action is required. Prime the
dilutors (insure air bubbles are removed from pistons and tubing), check
needle block alignment, repeat dilutor tests volume checks. Repeat the dilutor
test.
Chromogenic Check
a) Use tubing tool to reinvert sample and reagent tubes on the sample arm.
(Reagent tube on the bottom and sample tube on the top). Remove bottle with
reference solution from position R1 and replace it with PNA 160µmol/l in a
new bottle.
b) Touch rotor cover icon to open rotor cover.
c) Replace rotor with a new rotor.
d) Touch rotor cover icon to close rotor cover.
e) Touch arrow next to CHANNEL TYPE. Touch the down arrow to choose
CHROMOGENIC.
f) Touch arrow next to CHANNEL TYPE.
g) Touch arrow next to LOADING TYPE. Touch the down arrow to choose
REAGENT DILUTOR.
h) Touch arrow next to LOADING TYPE.
i) Touch “START IN MANUAL LOADING”
j) Check that when the test is completed there are no red values displayed, except
for the MEAN value which can be red with the specification of 7.2 to 8.8.
Chromogenic specifications: CV% (cuvette 1 to 6) :<=1.5
CV% (Refeence) :<=0.4

Mean Reference : 7.2V to 8.8 V

R2 : >=0.997
If there are red values (except for the mean), repeat the test with a new rotor.
If instrument fails again (red values at the end of the test), corrective action is
required. Prime the dilutors (insure air bubbles are removed from pistons and
tubing), check needle block alignment, repeat dilutor tests volume checks.
Repeat the dilutor test.
k) Touch check (√) to exit.
17. TOUCH SCREEN CHECK

a) Exit the Service menu by touching the CLOSE DOOR icon, which should
bring you to the “Ready” screen.
b) Touch the (vertical) down scroll arrow. The highlighted bar should move
down.
c) Touch the (vertical) up scroll arrow. The highlighted bar should move up.

5.1.7.c ACL Elite/ElitePro Installation Checklist
Service Rep:_____________________ Date:________________
Serial Number:___________________ Account:___________________________
Perform adjustments as necessary. Set configurations as necessary. Refer to ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual.
Check overall instrument appearance. Insure accessory kit is complete.
Test Action to Check / Perform Reference Pass/Adjust/

Number Paragraph Check
1 Check Air Filter 5.2.4
2 Check Display Locking Mechanism 5.1.3
3 Check Software Revision 7.16.1
4 Check System Configuration 5.1.5
5 Check System Interfaces Configuration (keyboard, barcodes, printer, host) 8.0
6 Check Magnetic Stirrer Bar Rotation 5.1.4
7 Check Floppy Disk 7.15
8 Check Mouse / Host / Parallel Printer Ports 7.13 / 7.14
9 Check Waste Line Efficiency 5.2.1
10 Verify Sample Arm Module Positioning / Alignment 7.7.1
11 Verify Needles Block Alignment 7.7.4
12 Verify rotor brush contact 7.14
13 Insure Sample Arm and Rotor Caliper Arm mounting set screws are tight N/A
14 Verify Rotor Motor Cover Stored Step setting 7.6.2
15 Verify Rotor Exchange Module Functionality
R.E.M. -- SA-SL-RH Test 7.7.9
Rotor Stack Sensor 7.5.1
Rotor Waste Container Sensor 7.5.2
16 Verify Autosampler / BCR Test
Container Presence and Offset 7.5.3
Bar Code Labels Identification and Offset 7.5.3
17 Verify Liquid Level Detection Sensors
Wash-Reference Emulsion Sensor 7.4.1
Needles Block Sensors 7.4.2
18 Verify Optic Channels (Coag & Chrom)
Offsets 7.2.1 / 7.3.1
Light Source Verification 7.2.1 / 7.3.1
Gains 7.2.1 / 7.3.1
Curves 7.3.1
405 Filter Test 7.2.4
Fiber Adjustment Test
7.2.3 / 7.3.3
19 Perform Dilutor Test
Coagulimetric 7.8.1
Chromogenic 7.8.1
Volume Check 7.8.2
20 Coagulation Performance Tests
Coagulimetric Precision Test 7.2.2
Coagulimetric Linearity Test 7.2.2
21 Chromogenic Performance Tests
Chromogenic Precision Test 7.3.2
Chromogenic Linearity Test (level 80) 7.3.2
Chromogenic Linearity Test (level 160) 7.3.2

5.2 Maintenance
To keep the ACL Elite/ElitePro analyzer in optimal operating condition it is
recommend that the following procedures be carried out by a trained operator at the
frequency specified.
The Maintenance subsection of the Diagnostic menu allows the user to access and
record dates and notes related to the performance of specific maintenance operations.
If any maintenance action is not performed within the recommended period then the
relevant line will appear in red.
Following are the specific sub-sections.

5.2.1 Daily Maintenance
5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance
5.2.3 Bi-Weekly Maintenance
5.2.4 Monthly Maintenance
5.2.5 Yearly Maintenance
5.2.6 As Needed Maintenance
5.2.7 Maintenance Schedule
WARNING!


on this area.
5.2.1 Daily Maintenance

At the beginning and at the end of each working day perform a Priming cycle to
ensure the complete removal of all sample or reagent residual along the fluidic paths.
While the priming cycle is in progress, the operator should visually inspect three
items:
• That number of bubbles in the Dilutor Chamber reduces to minimum. If bubbles
are still present, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston is descending and
releases them before the piston reaches the bottom dead center. Repeat the priming
cycle as needed until all bubbles are gone.
• That there are no blockages or leaks in the liquid flow path and the liquid is
flowing smoothly from reservoir to dilutors and from dilutors to needles.
• That there is free flow of the liquid waste from the washing chamber to the
instrument outlet tube and then to the waste container (check the liquid level in the
waste container).
NOTE: The instrument has sensors to detect the availability of Wash Reference
Emulsion as well as new and waste rotors. In order to start the working day with the
maximum instrument autonomy it’s advisable to empty the Rotor Waste Container
from used rotors, fill the Rotor Stack with brand new rotors and check the level of the
Wash Reference Emulsion in the bottle.
5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance

The weekly preventive maintenance for the ACL Elite/ElitePro consists in cleaning all
the key instrument areas which normally come in contact with sample and reagents
and therefore accumulate residues that will, if allowed to build up, impair the
instrument functionality and affect the tests results. The parts / areas to be cleaned are:
• Instrument exposed surfaces
• The Needle Block
• The Rinse / Waste reservoir
WARNING!
on this area.

Instrument Exposed Surfaces
Wipe down all exposed surfaces of the analyzer body, the inside of the Autosampler
compartment and the Rotor compartment (excluding the rotor holder) using a cloth
soaked in a 0.1 N Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) solution (IL Cleaning Solution). Rinse
using a cloth soaked in distilled water. Wipe dry.
The Needle Block
1. Place 2 glass vials with 4 mL of 0.1 N HCl solution in reagent positions R6

and R7
2. Click the Diagnostic button on the Main menu bar and select the Cleaning
option of the Diagnostic submenu to display the Cleaning screen.
In this screen the operator defines the configuration of the cleaning operation,
according to the needs of the instrument.
Clicking the Start button starts the cleaning cycle and opens a window
displaying a bar that moves to show the elapsed time of the procedure.
The Rinse / Waste Reservoir
Remove the Rinse / Waste reservoir, wash it thoroughly with 0.1N HCl solution (IL
Cleaning Solution) and rinse it with distilled water.
5.2.3 Bi-Weekly Maintenance

The rotor holder and the optical path components located in the analysis area must be
cleaned every two weeks under normal instrument use.
WARNING!
on this area.
1. Press the Open/Close Cover icon to open the Rotor Holder Cover.
2. Proceed as follows using the figure below as a reference:

3. Using a cotton tip applicator moistened with distilled water, clean all 20 holes
in the Rotor Holder and the surfaces of the Channels sensors and fibers. Use a
clean, dry cotton tip applicator to remove all moisture from these areas.
5.2.4 Monthly Maintenance
Check and Clean the Air Filter
1. To check and clean the analyzer air filter, remove it from its location on the
right side of the instrument. The filter slides out when pulled after inserting a
finger in the holder slot (see figure below).

2. Check the filter: if it is dirty or blocked, clean it with compressed air or by

washing it in water and blowing it dry. Do not place a wet filter into its
position.
3. If the filter appears damaged, it should be replaced. Insert the clean or new Air
Filter back in its holder.
5.2.5 Yearly Maintenance

The yearly preventive maintenance for the ACL consists of replacing the following
expandable parts:
• Replace the Air Filter.
• Replace the sample and reagent tubes.
• Replace the Needle Block (see 5.2.6 As Needed Maintenance).
• Replace the waste tube.
• Replace the waste reservoir.
WARNING!
on this area.
5.2.6 As Needed Maintenance
WARNING!
on this area.
Waste Line Cleaning Procedure
The waste line cleaning procedure is performed to prevent formation of clots or to

clean any possible blockages (due to clotting) in the waste line. The frequency with
which this procedure should be done depends on the daily workload.
Materials / Tools needed: 20 mL plastic syringe
20 cm of PVC tube, 4 mm ID, 6 mm OD.

20 mL of distilled water or 10% bleach.

1 Remove the needle from the plastic syringe (if necessary), and fit the PVC
tube on the end on the syringe (the tube’s dimensions must be such that it will
fit onto the syringe on one end and into the waste line at the other end).
2 Fill the syringe with distilled water or 10% bleach.
3 Remove the Rinse / Waste Reservoir and clean it if necessary (refer to Section
5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance).
4 Insert the free end of the PVC tube into the waste line, carefully inject the
distilled water or 10% bleach into the waste line and check that the liquid
flows out from the external waste line of the instrument to the waste container.
5 Repeat the procedure several times to ensure removal of any potential
blockage then replace the Rinse / Waste reservoir.
Cleaning of Sample Spillage
In case of sample / reagent spillage, wipe using a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator
soaked in a 0.1N HCl solution (IL Cleaning Solution). Follow with distilled water and
dry with a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator.
In case of sample / reagent spillage in the Autosampler or in the Rotor Holder
compartment, it may be required to clean also the 2 sensors in the Autosampler and
the two optical paths in the analysis area (see sub-section 5.2.3 Bi-Weekly
Maintenance).
Needles Block Replacing
1. Press the Open/Close Cover icon to open the Rotor Cover.

2. Click Diagnostic on the Main menu bar and select Needles Position. The
Sample Arm moves over the Rotor Holder.
3. Loosen the white knob on the back of the Sample Arm, disconnect the tubing
(label tubings for proper reconnection) and the Liquid Sensor Cable and
remove the Needle Block.
4. Insert the new Needle Block, connect the sensor cable and the two tubings
(connect tubing to proper needle) and position the block higher than the arm’s
top surface.
5. Follow the needle positioning procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
Needle Positioning Procedure
The procedure to reposition or adjust the Needles Block is necessary after having
dismantled for cleaning, decontamination or changes of the Needles Block.
The procedure is described in sub-section 7.7.4.

Needles Block Decontamination Procedure
This sub-section describes the procedure to decontaminate the ACL Needles Block.
It’s recommended after using the system to test a highly infectious sample and as a
general precaution to prevent and eliminate potential bacterial contamination.
The use of the ACL system for the analysis of known or suspected highly infectious
samples, should be followed by careful disinfecting of the instrument surfaces and
parts which have been in contact with the samples. The disinfecting agent used to
perform the procedure indicated below is a 1:8 dilution of IL Cleaning Agent, which
is a solution of sodium hypochlorite with a concentration of less than 0.625% of
available chlorine. The 1:8 diluted solution is prepared by mixing 1 part Cleaning
Agent with 7 parts of distilled water.
NOTE!
Use only IL Cleaning Agent diluted 1:8 with distilled water.

The use of undiluted IL Cleaning Agent may cause corrosion of metal parts.
Materials / Tools needed: 2 glass 10 mL vials

IL Cleaning Agent
Distilled water
1. Prepare approximately 16 mL of diluted Cleaning Agent solution (mix 2 part

of IL Cleaning Agent and 14 parts distilled water).
2. Load the ACL reagent position R6 and R7 with the 2 glass vials filled with 8
mL of the prepared diluted Cleaning Agent solution
3. Press Diagnostic on the Main menu bar, select Cleaning and then press Start.
4. At the end of the cleaning cycle remove the vials in position R6 and R7 and
perform a Priming cycle.
5. Replace the external waste tube and the waste container.
CAUTION!
The discarded items must be placed in an appropriate container for further

incineration, according to proper local regulations.
In the case of suspected severe contamination, replace the tubing and discard the
old one in an appropriate container for further incineration, according to proper
local regulations

Hard Drive Maintenance
Using the Hard Drive Maintenance Diskette, perform the hard drive maintenance as
needed. Refer to procedure 000190357-70 included with the Hard Drive Maintenance
Diskette.
5.2.7 Maintenance Schedule

Frequency Maintenance Procedure
Daily At the beginning and at the end of each working day or once per shift,
carry out a priming cycle:
• Empty the liquid waste container when needed.
• Empty the rotors waste container when needed.
• Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors when needed.
• Load a new bottle of Wash – Reference Emulsion when
needed.
Weekly Clean the exposed instrument surfaces, inside the Autosampler and
the analysis compartments (with the exception of the Rotor Holder).
• Clean the Needles Block carrying out the dedicated cleaning
cycle
• Clean the Rinse / Waste reservoir
Bi-Weekly Clean the analysis compartment optical parts with a cotton tip
applicator moistened with distilled water:
• Clean the LED sensor surface
• Clean the LED optic fibre surface
• Clean the Halogen Lamp sensor surface
• Clean the Halogen Lamp fibre optic surface
• Clean the 20 holes of the Rotor Holder
Monthly Check the Air Filter
Yearly • Replace the Air Filter
• Replace the sample and reagent tubes
• Replace the Needles Block
• Replace the waste tube
• Replace the waste reservoir

Frequency Maintenance Procedure

As needed • Clean the Waste line
• Clean the sample spillage
• Replace the Needles Block
• Position the Needles Block
• Decontaminate the Needles Block
• Hard Drive Maintenance
5.3 Shut Down & Shipment Precautions

This section gives some suggestions in case of long term shut down or shipment of the
instrument. The following procedures describe how to prepare the ACL before a shut
down or a shipment.
5.3.1 Long term Shut Down
5.3.2 Shipment
5.3.1 Long-Term Shut Down

For long period of inactivity, more than one week, the following actions should be
carried out:
1 Perform a Priming cycle by selecting “Priming” in the “Diagnostic” menu.
2 Remove any container on board the instrument.
3 Empty the Rotor Waste Container.
4 Remove and close the Wash – Reference Emulsion bottle.
5 Empty the fluidic tubes by performing another Priming cycle.
6 Close the Wash – Reference Emulsion aspiration tube with adhesive tape.
7 Log-out and switch the instrument Off.
8 Empty and remove the waste tube and the waste container.
9 Disconnect the ACL system electrically from the main power, removing the
Power Cord from the rear of the instrument and from the main line.
10 Cover the instrument with a dust cover.
5.3.2 Shipment
In case of shipment, carry out the following actions:
1 Perform the actions suggested in the sub-section 5.3.1 Long-Term Shut Down.

2 Remove the Needles Block, wash it with IL Cleaning Solution and rinse with
distilled water. Pack it separately. Wipe instrument external surfaces with
10% bleach and rinse surfaces with a cloth, paper towels, etc. dampened with
DH2O.
3 Remove and pack separately also all the other accessories (Sample Tray,
Adapters, Keyboard etc…).
4 Fix with adhesive tape all the parts that could be moving during the transport
(Sample Arm, Rotor Cover, Rotor Stack Cover, Rotor Waste Compartment
Panel etc…).
5 Close with adhesive tape the waste outlet tube on the left side of the
instrument.
6 If the original packing is not available is recommended that a suitable box to
isolate the instrument from any external impact to be used (paying particular
attention to the Display Assembly). In this case pack all the accessories in
another box, separately.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the Service Engineer information about the error messages
displayed by the instrument and suggestions and tools to fix the problem with the
instrument.
This chapter includes the followings sections:
6.1 Operator Error Messages ......................................................................................... 1
6.2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 21
6.3 Service Tools ......................................................................................................... 53
6.4 Standard Tools ....................................................................................................... 66
6.1 Operator Error Messages

This section lists and describes error messages organized by error type that may be
encountered by an ACL Elite operator.
The ACL ELITE/ELITE PRO displays the following types of error messages:
Error Type Description

WARNING A yellow ICON on the bottom part of the screen indicates a problem to the
user. Clicking on the icon invokes a description of the problem. As a general
rule, the instrument may continue to be used with some limitations,
depending on the problem.
ALARM Warns of a problem that needs immediate attention. Some system sub-
functions and operations will still be available. If the failure persists after the
operator switches the instrument off and on again (in case this is suggested),
the problem should be referred to a Service Engineer.
FAILURE Warns of a problem serious enough to prevent further use of the instrument
and requires the intervention of a Service Engineer
Following are the specific sub-sections for problem categories:

6.1.1 System Anomalies: Failures
6.1.2 System Anomalies: Alarms
6.1.3 System Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.4 REM (Rotor Exchange Module) Anomalies: Failures
6.1.5 Temperature Anomalies: Alarms
6.1.6 Mechanical Anomalies: Alarms
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting Page 1 of 66

6.1.7 Mechanical Anomalies: Warnings

6.1.8 Acquisition Station Anomalies: Failures
6.1.9 Acquisition Station Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.10 Liquid Anomalies: Alarms
6.1.11 Liquid Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.12 Optics Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.13 Operative Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.14 Parsing and Loading Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.15 Database Anomalies: Warnings
6.1.16 Data Transmission Failure
6.1.17 Data Reduction Error Codes
6.1.1 System Anomalies: Failures
Error Message Possible Explanation Remedial Action

ACL thermal Temperature inside Contact Service.
shut down the analyzer is
higher than 75°C.
The instrument
shuts down
ACL shut down The output current Contact Service.
of the +5 V supply
is higherthan 11 A.
The instrument
shuts down
Hard disk failure Problem with the Contact Service.
controller or
damaged hard disk.
Floppy disk Problem with the Contact Service.
failure controller or
damaged
floppy disk.
RAM memory Bios finds RAM Contact Service.

failure problem.
Full Hard disk The hard disk is Contact Service.
Opening File Missed critical Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
opening file. contact Service.
Page 2 of 66 Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting


File length alarm Wrong length of a Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
critical file. contact Service.
File read alarm Missed reading of a Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
File write alarm Missed writing of a Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
File close alarm Missed closing of a Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
Exhausted Exhausted master Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
memory memory. contact Service.
Error opening Error while opening Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
window a window on the contact Service.
master.
Master manager Error on the master Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
error error manager. contact Service.
Unexpected Unexpected internal Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
internal message message on the contact Service.
master.
Internal sending Internal sending Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
failed failed on the master. contact Service.
Queue/semaphor Error while creating Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
e creating error a queue or contact Service.
semaphore on the
Driver Error while Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
installation error installing. contact Service.
Timer allocation Error while Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
error allocating timer on contact Service.
Internal library Internal error in the Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
error library on master. contact Service.
Len parse error Error in the message Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
length from master contact Service.
to slave.
Subtype parse Error in the message Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
error code (subtype) from contact Service.
master to slave.


Type parse error Error in the message Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
code (type) from contact Service.
master to slave.
Invalid Error in the Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
parameter parameter message contact Service.
from master to
Database failure Major error in the Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
database handling. contact Service.
Coded SW Major error in code Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
failure handling. contact Service.
6.1.2 System Anomalies: Alarms
Slave Master and slave do Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
communication not communicate. contact Service.
failure
A/D converter Periodic error while Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
failure handling the ADC. contact Service.
Slave code Missing slave code. Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
absent contact Service.
Slave download Failed loading the Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
error slave code. contact Service.
Check DB error Consistency error in Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
the data base. contact Service.
Check Error in consistency Reload the main software. If the failure persists,
parameters error of the parameters. contact Service.
Error Code 1019 Internal system out If this occurs during the initial 30 minutes of startup,
of specification. allow time for temperatures to stabilize.

6.1.3 System Anomalies: Warnings
ACL thermal The temperature Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
warning* inside the analyzer it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
is higher than 60°C.
REM Missing Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
communication communication with it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
error REM. Either the
software is missing
(N/A on the
or REM is not
ACL ELITE)
working.
REM command Command not Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
error executed correctly. it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
(N/A on the
ACL ELITE)
REM download Download not Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
error executed correctly. it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
(N/A on the
ACL ELITE)
DB restoring Failure to restore Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
Error database. it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
DB backup Error Failure to backup Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
database. it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
File open Missed opening a Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
warning non- critical file. it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.

File length Incorrect length of a Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
File read Missed reading a Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
File write Missed writing a Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
File close Missed closing a Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
Floppy disk full The current floppy Replace with a new floppy disk or disk drive.
disk is full.
Floppy disk The current floppy Check the floppy disk on disk drive.
missing# disk is missing.
Floppy disk The current floppy Replace with a new floppy disk.
write protected# disk is write
protected.
Printer fail **# Printer is not Check printer and connection.

connected or not
working.

Paper end No more paper in Reload printer paper.

printer.
Internal BCR The internal barcode Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
failure reader is not it back on. Reload the main software. If the error
working. persists, contact Service.
* Thermal Fail
This warning indicates the instrument is overheating internally, which may have an effect on
the temperature of the measuring chamber. The reason may be a clogged air filter obstructing
the airflow in and out of the analyzer. Check the air filter on the right side of the analyzer;
clean or replace it as necessary following the instructions in Section 5 (Maintenance). Make
sure
that there is free airflow and that the ambient air temperature is below 35°C
NOTE: The ACL ELITE/ELITE PRO works optimally when the ambient temperature is in
the range of 15 to 32°C, and does not fail in the range of 10 to 40°C.
If cleaning the air filter does not resolve the warning and the ambient temperature is within
limits, contact Service.
** Printer Fail
If the printer does not produce a printout due to a printer failure, the results may be obtained
from the video. Results transmitted via the RS232 C data link (if connected and enabled) are
also correct.
In order to troubleshoot the printer, verify that the paper is correctly loaded. Also verify that
the proper transmission protocol has been selected in the ACL ELITE/ELITE PRO Setup
(ESCP2 or PCL), and that the printer supports the selected emulation protocol.
The actual error displayed will vary depending upon the submenu where the request was made.
If the failure persists, contact Service.

6.1.4 REM (Rotor Exchange Module) Anomalies: Failures

(N/A on the ACL ELITE)
REM elect fail REM electrical Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
failure. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
REM voltage out REM voltage out of Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
of range range. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
REM vertical Robotic vertical arm Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
alarm motor failure. movement. If there is no obstruction, but the error
persists, the system may be used in the manual mode
by disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
REM horizontal Robotic horizontal Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
alarm arm motor failure. movement. If there is no obstruction, but the error
Service.
REM transport Transport motor Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
alarm failure. movement. If there is no obstruction, but the error
Service.
REM CPU REM CPU failure. Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
failure movement. If there is no obstruction, but the error
Service.
REM arm EM Arm EM failure. The system may be used in the manual mode by
fault disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.

REM arm EM Arm circuit failure. The system may be used in the manual mode by
driver fault disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
REM transport Transport EM The system may be used in the manual mode by
EM fault failure. disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
REM transport Transport circuit The system may be used in the manual mode by
EM driver fault failure. disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
REM stack EM Stack EM failure. The system may be used in the manual mode by
fault disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
REM stack EM Stack circuit failure. The system may be used in the manual mode by
driver fault disabling the REM. If the error persists, contact
Service.
NOTE: REM errors can be generated if the Rotor Waste door is opened while the
analyzer is executing a rotor exchange.
6.1.5 Temperature Anomalies: Alarms

(See notes at the end of this table.)
Thermal power Power circuit is off. Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
off seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.

Incubation Incubation Allow 30 minutes after powering on to allow

temperature out temperature out of temperature stabilization. If the error persists, contact
of range at range after power
Service.
startup on.
Incubation Incubation Message may appear for a few seconds if the rotor
temperature out temperature out of cover has been left open. If the warning persists after
of range range during normal the rotor cover has been closed for several minutes,
operation.
contact Service.
Peltier out of Peltier temperature Wait 30 minutes after turning power on. If the
range at startup out of range after warning persists, contact Service.
power on.
Although the reagent refrigeration is not working
See Note 1. correctly, the system may continue to be used as long
as the reagents are left on the analyzer only for the
time required for the testing.
Peltier out of Peltier temperature If the warning persists, contact Service.

range out of range during
Although the reagent refrigeration is not working
normal operation.
correctly, the system may continue to be used as long
See Note 1. as the reagents are left on the analyzer only for the
time required for the testing.
Transport out of Transport Wait 30 minutes after turning power on. If the
range at startup temperature out of warning persists, contact Service.
range at startup.
(N/A on the In the meantime, although the thermal regulation of
ACL ELITE) See Note 2. the rotor transport is not operating correctly, the
system may be used.
Transport out of Transport If the warning persists, contact Service.

range temperature out of
In the meantime, although the thermal regulation of
range.
(N/A on the the rotor transport is not operating correctly, the
ACL ELITE) See Note 2. system may be used.
Stack out of Rotor stack Wait 30 minutes after turning power on. If the
range at startup temperature out of warning persists, contact Service.
range at startup.
In the meantime, although the thermal regulation of
See Note 2. the rotor stack is not operating correctly, the system
may be used.

Stack out of Rotor stack If the temperature is out of range the system may be
range temperature out of used provided Q.C. is processed during the session
range. and the results are within established limits. If the
error persists, contact Service.
See Note 2.
NOTES 1
Error Message: Peltier Temperature out of Range

Explanation: Temperature is outside the 10-16°C range.
Remedial Action: Select DIAGNOSTIC from the Main Menu, and then select
TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
• If the video displays ------ or **** for the Peltier, the temperature may be very high or
very low. The instrument may continue to be used provided that the reagents are left on
board only for the duration of the testing, and are refrigerated afterwards. Contact
Service.
• If the video displays a temperature value from 4 to 12°C for the Peltier, the system is
fully operational and precautions need to be taken. However, the Service Engineer
should be called to rectify the situation.
• If the video displays a low temperature value (from 20 to 36°C), check that the ambient
temperature is not higher than 32°C. If the problem is not corrected, contact Service.
NOTE: As noted above, a high temperature may be caused by dirty filters or ambient
temperatures outside the optimal operational range.

NOTES 2
Error Message: Transport or Stack Temperature out of Range

Explanation: Temperature is outside the 36-39oC range.
Remedial Action: Select DIAGNOSTIC from the Main Menu, and then select
TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
• If the video displays ------ or **** for the transport or stack temperatures and the
instrument has been properly warmed up, contact Service.
• If the video displays a high temperature value (from 36 to 50°C), check the air filter
and ambient conditions as indicated in NEED a VALID X-REF If the problem is not
corrected, contact Service.
• If the video displays a low temperature value (from 20 to 36°C), check that the
instrument has been properly warmed up and that the ambient temperature is higher
than 15°C. If the problem is not corrected, contact Service.
NOTE: The system is fully operational even when the pre-heater temperature is out of
range, unless the message “INCUBATION TEMP OUT OF RANGE” appears at the start of
analysis.
6.1.6 Mechanical Anomalies: Alarms

Autosampler Autosampler Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
alarm problem. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
Rotor alarm Rotor holder Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
problem. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
Horizontal motor Horizontal motor Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
alarm arm problem. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.


Vertical motor Vertical motor arm Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
contact Service.
Reagent dilutor Reagent dilutor Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
contact Service.
Sample dilutor Sample dilutor Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
contact Service.
Cover alarm Rotor cover Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
problem. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
6.1.7 Mechanical Anomalies: Warnings
Autosampler Autosampler Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
warning intermittent seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
problem. contact Service.
Rotor warning Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
with rotor holder. movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
Horizontal motor Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
warning with horizontal movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
motor arm.

Vertical motor Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
warning with vertical motor movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
arm.
Reagent dilutor Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
warning with reagent dilutor. movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
Sample dilutor Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
warning with sample dilutor. movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
Cover warning Intermittent problem Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
with rotor cover. movement. If the error persists, contact Service.
Stirrer fail Magnetic stirrer not The system may be used without reagent stirring. In
working. this case the reagent should be well mixed before each
run. If the error persists, contact Service.
6.1.8 Acquisition Station Anomalies: Failures
Error Message Possible Remedial Action

E l ti
Acquisition Acquisition running Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch
timeout alarm for more than 30 it back on. If the error persists, contact Service.
minutes.

6.1.9 Acquisition Station Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Acquisition start Home position not Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
error found at start. movement. If the error persists, switch the system off,
wait a few seconds and switch it back on. If the error
persists, contact Service.
Acquisition sync Home position not Verify that there is no obstruction interfering with
error found during movement. If the error persists, switch the system off,
acquisition. wait a few seconds and switch it back on. If the error
persists, contact Service.
adc int error Unexpected ADC Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
interruption. and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.
Cuv int error Unexpected cuvette Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
interruption. and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.
Acq centrifuge Rotor holder Verify no obstruction exists. Log out, switch the
error blocked. system off, wait a few seconds and switch it back on.
If the error persists, contact Service.
Acq tx error Unable to Transmit Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
data. and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.
Acq rot fail error Rotor fail. Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.
Acq opt ref error Optical reference Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
fail. and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.
Acq ref error Reference emulsion Log out, switch the system off, wait a few seconds
fail. and switch it back on. If the error persists, contact
Service.


Explanation
Acq cover open Cover open during Verify that the rotor cover is closed. If the cover is
error acquisition. closed, but the error persists, please logout. Switch
the system off, wait a few seconds and switch it back
on. If the error persists, contact Service.
6.1.10 Liquid Anomalies: Alarms

Explanation
Flush short Reference Emulsion Verify the Wash-R bottle liquid level. If the liquid
not present. level is low, replace with a new bottle. If sufficient
liquid is present, the user may temporarily disable the
Wash-R sensor. It is then the operator’s responsibility
to verify the Wash-R level. If the error persists with
the sensor enabled, contact Service.
6.1.11 Liquid Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Flush warning Reference Emulsion Verify the Wash-R bottle liquid level. If the liquid
below 100 mL level. level is low, replace with a new bottle. If sufficient
liquid is present, the user may temporarily disable the
Wash-R sensor. It is then the operators' responsibility
to verify the Wash-R level. If the error persists with
the sensor enabled, contact Service.
Sample liquid External needle If the sensor is disabled, it is the operator's

sensor off (sample) sensor responsibility to verify appropriate liquid levels. If the
disabled. error persists with the sensor enabled, contact
Service.
Reagent liquid Internal needle If the sensor is disabled, it is the operator's

sensor off (reagent) sensor responsibility to verify appropriate liquid levels. If the
disabled. error persists with the sensor enabled, contact
Service.


Explanation
Sample liquid External needle If the sensor is disabled, it is the operator's

sensor fail (sample) circuit responsibility to verify appropriate liquid levels. If the
sensor error. error persists with the sensor enabled, contact
Service.
Reagent liquid Internal needle If the sensor is disabled, it is the operator's

sensor fail (reagent) circuit responsibility to verify appropriate liquid levels. If the
sensor error. error persists with the sensor enabled, contact
Service.
Sample short in Insufficient sample An insufficient sample level was detected. If using a
position xxx in position xxx. tube transfer the remaining sample to a sample cup
and repeat the test. If sufficient sample is present, but
the error persists, contact Service.
Cleaning not Cleaning not If the error appeared during an analysis, check the
performed performed due to cleaning material level and perform a cleaning cycle.
insufficient or no If sufficient material is present, but the error persists,
cleaning solution contact Service.
present.
Material Timer for a material Replace the material and reset the onboard timer.
onboard stability onboard has expired.
expired in This material will be
position “XX” displayed in orange
on the material map.
Liquid “ID” A specific non- An insufficient material level was detected. Make
short mandatory liquid sure that the material level is sufficient. If sufficient
“ID” is absent or in material is present, but the error persists, contact
insufficient amount. Service.
Mandatory A specific An insufficient material level was detected. Make

Liquid “ID” mandatory liquid sure that the material level is sufficient. If sufficient
short “ID” is absent or in material is present, but the error persists, contact
insufficient amount. Service.
Error Message: Flush/Optic Channel Error

Explanation: Problem with Reference Emulsion dispensing
Remedial Actions:

• Check the level of the Reference Emulsion in the bottle. If the level is lower than
1 cm, replace the bottle with a new one. Mix by gentle inversion before placing in
the instrument.
• Check that the Reference Emulsion was correctly dispensed into the rotor cuvettes
for the rotor in the analysis cycle. The positions of the Reference Emulsion
depend on the test (further details in Section 7).
• If the Reference Emulsion bottle is in place and it has sufficient liquid, check that
the fluidic path is free of obstructions.
NOTE: a quick way to check the fluidic path is to remove the needle
assembly from the sample arm. Using a beaker to collect the liquid,
perform an automatic PRIMING cycle and check that the liquid is
coming out of both needles. Remember to perform a NEEDLES
POSITION ADJUSTMENT after this check (refer to Maintenance
Section 5).
• Check that the LED is ON.
• If the LED is ON, perform the optic path cleaning as described in the Maintenance
Section 5.
• If none of the above resolves the problem, contact Service.
6.1.12 Optics Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Halogen lamp Halogen lamp is not Please logout. Switch the system off, wait a few
fail working. seconds, and switch it back on. The system may be
used without the halogen lamp for clotting-based tests
only. If the error persists, contact Service.

6.1.13 Operative Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Waste full Rotor waste is full. Empty the rotor waste container. If the error persists
after emptying the container, contact Service.
Waste open Rotor waste cover is Close the rotor waste container door. If the error
open. persists after this action, contact Service.
No rotors (REM No more rotors in Refill the rotor stack. If the error persists after this
active) the rotor stack. action, contact Service.
No rotors (REM No more rotors in Refill the rotor stack. If the error persists after this
not active) the rotor stack. action, contact Service.
Rotor station No more rotors in Refill the rotor stack. If the error persists after this
empty the rotor stack. action, contact Service.
Rotor refill Only one or two Refill the rotor stack. If the error persists, contact
rotors left in the Service.
rotor stack.
Cover open Rotor cover was Close rotor cover. If the error persists contact Service.
during loading / opened during the
incubation loading or
incubation
operation.
Time out expired Time out not met Max Sample limit in test group set to high, lower
during loading during loading. limit by one. Repeat run. If the error persists, contact
Service.


Explanation
No test to No test to perform Check the programmed tests in the database match the
perform programmed in the tests in the multi- tests session. Verify that the
database and after connection to the host is working properly. If they are
host query. both OK, contact Service.
? No tests performed Verify the presence of necessary liquids. If they are

due to missing all on-board, contact Service.
liquids.
6.1.14 Parsing and Loading Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Parsing error Error found in the Verify the test definition setup is accurate and
xxx parameters during complete. Switch the instrument off, wait a few
loading. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
Run error xxx Error found during Log out, switch the instrument off, wait a few
the run. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
Session error Error found during Log out, switch the instrument off, wait a few
xxx the session. seconds and switch it back on. If the error persists,
contact Service.
6.1.15 Database Anomalies: Warnings

Explanation
Database Patient database at Remove data from the database.

warning 95% or higher.
Database full Patient database at Remove data from the database.

100%.

6.1.16 Data Transmission Failure

The error Data Transmission is displayed when there has been an error in the
transmission of the data over the RS232 C interface.
Attempt to re-transmit the data as follows:
1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu, select INTERFACE STATUS to view the
Data Transmission characteristics to the Host Computer
2. Select Data Transmission connection (ACL-computer)
3. Repeat the transmission from the Database.
If the fault persists, contact Service. For additional information please refer to “Appendix
A Host Communication Protocol.”
6.1.17 Data Reduction Error Codes

Any error that occurs during the data reduction process will be reported as a code number.
The following subsections describe all the error code numbers and their meanings.
Possible sources for the errors, identified by letter codes, are shown as flags according to
the following list:
Error Code Abbreviation Priority

Data reduction errors R 1 (Highest)
Temperature Errors T 2
Instrument errors (i.e. Sensor error) E 3
Calibration errors C 4
Analytical Reference Errors A 5
QC errors Q 6
Parallelism Errors P 7
Errors on Algorithms, ratio, Ranges… W 8
Material Errors (i.e. expiration) M 9 (Lowest)
Error Codes, that will not generate a valid result, are represented by an Error
Number. The Error Number is presented instead of a valid result.
6.2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting

This section provides information about instrument error conditions and specific errors
displayed by the instrument.
Following are the specific sub-sections for problem categories:
6.2.1 System Errors
6.2.2 Temperature Errors

6.2.3 Mechanical Errors

6.2.4 REM Errors
6.2.5 Optic Errors
6.2.6 Acquisition Errors
6.2.7 Liquid Sensors Errors
6.2.8 Operative Errors
6.2.9 Database Errors
6.2.10 Sample Identification Errors
6.2.11 DMS Errors
6.2.1 System Errors

The following sections provide information about problems related to the PC like system
present inside the instrument.
• Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On problems.
• Problems detected by the CPU Master Board’s BIOS.
• Problems detected by the Main Program
Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On Problems
ERROR MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE CHECKED

MESSAGE EFFECTS OR REPLACED
Instrument At Turn On the Check that the SPS is not in Protection Mode (DL1
Turn On with Instrument LCD On).
Black Screen (video display) is
Check the presence of all the output voltages on the
Black.
SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for voltage
+6VLAMP).
If the SPS is in protection Mode or output voltages
are less go to the error message “Instrument Shut
Down for Voltage” problem.
Replace the Display Cable.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Video Display Assembly.


Instrument Turn The Instrument Turn Off the Instrument and verify the proper Display
On with Touch performs the Turn Cable connection on CN3 and CN6 in the PC104
Screen problem On cycle but the Board.
Touch Screen is
Replace the Display Cable.
inoperative.
Replace the PC104 Board.
Replace the Display Assembly.
Instrument Shut Unexpected Shut Turn Off the Instrument for at least 20 seconds.
Down for Down for a Short
Check the Main fuses into the Power Entry.
Voltage problem Circuit or for a
lowering of the Unplug the 5 Boards located in the Card Housing,
voltages on the CN12 on the CPU Master Board and then Turn On:
Switching Power Check for the presence of the output voltages on the
Supply. SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for the voltage
The SPS is in +6VLAMP).
Protection Mode If now the voltages are present then investigate for
(DL1 On). which load or Board in Card Housing is the problem.
Turn Off the Instrument, unplug the 3 connectors on
the Power (K1, K2 & K3) and Turn On.
Now Check for the presence of the output voltages on
the SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for the
voltage +6VLAMP).
If the voltages are present, then investigate for which
load or Interconnection Board is present the Short
Circuit.
Replace the SPS Board.


Instrument Shut Unexpected Shut Verify that the environment temperature doesn’t
Down for Down for high exceed 40°C.
Temperature temperature on the
Verify that there is enough space around the
problem Switching Power
Instrument for the fan’s cooling.
Supply’s thermistor
(over 75 °C). Turn OFF the Main Switch and allow the Instrument
to cool (about 15 minutes).
The SPS is in
Protection Mode In the meanwhile check the Air Filter, clean or
(DL1 On). replace if necessary.
Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the Fans
work correctly.
+6VLAMP); pay attention to the +12VPW for the
Fans.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3)
Problems Detected by the CPU Master Board’s BIOS

Hard Disk Drive During the Boot Verify that the HDD parameters are present in the
Failure phase the CPU BIOS configuration (No changes are required, only to
Master Board’s check for possible parameters lost).
BIOS detects a
problem on the
HDD. Replace the Hard Disk Drive.
Floppy Disk During the Boot Verify that the FDD parameters are present in the
Drive Failure phase the CPU BIOS configuration (No changes are required, only to
Master Board’s check for possible parameters lost).
BIOS detects a
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
problem on the
FDD. Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).


RAM Memory During the Boot Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Failure phase the CPU
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a
problem on the
RAM Memory.
Keyboard During the Boot Replace the Keyboard.

Failure phase the CPU
Replace the Interface Board.
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
problem on the Replace the Mother Board.
Keyboard.
Problems Detected by the Main Program

Warning: Error The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
opening file detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
during opening file. Software.
reading file detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
during reading file. Software.
writing to file detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
during writing to Software.
file.
Warning: The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Session loading detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
Error during the loading and of the Slave Software.
of the current
session.
Warning: During the Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,

communications make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master


Master – Slave from the CPU and of the Slave Software.

communication Master to the Slave,
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1). Replace
timeout Error the timeout is
the Slave Board (Board #2).
expired.
Warning:
Timeout Expired
Warning: Error
parsing loading
parameters
Warning: Invalid Invalid parameters Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
parameters are detected during make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
the sending from the and of the Slave Software.
CPU Master to the
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1). Replace
Slave.
the Slave Board (Board #2).
Warning: Zip /
Unzip Error
Warning: REM The Main program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
download Error detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
during the Software.
Download of the
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
R.E.M Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Alarm: Slave The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Absent doesn’t find the make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave
Slave. Software.
Alarm: Slave The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
program not doesn’t find the make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave
loaded software onboard of Software.
the Slave Bd
Alarm: Flash The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Memory Error detects a problem on make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave
the Flash Memory Software.
on the Slave Board.


Alarm: Arcnet The Main program Verify the Arcnet interconnection cable.
Connection detects a problem in
Try also to use the connector CN4 (on the PC104
Error the communications
Board) and P7 (on the Slave Board).
with the Slave
through Arcnet. Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the PC104 Board.
Alarm: A/D
Converter Error
Alarm: OI Error
Alarm: Error The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Creating detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
Window during the creating Software.
of a window for the
Operator Interface
graphic program.
Alarm:
Timeout
Expired
Alarm:
Unknown
message
Alarm: Error
sending message
Alarm: Error The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
creating timer detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
during the creating Software.
of a timer.
Alarm: Master – The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Slave message detects a problem in make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
has incorrect the length of a Software.
length message sent from
the CPU Master to
the Slave.
Alarm: Master – The Main Program Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Slave message detects a problem in make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master


has incorrect the code of a Software.

code message sent from
the CPU Master to
the Slave.
6.2.2 Temperatures Errors

Warning:
Incubation The Instrument is Wait for the the Rotor Holder warm up.
temperature out powered On less
of range in then 30 minutes and
startup the Rotor Holder is If after 30 minutes the Rotor Holder hasn’t achieved
warming up. the right temperature (38-39 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Incubation temperature out of
range”.
Warning:
Incubation The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Holder movement assy:
temperature out powered On more
of range then 30 minutes and
the Rotor Holder Verify, with a DVM that on the connector P148 is
temperature is out of present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
range 38-39 C°. Circuit or an Open Circuit verify the Brushes assy. If
the Brushes Assy is correct then read the thermistor’s
resistance directly on the 2 rings. Otherwise, if the
brushes do not check out, replace the brush assembly.
If the thermistor is defective replace the whole Rotor
Holder movement Assy).
Verify on the connector P148 that the Heater Coil

isn’t interrupted or the capacitor unsoldered.
Verify the Photometric and Temperature Control

Board (Board #6) functionality as described in the
sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the Photometer Interface Board.


Warning: Peltier
1 temperature The Instrument is Waiting for the Peltier 1 to cool.
out of range in powered On less
startup then 30 minutes and
the Peltier 1 is If after 30 minutes the Peltier 1 hasn’t achieves the
cooling. right temperature (10-16 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Peltier 1 temperature out of
range”.
Warning: Peltier
1 temperature The Instrument is powered On more then 30 minutes
out of range and the Peltier 1 temperature is out of range 10-16 C°.
Warning: Peltier
2 temperature The Instrument is powered On less then 30 minutes
out of range in and the Peltier 2 is cooling.
startup
Warning: Peltier
2 temperature The Instrument is Verify the Peltier 2 assy:
out of range powered On more
then 30 minutes and
the Peltier 2 Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P131 is
range 10-16 C°. Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the thermistor).
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P131 is

present also the resistance of the Peltier Cell (If it’s a
Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the whole
Peltier 2 Assy).

sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the Modules Interconnection Board.
Warning: Rotor
Transport The Instrument is Wait for the Rotor Transport warm up.
startup the Rotor Transport If after 30 minutes the Rotor Transport hasn’t


is warming up. achieves the right temperature (34-40 °C) the error
message becomes: “Warning: Rotor Transport
temperature out of range”.
Warning: Rotor
Transport The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Transport assy:
the Rotor Transport Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P111 is
range 34-40° C. Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Transport).

present also the resistance of the Heating Pad (If it’s a
Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Transport).

sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.
Warning: Rotor
Stack The Instrument is Wait for the Rotor Stack warm up.
startup the Rotor Stack is If after 30 minutes the Rotor Stack has not achieved
warming up. the right temperature (34-40 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Rotor Stack temperature out of
range”.


Warning: Rotor
Stack The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Stack assy:
the Rotor Stack
temperature is out of
range 34-40° C.
present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor Stack).

present also the resistance of the Heating Pad (If it’s a
Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Stack).

sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.


Warning:
Instrument The internal Verify that the environment temperature doesn’t
Temperature temperature of the exceed 40°C.
Error Instrument, detected
by the Switching
Power Supply’s
thermistor, reaches
the critical
temperature of 60° Verify that there is enough space around the
C. Instrument for the fan’s cooling.
If it reaches 75 C° Turn OFF the Main Switch and wait for Instrument
then the SPS Board cooling (about 15 minutes).
will enter in
Protection Mode
In the meanwhile check the Air Filter for cleaning or
and the whole
replacement.
Instrument Shut
Down (see
Instrument Shut Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the Fans
Down for work correctly.
temperature).

+6VLAMP); pay attention to the +12VPW for the
Fans.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).


Alarm:
Temperature One of the Is possible remove the Alarm’s message and restore
Power off Assembly’s the normal situation only with a Log-Out, a Turn Off
temperatures and after few seconds a Turn On.
reached a critical
value or is OUT OF
RANGE since more Now is possible investigate about the assembly with
then 15 minutes. the problem and perform the troubleshooting with the
help of the Temperature Warning’s message
associated in this section.
The Instrument for
protection purposes
Turns Off the If the problem is extended at all the temperatures then
thermoregulation go in the A/D Converter test, check if all the values
system for the Rotor on the screen are ***** or -----, in this case replace
Holder, Peltier the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
and/or REM’s
Modules.
6.2.3 Mechanical Errors

Warning: The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the

Autosampler detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the
Check Motor Phase setting.
Autosampler Motor
movement. Check for the plug in of the connectors P74 (for the
motor) and P73 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.5.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Warning: Stirrer The Instrument Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 1.

R1 Error detects a problem on
the Magnetic Stirrer
Motor 1 (Reagent Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Position R1).


R2 Error detects a problem on Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).

Motor 2 (Reagent
Position R2).
Warning: The Instrument Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 3.

Stirrer R3 Error detects a problem on Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Position R3).

R4 Error detects a problem on
Position R4).
Warning: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for the
Sample line detects a problem motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Sample
Error Dilutor Motor
SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
movement.
Warning: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for the
Reagent line detects a problem motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Reagent
Error Dilutor Motor
movement.

Sample Arm detects a problem movement.
Horizontal during the Sample
Motor Error Arm Horizontal
Motor movement. Check for the plug in of the connectors P93 (for the



Sample Arm detects a problem movement.
Vertical Motor during the Sample
Check for the plug in of the connectors P94 (for the
Error Arm Vertical Motor
movement.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Holder Motor detects a problem movement.
Error during the Rotor
Holder Motor
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Cover Motor detects a problem movement.
Cover Motor
movement.
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2; pay
attention to tension of the Cover movement Belt.
Board (Board #6).
Warning: Home
Position not
found


Alarm: Motor
Phase and Delay
Error
Alarm: The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the

Autosampler detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the
Autosampler Motor
Alarm: Sample The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for the
line Dilutor detects a problem motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Motor Error during the Sample
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Alarm: Reagent The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for the
line Dilutor detects a problem motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Motor Error during the Reagent
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Alarm: Sample The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Arm Horizontal detects a problem movement.
Arm Horizontal


Alarm: Sample The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Arm Vertical detects a problem movement.
Arm Vertical Motor
movement.
Alarm: Rotor The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Holder Motor detects a problem movement.
Holder Motor
Board (Board #6).
Alarm: Rotor The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Cover Motor detects a problem movement.
Cover Motor
movement.
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2; pay
attention to tension of the Cover movement’ Belt.
Board (Board #6).

6.2.4 REM (Rotor Exchange Module) Errors
ERROR MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE

MESSAGE EFFECTS CHECKED OR REPLACED
Arm Horizontal detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Rotor
Arm Horizontal
Replace the R.E.M. Lower Interconnection Board.
Arm Vertical detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Rotor
Arm Vertical
Motor movement.
Transport Motor detects a problem movement.
Transport Motor
movement.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Arm detects a problem
Electromagnet in the Electro-
Error Magnet located on Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
the Rotor Arm.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).


Arm detects a problem Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.

Electromagnet in the driver circuit
Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Circuit Error for the Electro-
Magnet located on
the Rotor Arm.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Stack Upper detects a problem
Electromagnet in the Upper
Error Electro-Magnet of Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
the Rotor Stack.
Stack Upper detects a problem
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
for the Upper Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Circuit Error
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Stack Lower detects a problem
Electromagnet in the Lower
Error Electro-Magnet of Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
the Rotor Stack.
Stack Lower detects a problem
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Circuit Error for the Lower Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
Warning: REM The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
CPU Error detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
in the CPU on the Software.
R.E.M. Board.


Warning: REM The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
communication detects a problem make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Error during the Software.
communications
from the CPU on
the R.E.M. Board Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
to the CPU on the
Slave Board.
Warning: REM The Instrument It’s a generic message, typically it’s associated to
execution Error detects a generic another error (see the Warning List and the File Error
problem during the History); after the resolution of other problems if this
movements of the error message doesn’t disappear then Log-Out, Turn
REM’s assembles Off and On the Instrument.
and/or Electro-
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Magnet.
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower Interconnection
Board.
Alarm: REM The REM’s CPU Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
electric Error detects a Short make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Circuit on one, or Software.
more then one,
driver circuit on
Board. Check in the File Error History for the presence of
other alarm message associated.
So, for protection
purposes, the Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower Interconnection
REM’s CPU Turns Board.
Off the +12VPW,
which power the
Board.
Alarm: REM The REM’s CPU Check the presence of the +12VPWR on the TP2 of
voltage out of detects a problem the Switching Power Supply Board.
range on the +24VPW
generated on the
REM Board.

6.2.5 Optic Errors

Warning: Analysis aborted for Check the Halogen Lamp.

Halogen Lamp an unexpected
Assess Service Program and check the +6VLAMP
Error Halogen Lamp Turn
voltage on the TP6 of the SPS; if required adjust this
Off or a lowering of
voltage through RV2.
the +6VLAMP
voltage on the Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Switching Power
Supply.


Warning: No The Instrument Check the presence of Wash-R Emulsion or Distilled

Wash-R detects a problem on Water in the Rotor’s cuvettes.
Emulsion / the Optical
Optical Channel Reference or the
Error Optical Channels Cleans the Rotor Holder holes and all the optic parts
during the Analysis. in the analysis compartment (for both Optic
Channels), using cotton tips with Distilled Water.
Following are the
checks performed:
Check Out and Adjust the Optic Channels value:
1) During the rotor Coagulimetric Channel
verification: OFFSET: 0 – 15 mV.
- OFFSET GAIN: with Wash-R Emulsion in cuv. #20
Coagulimetric Ch
<70mV. (without 2.6 V.
rotor)
- OFFSET Chromogenic Channel
Chromogenic Ch
<70 mV. (without OFFSET: 0 – 15 mV.
rotor) GAIN: with no cuvette in rotor holder 8.7 V.
Check also that the Chromogenic Channel value
2) During the reading with the Wash-R Emulsion in the cuv. #6 is
Acquisition: <3.5 V. If failed, replace the Optical Filter at 405 nm,
located over the Chromogenic Sensor inside the Rotor
- Coagulimetric Cover.
Channel’s values,
read on the Wash-R
Emulsion, within Check the light sources efficiency.
range 1.5 – 4.0 V.
- Chromogenic
Channel’s values,
read on the distilled
water, within range
5.0 - 9.5 V.
- Chromogenic
Channel’s values,
read on the Wash-R
Emulsion <3.5V.

6.2.6 Acquisition Errors

Warning: Rotor Analysis aborted for Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
Holder Motor an unexpected motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
blocked during failure of the Rotor
acquisition Holder Motor
during the
acquisition. Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Warning: Home Analysis aborted for Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
Position not an unexpected motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
found during failure during the
acquisition acquisition, of the
DCOS associated to Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
the Rotor Holder. DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Board (Board #6).
Warning: Analysis aborted for Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
Unexpected an unexpected motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
cuvette failure during the
interruption acquisition, of the
DCOS associated to
the Rotor Holder. Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Board (Board #6).
Warning: Analysis aborted for Check Coag and Chrom Acquisition Voltage.
Unexpected an unexpected A/D


ADC interrupt Converter Interrupt, Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
during the
acquisition.
Warning: Null Acquisition signal Check Coag and Chrom Acquisition Voltage and
optical reference goes to zero during “Offset” Voltage.
ADC error in analysis cycle
Check “Curve Adjustment” setting.
acquisition
Check LED, optical fibre, coaxial cable connection.
Replace Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3)
Warning: Data Analysis aborted for Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
transmission an unexpected error
error during of the data
acquisition transmission, during
the acquisition.
Warning: Rotor Analysis aborted for Check Motor Phase setting.

Holder Motor an unexpected
error during failure of the Rotor
acquisition Holder Motor
during the Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
acquisition. DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Board (Board #6).
Warning:
Acquisition
stopped
Warning: Rotor Analysis aborted for Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover Sensor
Cover opened an unexpected as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pay attention to
during opening of the Rotor the correct positioning of the sensor.
acquisition Cover during the
Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.
acquisition.
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.

6.2.7 Liquid Sensors Error

Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Liquid in the
Sample Low detects, during the Position xxx.
Level in Position loading, a Low
Perform any Priming cycles and then check for air
xxx Level on the Sample
bubbles along the fluidic path.
located in the
position xxx. Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
pay attention to the correct positioning of the Needles
Block.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
Warning: Liquid The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Liquid “Id” in
“Id” Low Level detects, during the the Position xxx.
in Position xxx loading, a Low
for test yyy Level on the Liquid
“Id” located in the
position xxx and Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
used for the test checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
yyy. pays attention to the correct positioning of the
Needles Block.
Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Mandatory
Mandatory detects, during the Liquid “Id” in the Position xxx.
Liquid “Id” loading, a Low
Low Level in Level on the
Mandatory Liquid
Position xxx
“Id” located in the Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4,
for test yyy checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
position xxx and
used for the test pays attention to the correct positioning of the
yyy. Needles Block.


Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Wash-R detects a Low Level Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Emulsion Low on the Wash-R
Check also the horizontally of the Wash-R
Level Emulsion.
Emulsion’s bottle and for the correct insertion of the
cap sensor.
checks for the functionality of the Wash-R Emulsion
Sensor.
Warning: Wash- The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
R Emulsion detects, during a not Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
absent analytical cycle, that
the Wash-R
Emulsion is absent.
Sensor.
Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board
Warning: The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,

Sample sensor detects a problem on checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor.
Error the Sample line’s
Liquid Sensor.


Warning: The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,

Reagent sensor detects a problem on checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor.
Error the Reagent line’s
Liquid Sensor.
Warning: The Wash-R Solves the problem associated to the Wash-R Sensor,
Wash-R sensor Emulsion Sensor is then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
Off disabled in the menu to restore the normal condition.
System
Configuration
menu’.
Warning: The Sample line’s Solves the problem associated to the Sample Sensor,
Sample sensor Sensor is disabled in then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
Off the System menu to restore the normal condition.
Configuration
menu’.
Warning: The Reagent line’s Solves the problem associated to the Reagent Sensor,
Reagent sensor Sensor is disabled in then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
Off the System menu to restore the normal condition.
Configuration
menu’.
Alarm: Wash-R The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Emulsion absent detects, during an Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
analysis, that the
Wash-R Emulsion is
absent.
Sensor.
The analysis aborts.
Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.

6.2.8 Operative Errors

Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check in the Optic Sensor test the functionality and
Waste Door detects, before the the mechanical assemble of the Rotor Waste Presence
open and/or Rotor unloading, Switch.
Rotor Waste that the Rotor Waste
Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
Container absent door is open and/or
the Rotor Waste is Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
missing.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.5.2,
Waste Full detects, before the checks for the functionality of the Waste Full Sensor.
Rotor unloading,
Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
that the Rotor Waste
is full. Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Warning: Printer The Instrument Check that the External Printer is connected and On-
failure detects, before the Line.
document printing,
Check in the Interface Setup that the transmission
that the External
protocol selected is consistent (ex. ESC/P2).
Printer fails or is not
ready to print. Following the procedure in the section 7.13.5, checks
for the functionality of the External Printer.
Replace the Interface Board.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check for the presence of the liquids required in the
Cleaning not detects, during the positions R6 and R7.
performed cleaning cycle, that
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4,checks
the cleaning’s liquid
for the functionality of the Needles Sensor.
is missing in the
positions R6 and/or Replace the Needles Block.
R7. Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the Mother Board.
Warning: Forced The Instrument Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover Sensor
open Rotor detects, during as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pay attention to
Cover loading or the correct positioning of the sensor.


incubation, that the Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.

Rotor Cover is open.
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.
Warning: Rotor The Instrument Check for the functionality of the Rotor Stack Cover
Stack Cover detects that the Sensor in the Optic Sensor test.
open Rotor Stack Cover
Check for the presence of the Magnet.
is open.
Replace the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor.
Replace the REM Upper Interface Board.
Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Warning: Floppy The Instrument Check for the presence of the Floppy Disk in the
Not Present detects that the Floppy Disk Drive.
Floppy Disk is
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
missing.
Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Warning: Floppy The Instrument Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk Drive
disk write detects, during a is not write protect.
protected writing operation,
Replace the Floppy Disk.
that the Floppy Disk
is write protected. Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Warning: Floppy The Instrument Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk Drive
disk full detects, during a is not full.
writing operation,
Replace the Floppy Disk.
that the Floppy Disk
is full. Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Warning: During the loading Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
Timeout expired of the analytical make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
during loading cycle the timeout is and of the Slave Software.
expired.

6.2.9 Database Errors

Warning: The Instrument Restore normal conditions performing a Backup

Database full detects that the (Recommended) and a Delete of the Patient data.
Database is full.
Warning: Error
restoring
Database
Warning: Error
backing up
Database
Alarm: Error
opening
Database
Alarm:
Check Database
error
Alarm: Database
Error
6.2.10 Samples Identification Errors

Warning: No There is not Check for the consistency between Samples ID on the
Test to Perform consistency between Sample Tray and the programmed Loadlists.
Samples ID and
programmed
Loadlists.


Warning: Error The Barcode Reader Check for the presence of a good label on the Samples
in Samples can’t recognize one and the correct position.
Identification or more Sample ID
Check that the Labels are as specification required
Labels.
(see Appendix B).
Check for the correct assemble and alignment of the
Internal Barcode Reader.
Check for the cleaning and the transparency of the
plastic slide in front to the BCR.
Warning: The Instrument Replace the Internal Barcode Reader.

Internal Bar detects the Internal
Code Reader Bar Code Reader
Error fail. Replace the Module Interconnection Board.
6.2.11 DMS Errors

Warning: Host Informative Verify the functionality of the Host communication

Com.: ASTM Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Error passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.

Com.: Bad Test Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Code passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Too Many Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Test passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Unknown Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Test Code passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Host Not serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW


Responding Message. passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Host Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Required Stop passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Format Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Error passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Test Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Order without passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Sample ID Communication Protocol”.

Com.: Sample Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
ID without Test passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Order Communication Protocol”.

Com.: Invalid Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Sample ID passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Used Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Sample ID passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Database Full passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host

Com.: Sent Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Different passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Sample ID Communication Protocol”.



Com.: Invalid Message. serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
Instrument ID passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
6.3 Service Tools

In this section are described the Service Tools that have been designed to aid in servicing
of the ACL Elite/ElitePro.
All tools listed below are applicable to the Elite/ElitePro.
The following table includes the main information about the Service Tools.
NAME USED FOR ALREADY USED IN ACL

FAMILY
Temperature Probe Rotor Holder temperature test YES
Coagulimetric Optic Test Coagulimetric Channel YES

Kit performance checks
Chromogenic Optic Test Chromogenic Channel YES

Kit performance checks
Graduated Capillary Kit Sample / Reagent Dilutor line YES

dispensation test
RS 232 C Interface Check Serial lines test (Require the YES

Connector Adapter below to work)
RS 232 C Interface Check Serial lines test NO

Connector Adapter
Needles Position Tool Needles Position test YES
Sample Arm Centering Sample Arm Movement Assy NO

Tool positioning
Rotor Arm Centering Tool Rotor Arm positioning NO
Needles Waste Centering Sample Arm positioning NO

Tool

NAME USED FOR ALREADY USED IN ACL

FAMILY
Peltier Centering Tool Peltier positioning NO
Touch Screen Calibration Touch Screen Calibration test NO

Tool
Rotor Cover Motor Rotor Cover Movement Assy NO

Centering Tool positioning
Rotor Cover Encoder Rotor Cover Movement Assy NO

Centering Tool Encoder positioning
Rotor Stack Centering Rotor Stack positioning NO

Tool
Rotor Snap Alignment Alignment of rotor snap NO

tool mounting pins
Rotor Temperature Simulates resistance value of NO

Simulation tool rotor holder thermistor
Following is a detailed description of each Service Tool above listed.
Temperature Probe
Purpose:
This Tool allows the checking of the actual temperature within the rotor analysis area.
Description:
It consists of a precise thermistor fit into a cuvette of an analysis rotor.
The leads of the thermistor are brought to the upper tool surface in order to allow the
measuring of the thermistor resistance (with a DVM) through the two dispensing holes on
the Rotor Cover. The read resistance value allows through a mathematical calculation
written on the label stuck on the tool upper surface, to know the temperature in °C present
inside the analysis rotor. The value must be between 36 –38 °C.

The procedure to use this tool is very easy but it’s important to pay attention to follow all
of these steps:
1 Turn On the Instrument and wait at least 20 minutes.
2 Check in the Temperature Control menu that the Rotor Holder Temperature is
within range 38 – 39 °C.
3 Place the Temperature Probe on the Rotor Holder as a normal analysis rotor.
4 Wait at least 15 minutes then using your DVM read the resistance of the
thermistor on the upper surface of the tool and calculate the corresponding
temperature.
Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Coagulimetric Channel (see sub-
section 7.2.2).
Description:
The kit contains four different concentration levels of Wash-Reference Emulsion for a
total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13 ampoules of 2

19 ampoules of 1
12 ampoules of 0.5
6 ampoules of 0.25
Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Chromogenic Channel (see sub-
section 7.3.2).
Description:
The kit contains four different concentration levels of a yellow solution
(ParaNitroAniline, PNA) for a total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13 ampoules of 160
19 ampoules of 80
12 ampoules of 40
6 ampoules of 20
Graduated Capillary Kit
Purpose:
This tool allows the checking of the Sample and Reagent Dilutor lines aspiration and
dispensing (see sub-section 7.8.2).
Description:
The kit contains 3 capillaries.

Upper Reference lines
Lower Reference lines
GRADUATED CAPILLARY
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Purpose:
These tools can be plugged together on serial line ports (Modem, Mouse and Host
communication ports) present on the rear Instrument Interface Board to allow ports to be
tested through the relevant Service program (see section 7.13).
Description:
Following is the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector drawing in order to make it if it’s
not available

The RS 232 C Interface Check Connector Adapter is a standard PC adapter 25/9 Pin
Female/Female.
Following is the drawing of a serial customized 9 Pin Check Connector Male (for the Bar
Code Port) or Female (for Host, Mouse and Modem Port) in order to make it if the RS
232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available.
TX RX
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
DTR DSR
C T S RT S

Needles Position Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to carry out the alignment of the Needles Block in respect to the
analysis rotor position (see sub-section 7.7.4).
Description:
The tool is a plastic block that has to be properly snapped on the Rotor Holder with the
“A” face up. The side “A” of the tool has two Reference Points in order to allow the
proper alignment of the Needles Block tips.
Sample Arm Centering Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Sample Arm Movement Assy in respect to the
Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Sample Arm Movement
Assy shaft and its Fluidic Plate hole.


Rotor Arm Centring Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Rotor Arm in respect to the Rotor Transport (see
sub-section 7.7.6).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Rotor Arm central finger and
the Rotor Transport central hole.
Needles Waste Centering Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Needles Block (and the Sample Arm) in respect to
the Needles Waste/Rinse position on the Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a shape very similar at the normal Waste Adapter with the addition of 2
tubes that fits in the 2 holes for the Needles.

Peltier Centering Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Peltier Assy in respect to its holes in the Fluidic
Plate (see sub-section 4.1.2).
Description:
The tools have a simple cylindrical shape that fits into the reagents adaptor holes of the
Peltier.

Touch Screen Calibration Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used during the Touch Screen Calibration test (see section 7.12).
Description:
The tools have a simple pencil shape with a rounded tip.
Rotor Cover Motor Centering Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used when is needed to put in tension the Belt of the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy before the final fixing with the 3 screws (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple flat shape that fits into the niche between the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy and the support. This tool assures the horizontal alignment of the Rotor
Cover Movement Assy.

Rotor Cover Encoder Centering Tool
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Encoder Disk position when the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy is replaced (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple pencil shape with a thread (M3) at the tip that fits into the setscrew
hole.
Rotor Stack Centering Tool
Purpose:
Rotor Stack Centering Tool is used to align the Rotor Silo to the Transport Plate (Slider).
Description:
Tool has a handle to allow user to place tool into rotor stack. Tool also has notches to
allow tool to pass by calliper arms in rotor stack. The tool has access holes to access
screws on transport (slider) plate.

Sample Tray Alignment Tools
Purpose:
Tools are placed into sample and reagent positions on the tray and tray alignment to the
sample arm is verified.
Description:
Tools are sized to fit into sample or reagent positions on the tray. Each tool has an
alignment hole to check position with needle block in arm.
Rotor Snap Alignment Tool
Purpose:
After rotor snap is removed from the rotor holder the Rotor Snap Alignment Tool is used
to insure the 2 pins on the rotor holder are straight vertically. Tool is placed over the pins
on the rotor holder to straighten the pins.
Description:
Rotor Snap Alignment Tool is cylinder shaped with two (2) small holes in the bottom of
the lower end. Align small holes with pins on rotor holder where snap mounts and gently
press down on tool to straighten pins.
Rotor Holder Temperature Simulation Tool
Purpose:
Simulates rotor holder thermistor resistance if at approximately 37.5C . A defective
heater coil will cause power supply to shut down due to no load or overcurrent condition.
Using this tool the ACL unit can be powered on to allow further troubleshooting.
Description:
If power supply is in shutdown condition, unplug the rotor holder heater cable and install
the rotor holder temperature simulator tool by plugging it into the heater cable connector.
This will simulate a rotor temperature of approximately 37.5 C possibly allowing the

power supply to power up normally and allow the service personel to further troubleshoot
the unit.
6.4 Standard Tools

This section provides suggestions about the standard tools equipment of the Service
Engineer required to perform a replacement or an adjustment on the ACL Elite/ElitePro.
Following is the list of the standard tools:
• Set of metric hexagonal Allen Screw Driver

In particular: 1.5 mm
2 mm
2.5 mm *
3 mm *
5 mm
• Set of metric Socket Wrench Driver

In particular: 5 mm
5.5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
• Flat Srew Driver
• Phillips Screw Driver
* NOTE: A special flexible version of these two screwdrivers are both available in
the kit “2.5/3 mm Flex Allen Screw Driver”

Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 7 Checkout & Adjustment

This chapter is designed to allow the Service Engineer to perform a thorough check of
the whole Instrument.
The Service software incorporates proper utilities for the entire checkout and
adjustment needed.
NOTE: For Software version 3.0 and above, to access the Service Menu log on with
Username: Service and Password: System Fix
User names and passwords are case sensitive.

7.1 Quick Reference Guide for Electronic Adjustment ............................................ 2
7.2 Coagulimetric Channel ....................................................................................... 4
7.3 Chromogenic channel ....................................................................................... 14
7.4 Liquid Sensors................................................................................................... 22
7.5 Optic Sensor Test .............................................................................................. 27
7.6 Motor Adjust ..................................................................................................... 40
7.7 Module Positioning ........................................................................................... 60
7.8 System Dilutors Test ......................................................................................... 77
7.9 Magnetic Sensors .............................................................................................. 83
7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch ........................................................................... 84
7.11 Switching Power Supply Check Out and Adjustment ...................................... 85
7.12 Touch Screen Calibration.................................................................................. 86
7.13 Interfaces Test ................................................................................................... 89
7.14 Temperature Control ......................................................................................... 93
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test ..................................................................................... 94
7.16 Software Checking & Loading.......................................................................... 96
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment Page 1 of 109

7.1 Quick Reference Guide for Electronic Adjustment

This section is designed to help the service engineer to remember the set value and the
conditions to perform the main electronic adjustment.
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3)
Trimmer Function Condition Reading Point Set Value (V)

RV1 Off-Set Coag. Ch. Light LCD 0-15 mv
blocked For new RoHS
PCBs, set value
to 15mV
RV2 Gain Coag: Ch. 200ul ref LCD 2.6 +/- 0.300V
sol position
20
RV3 Gain Chrom. Ch. No Rotor LCD 8.7 +/- 0.050V
RV4 Off-Set Chrom. Ch. Light LCD 0-15 mv
blocked
RV5 Rotor Cover Sensor Cover LCD >2.7 V
closed
RV6 Autosamp. Middle Ring 2ml Cup LCD Refer to
Optic Sensor procedure in
section 7.5.3
Page 2 of 109 Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment


RV7 Autosamp. Inner Ring 4ml Bottle LCD >3.2 V
Optic Sensor without
label, filled
w/ water
RV9 Wash-R Level Sens. Flush LCD Flush volume
volume 500ml
500ml
RV10 Autosamp. Outer Ring 2ml Cup LCD >3.0 V
Optic Sensor
RV11 Reagent Level Sens. 1500ul ref LCD 4.0 to 4.4 V
sol. 4 ml
bottle
RV12 Sample Level Sens. 150ul ref LCD 3.9 to 4.3 V
sol. 0.5 ml
cup
Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board #4)

PT1 Rotor Stack Optic Rotor in TP 0 & TP 1 ≥8.0 V
Sensor position
PT2 Rotor Transport Optic Rotor in TP 0 & TP 2 ≥8.0 V

Sensor position


PT3 Rotor Waste Optic Ten rotors in TP 0 & TP 3 ≥4.00 V
Sensor waste bin
7.2 Coagulimetric Channel

Several tests are available to troubleshoot or verify the Coagulimetric Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) and optical components
(light source and optic fiber).
Test Name Purpose See section

Coagulimetric Channel Sets the reading value and the peak of 7.2.1
check out and adjustment the bell shaped signal of data acquisition.
Performance check out Verifies that precision and linearity are 7.2.2
within specs.
Light source (LED) Performs match of electronic signals to 7.2.3
verification actual performance of the light source.
Optic fiber check out and Optimizes optic performance. 7.2.4
adjustment procedure
Following are the specific sub-sections for coagulimetric tests:

7.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel Check Out and Adjustment
7.2.2 Performance Checkout
7.2.3 Light Source (LED) Verification
7.2.4 Optic Fibre Check Out and Adjustment Procedures
7.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel Check Out and Adjustment

Materials / tools necessary for the test: Brand new rotors.
Wash-Reference Emulsion.
200µl micropipette.
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched ON for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior to performing the following procedure:
1. Enter the service program menu.
2. Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with
distilled water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor window and
the optic fiber of the Coagulimetric Channel. Do not use metal forceps with

gauze as this may scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light
affecting the proper system performance.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The
instrument displays the screen below.
4. Using the Icon on the screen turn off the LED. Lower the analysis
compartment cover then locate the trimmer RV1 (on Board # 3) see figure
below.
5. Adjust RV1 to read between 0 and 15 mV on screen. Then touch “√” to exit.
NOTE: Turn RV1 CCW to increase offset mV or CW to decrease offset mV.
6. For newer RoHS style board, set RV1 to read 15 mV. You should not observe
any fluctuation in voltage as with the older non RoHS PCB.

On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Curve
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below:
1. Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.

2. Place the prepared rotor on the Rotor Holder.
3. Select Coagulimetric Channel, set rotational speed to 1200 rpm and touch
Start. The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the
acquisition cycle, scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay
corresponding to the value of 1000.
4. Update, if necessary the current delay, keying in the new value on the window
“Select Delay”.
5. Change the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm, and touch Start. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay
6. Update the delay by keying it on the window “Select Delay” only if necessary.
Touch “√” to exit, so the new settings will be saved.
7. On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and
Acquisition Adjustment.
8. Leave the rotor previously loaded in place and touch Start (if the rotor loaded
was in place for more than 3 minutes load a new one).
9. Adjust RV2 (on board # 3, see figure on previous page) to read 2.6 Vdc on the
Coagulimetric Channel line (accept any value from 2.3 to 2.9Vdc). Once
adjusted touch Stop, then “√” to exit.
10. On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fiber
Adjustment. Wait for the motor initialization, then remove the rotor from the
analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify that (without a rotor in place)
no “cuvette” reads higher than 70 mV. Should this test fail, perform the fiber
adjustment as described in sub-section 7.2.4. If the test passes then touch Stop
and insert a new rotor into the analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify

that cuvette readings are above 130 mV and do not exceed 1500 mV. Touch
Set to Envelope Mode and verify that all the min/max values are < 50mV.
Touch Stop and then “X” to exit.

These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel:
• Coagulimetric Precision Test
• Coagulimetric Linearity Test
The Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit is necessary to perform both tests. The kit consists
of 50 vials (2 mL each):
13 vials 2
19 vials 1
12 vials 0.5
6 vials 0.25
WARNING: If one of the tests fail then it is necessary to perform all the other check
out tests of this section 7.2.
NOTE: The procedure identifies the Coagulometric Precision test and
Coagulometeric Linearity test for the “Reagent” fluidic path. To run the
Coagulometric Precision test and Coagulometric Linearity test for the “Sample”
fluidic path select “Loading Type” as “Sample Dilutor” and in addition the sample
and reagent tubing connections at the probe block must be swapped. At the
completion of the test(s) swap the sample and reagent tubing connections at the probe
block back to the original positions.
Coagulimetric Precision Test

Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial or other
suitable container
1. On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and
Channel Optic Test.
2. The instrument shows the screen below. Select in sequence Channel type:
Coagulimetric; Test Type: Precision Loading Type: Reagent.

3. Put the content of two vials (4ml) labelled 1 into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent
vial with a Green adapter.
NOTE: For this test it is possible to use the Wash-Reference Emulsion in
substitution of the Silicon Emulsion labelled 1.
4. Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
5. Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor
before placing the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
6. Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes picking the Silicon Emulsion from the reagent vial using the reagent
probe.
7. Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18) :<=5
CV% (Reference) :<=3
Mean Reference : 2.2 V to 3.0 V
NOTE: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from
the “Loading Type” window.
8. Touch “√” twice to exit.
Coagulimetric Linearity Test

Clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
Channel Optic Test.

Coagulimetric; Test Type: Linearity Loading Type: Reagent.
3. Put the content of two vials (4ml), of each level (1, 0.5 and 0.25) into three
clean, empty 4 mL reagent vials with their Green adapters.
4. Position the 4 mL reagent vials with the adapters on the reagent tray as
follows:
Rgt position Level Volume
R1 1 4 ml
R2 0.5 4 ml
R3 0.25 4 ml
5. Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor
before placing the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
6. Touch Start in Manual Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes aspirating silicon emulsions from the reagent vials using the reagent
probe.
7. Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) :<=4
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=5
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) : < = 5
CV% (Reference) : < = 2.5
R2 : >= 0.997

7.2.3 Light Source (LED) Verification

These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel LED with fiber:
• Coagulimetric Channel LED efficiency Test
• Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fiber replacement
Coagulimetric Channel LED Efficiency Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Brand new rotors

Wash-Reference Emulsion
200 µl micropipette
Acquisition Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.
2. Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.

3. Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
4. Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.

5. Touch Start and then turn RV2 fully clockwise until to read as low as possible
on the Coagulimetric Channel line.
6. Check that in the above conditions the value displayed on the screen is higher
than 250 mV. If test fails replace the “Coagulimetric Channel LED with fiber”
assy (see next sub-section). If test passes then adjust RV2 to read 2.6 V ± 0.3V
on the screen.
7. Touch Stop and “√” to exit.
Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fibre Replacement

If the LED is replaced follow the procedure here below to adjust the amplifier circuit
and the optic fibre.
Acquisition Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.

2. Load 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion inside cuvette number 20 of a new

rotor.
3. Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment, and
then touch Start.
4. Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.
5. Adjust RV2 to read 2.600 ± 0.3 V on the screen.

6. Loosen the setscrew, which locks the sleeve with the optic fibre into the
socket.

Optic fibre
Loose this
set screw
Sleeve
7. Move the optic fibre upward to obtain the maximum voltage reading on the
Coagulimetric Channel line. After reaching maximum value, move fibre in
opposite direction until the value decreases by 100mV, then tighten the
setscrew.
8. Adjust by means of RV2 the reading to 2.600 ± 0.3 V.
9. Touch Stop then “√” to exit.
7.2.4 Optic Fibre Check Out and Adjustment Procedure

1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fibre
Adjustment.
2 Wait for the initialization of the motors then empty the analysis compartment from
any rotor.
3 Touch Start and verify that (without any rotor in place) no “cuvette” reads a value
higher than 70 mV. See screen below:

WARNING: If this test fails then follow these few points:

• Loosen the setscrew that holds the Optic Fibre in place on the Rotor Holder
side.
• Rotate the Optic Fibre CW or CCW (max. 90°) until a reading lower than 70
mV is obtained.
• Tighten the setscrew to lock the Optic Fibre back in place (the Optic Fibre
must be placed in the bottom).
4. Touch Set envelope mode.
5. Wait for about 30 seconds and verify that for no cuvette the MIN-MAX
reading value is higher than 50 mV. If not then perform the test in the sub-
section 7.2.3 paying attention to the reading oscillations on Coagulimetric
Channel (higher then 50 mV). Then perform the procedure in the sub-section
7.2.1.
6. If OK, touch Stop. Raise the Rotor Holder Cover and load a new rotor on the
Rotor Holder.
7. Touch Start and check that all cuvettes values read higher than 130 mV and
don’t exceed 1500 mV. If exceed 1500 mV then check for rotor integrity.
Touch Set envelope mode and verify that the MIN-MAX for each cuvette is
50mV or less.
8. Touch Stop and then “X” to exit.
7.3 Chromogenic channel

Several tests are available either to troubleshoot or verify the Chromogenic Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) as well as optical
components (light source and optic fiber).
The tests that achieve verification of the Chromogenic Optical Channel are:
Test Name Purpose See Section

Chromogenic Channel Sets the read value and the peak of the bell 7.3.1
check out and adjustment shaped signal of data acquisition.
Channel performance Verifies that precision and linearity are 7.3.2
check out within specs
Light Source (Halogen Performs match of electronic signals to 7.3.3
Lamp) verification actual performance of light source
Following are the specific sub-sections for chromogenic tests:

7.3.1 Chromogenic Channel Check Out and Adjustment
7.3.3 Light Source (Halogen Lamp) Verification

7.3.1 Chromogenic Channel Check Out and Adjustment

Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched on for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior to going through the following procedure:
1. Enter to the service program menu.
2. Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with
distilled water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor and the Optic
Fiber windows of the Chromogenic Channel. Do not use metal forceps with
gauze as this may scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light
affecting the proper system performance.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The
instrument displays the screen below.
4. Using the Icon turn off the Halogen Lamp. Lower the analysis compartment
cover, then locate the trimmer RV4 (on Board # 3), see figure below:

5. Adjust RV4 to read between 0 and 15 mV or 15 mV for the newer style PCB
on screen. Then touch “√” to exit.
NOTE: Turn RV4 CCW to decrease offset mV and CW to increase offset mV.
Curve Adjustment.
7. Load 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion inside cuvette number 20 of a new
rotor. Place rotor onto rotor holder.
8. Select Chromogenic Channels, set rotational speed at 1200 rpm and touch
Start. The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the
acquisition cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay
9. Check that the delay is within 90 µsec. from the “current” delay displayed on
the window “Select Delay.” The Chromogenic channel delay cannot be
updated, only viewed and compared to the current Coagulametric channel
delay.
10. Change the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm and touch Start. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay

11. Check that the delay is within 120 µsec. from the “current” delay displayed on
the window “Select Delay.”
12. Remove the rotor. On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical
Module Test and Acquisition Adjustment. Touch Start, then adjust RV3 (on
board # 3, see figure on previous page) to read 8.7 ± 0.05 Vdc on the
Chromogenic Channel line. Once adjusted touch Stop.
13. Load a new rotor with 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion on cuvette # 6.
Place the loaded rotor in the analysis compartment.
14. Touch Start and verify that the reading on Chromogenic Channel line does not
exceed 3.5 Vdc. Otherwise replace the 405 nm Optical Filter and repeat the
test.
15. Touch “√” to exit

These three tests allow you to verify the overall performance of the Chromogenic
Channel:
• Chromogenic Precision test
• Chromogenic Linearity Test level 80
• Chromogenic Linearity Test level 160
The Chromogenic Optic Test Kit is necessary to perform both tests. The kit
incorporates 50 vials (2 mL each), having the following concentration of PNA
(ParaNitroAnyline):
13 vials 160 µmol/L
19 vials 80 µmol/L
12 vials 40 µmol/L
6 vials 20 µmol/L
NOTE: The procedure identifies the Chromogenic Precision test and Chromogenic
Linearity test for the “Reagent” fluidic path. To run the Chromogenic Precision test
and Chromogenic Linearity test for the “Sample” fluidic path select “Loading Type”
as “Sample Dilutor” and in addition the sample and reagent tubing connections at the
probe block must be swapped. At the completion of the test(s) swap the sample and
reagent tubing connections at the probe block back to the original positions.
Chromogenic Precision Test

Clean, empty reagent vial, or other
suitable container.

Channel Optic Test.
2. Select in sequence Channel type: Chromogenic; Test Type: Precision
Loading Type: Reagent. The instrument shows the screen below:
3. Put the content of two vials (4ml) of PNA (ParaNitroAnyline) concentration

80 µmol/L into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with its Green adapter or
other suitable container.
4. Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
5. Pour at least 4 mL of distilled water onto a clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
6. Position the reagent vial with the distilled water onto reagent position R4.
7. Take a new rotor and place it in the analysis compartment.
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
9. Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18) :<=2

Chromogenic Linearity Test Level 80

suitable container
Channel Optic Test.
Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading Type: Reagent.
3. Put the content of two PNA vials (4mL), of each level (80, 40 and 20) into a
clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Green adapters, or other suitable
container.
4. Position the reagent vials on the reagent tray as follows:
Rgt position Material Volume
R1 80 µmol/L 4 ml
R2 40 µmol/L 4 ml
R3 20 µmol/L 4 ml
5. Place a new rotor in the analysis compartment.
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
7. Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify that the following results are
obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3

CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) : < = 5
R2 : >= 0.997
Chromogenic Linearity Test Level 160

suitable container.
Channel Optic Test.
Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading Type: Reagent.
3. Put the content of two PNA vials (4 mL), of each level (160, 80 and 40) into a
clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with theirs adapters or other suitable container.
4. Position the reagent vials onto reagent tray according to the following scheme:
Rgt position Material Volume
R1 160 µmol/L 4 ml

R2 80 µmol/L 4 ml
R3 40 µmol/L 4 ml
R4 Distilled Water 4 ml
5. Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vial using the reagent probe.
7. Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify that the following results are
obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) : < = 5
R2 : >= 0.997
NOTE: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading
from the “Loading Type” window.
7.3.3 Light Source (Halogen Lamp) Verification

Materials / tools necessary for the test: Distilled Water
Brand new rotors
Acquisition Adjustment. Wait for motors initialization then the instrument
shows the screen below.

2. Load 200 µl of distilled water inside cuvette number 6 of a new rotor.

3. Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
4. Touch Start then locate RV3 on the Acquisition board (board # 3), see figure
below.
5. Turn RV3 fully clockwise to read as low as possible.

6. Check that in the above condition the value displayed on the screen is in the
range 890 to 4150 mV. If test fails replace the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy and
perform the Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment as described in the
sub-section 7.3.1. If test passes, remove the rotor and then repeat the
Acquisition test and re-adjust RV3 to read 8.7 +/- 0.050 V on the
Chromogenic Channel line.
7. Touch Stop and “√” to exit.
7.4 Liquid Sensors

These two tests are designed to troubleshoot and verify the liquid sensors:
7.4.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume Test
7.4.2 Needle Sensor Test

7.4.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume test

This procedure allows the adjustment of the reference solution sensor circuit that shall
determine the volume of the solution left in the bottle.
1. Prepare a Wash-R Solution bottle with 500 ml of fluid. If a graduated
container is not available then use the marks on the side of the bottle paying
attention to the horizontal position of the bottle.
2. Install the bottle on board and cork it completely with the Reference Emulsion
Sensor.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush
Volume test. The system displays the screen below:
4. Verify that Flush Volume displayed is 500 mL.

5. Adjust if necessary RV9 located on the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #
3), see figure below, to obtain a Flush Volume of 500ml displayed.

6. Fill the Wash-R bottle with 1000ml of solution. Install the bottle on board and
cork it completely with the Reference Emulsion Sensor. On the windows like
menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test. The Flush
Volume displayed should be 1000 ± 20% (800 – 1200 ml).
7. Fill the Wash-R bottle with 100ml of solution. Install the bottle on board and
cork it completely with the Reference Emulsion Sensor. On the windows like
menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test. The Flush
Volume displayed should be 100 ± 30% (70 – 130 ml).
8. Press “√” to exit.
7.4.2 Needles Sensor Test

This test allows functional verification of the circuitry that fulfils the task of liquid
detection through both the sample and reagent probes.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Distilled water
Micropipette 100 – 1000 µl
Clean, empty 4 ml reagent vial.
WARNING: Prior starting procedures execute one or more priming cycles following
the route Diagnostic then Priming. Perform these operations until confident that the
fluidic path is completely filled and without air bubbles.
Verify also that the fluidic lines are smooth and without crimps, etc.
1. On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Needle
Sensor Test.
2. Press Start. The Sample Arm moves across the default test positions (1, 2 and
A1 on the Sample Tray positions then R1, R5 and R7 on the Reagent Tray)
and stops on the waste position. The system displays the screen below:

3. Verify on the current screen that the value presented on the window
“Reference value” is in the range 4.000 - 6.000 V.
NOTE: If it’s out of range then perform the procedure “Wash-Reference
Emulsion Volume Test” to adjust the Flush Volume value at 500 mL. If the
problem persists then replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
4. Prepare and position the suitable containers with distilled water or Wash-R
Solution as for the table below then press Start. The Sample Arm will scan the
positions and system will refresh screen with updated values.
5. Verify that the windows “SENSOR RESULT” display LIQUID. In addition
check that the windows “LIQUID” displays values according to table below.
Adjust RV 11 and RV 12 if necessary and repeat the test as many times as
needed.
Position Container Volume Probe LSLIQ Sensor Trimmer

Result to Adjust
Sample tray 500 µL 150 µL SPL 4.1 V Liquid RV 12
#1 Disposable (± 200 mV)
cup
Reagent tray 4 mL 1.5 mL RGT 4.2 V Liquid RV 11
R1 Reagent vial (± 200 mV)
+ Adapter
6. Locate trimmer position on Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) as per

figure below.

7. Repeat the test with the containers positioned and filled as indicated in the
table below then check the results.
Position Container Volume Probe LSLIQ Sensor
Result
Sample tray #1 500 µL Disposable cup 150 µL SPL 3.9 – 4.3 V Liquid
Sample tray # 2 500 µL Disposable cup 150 µL SPL 2.8 – 3.8 V Liquid
Sample tray A1 500 µL Disposable cup 150 µL SPL 3.4 – 4.4 V Liquid
+ Adapter
Reagent tray R1 4 mL 1.5 mL RGT > 3.5 V Liquid

Reagent vial + Adapter
Reagent tray R5 4 mL 1.5 mL RGT > 3.0 V Liquid
Reagent tray R7 4 mL 1.5 mL SPL > 3.0 V Liquid
NOTE: If the “LIQUID” value is correct but the “Sensor Result” is “Air” the
meaning is that the liquid level in this position is low. This may indicate a
problem with the Sample Arm and/or the Needles Block.
This happens when the Needles have touched the liquid (LIQUID value in
range) but the mechanical stop has blocked the Sample Arm before the
Needles enter 2mm into the liquid for confidence (Sensor Result “Air”).

To solve the problem correct the Sample Arm assembly then repeat this
procedure.
This condition of liquid low level may be present also during the analysis. In
this case perform this test (using the specific test quantity of liquid) to clarify if
the liquid is really insufficient and if the sensor is working properly.
Position Container Volume LSLIQ Sensor Offset

Result
Sample tray # 1 500 µL disposable cup None < 2.4V Air < 300 mV
Sample tray # 2 500 µL disposable cup None < 2.4 V Air < 300 mV
Sample tray A1 500 µL disposable cup None < 2.4 V Air < 300 mV
+ Adapter
Reagent tray R1 4 mL Reagent vial + None < 0.8 V Air < 300 mV
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
8. Verify that all windows “SENSOR RESULT” now display AIR.

9. Check also that on each of the six small windows the value for offset is below
300mV. The offset is a reading taken on the sensor once the Sample Arm
reaches each given position prior to lowering into the liquid (circuit autozero).
NOTE: If the Offset is too high (over 700 mV) we have Sensor Fail. To solve
Offset problem it’s advisable to check for liquid on the Needles, dirt and/or
insulating lost in the Needles Block.
10. Press “X” to exit.
7.5 Optic Sensor Test

Specific optical sensors are located in the Autosampler with the purpose to detect the
presence of cups, primary tubes and auxiliary materials on the Sample Tray.
Other optical sensors are located in the R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) with the
purpose to detect for rotor presence. The sensors check for rotors present at different
locations along the route followed by the rotors during normal operations.
Following are the specific sub-sections for optical sensors location.
7.5.1 Rotor Stack
7.5.2 Rotor Waste Container

7.5.3 Autosampler Housing
7.5.1 Rotor Stack

The Rotor Stack is actually equipped with two optical sensors that have the purpose of
detecting the presence of:
• Lowest rotor in the Rotor Stack.
• Rotor on the Rotor Transport ready to be displaced on the Rotor Holder.
The two sensors are identified in the system as follows.
• Rotor Stack (Storage)
• Rotor Transport (Slider)
Rotor Stack (Storage)
1. Empty the rotor feed stack from any rotor.

2. Locate inside the Rotor Stack the window of the “Optical Sensor Rotor Stack
Upper”. The sensor is located just above the mechanism that holds the stack of
rotors when loaded.
3. Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent
mechanical jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
4. Access the Service menu then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and
Optic Sensor Test. The instrument will initialize motors then the screen
below is presented.
5. Manually load one new rotor and leave it seated at the lower position of the
Rotor Stack lined up to the Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper.

6. Check that the voltage being displayed with the rotor in place is 5.00 V (higher
than 5 Vdc on the DVM). Last check that the flag on the screen shall indicate
the presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V adjust,
proceeding as follows.
7. Locate in the system Card Housing the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
8. Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP1 (signal) as shown in the figure
below.
9. Adjust PT1 until the DVM reads ≥8.000 Vdc.

10. Manually remove the rotor and observe voltage value reported on the screen to
drop to ≤1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall also
disappear. In case the value read is higher than 1.00 V check for sensor
position and cleanness.
11. Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being
moved in and out.
Rotor Transport (Slider)
1. Empty the Rotor Stack.

2. Locate the “Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower” at the bottom of the Rotor
Stack lined up with the Rotor Transport.
3. Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent
mechanical jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
4. Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.

5. Access the Service software then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and
Optic Sensor Test. The screen shown below is presented.
6. Check that the voltage being displayed, with the rotor in place is 5.00 V
(higher than 5 Vdc on the DVM). In the meanwhile a flag on the screen shall
indicate the presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V
adjust, proceeding as follows.
8. Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP2 (signal) as shown in figure
below.
9. Adjust PT2 until the DVM reads ≥8.000 Vdc.

10. Manually remove the rotor and observe the voltage value reported on the
screen to drop to ≤1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall
also disappear. In case the reading remains above 1.00 V then check for sensor
position and cleanliness.
11. Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being
moved in and out.
7.5.2 Rotor Waste Container

The Rotor Waste container can accommodate up to eleven used rotors (240 tests).
Following are the two conditions detected by the “Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full”:
• Rotor Waste container available (until ten rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
• Rotor Waste container full (when eleven rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
The system provides appropriate warning messages to the User any time that the full
condition is met.
1. Access the Service environment, then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test
and Optic Sensor Test. The instrument will initialize the motors then the
screen shown below is presented.
2. Gain access to the Rotor Waste compartment by lowering the door in bottom
front of the instrument (this test needs to be performed with the Front Cover
and the Lower Support Plate assembled).
3. Remove the Rotor Waste Container from its housing.
4. Fill the waste rotor bag with ten rotors.

5. Place the Rotor Waste Container back into its compartment.

6. Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed is ≥4.00V. Should
above reading be out of the specified range then adjust, proceeding as follows.
8. Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP3 (signal), as shown in figure
below.
9. Turn PT3 until the DVM reads ≥4.00 Vdc with ten rotors in the waste
container.
10. Manually insert another rotor in the pile. Now 11 rotors are the waste
container.
11. The System shall detect the “Rotor Waste full” condition and flag it on the
screen as appropriate.
12. Check that the voltage being displayed, with the 11 rotors in place is 5.00 V on
the screen (≥8.00Vdc on the DVM).
13. Manually remove two rotors from the pile and leave 9 rotors in the waste
container.
14. Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed drops to ≤1.00V.
Accept any value below 1.00 V, the flag that indicates the presence of the rotor
shall also disappear. In case reading remains above 1.000 V check for sensor
position and cleanness.
15. Manually move the rotors in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as the rotors are being
moved in and out.
If any of the above voltages cannot be obtained adjust the position of the optical
sensors and repeat the procedure.

7.5.3 Autosampler Housing

The Autosampler Housing is equipped with two optical sensors used to detect the
presence on the Sample Tray of primary tubes, cups, reagents or calibrator vials. It’s
also equipped with the internal Barcode Assy, used to read the “Patient ID” labels
present on the primary tubes. The two following procedures are required to completely
Check out & Adjust the Autosampler Housing sensors.
• Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment.
• Autosampler / BCR Test.
Autosampler Sensors Check Out & Adjustment
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust the sensitivity of the optical sensors
located on the Sample Tray compartment, which detect the presence of cups / primary
tubes or other containers.
The positions on the Sample Tray covered by each sensor are as follows.
Position Name on LCD screen Function

Located on the external Cups (1st and 2nd ring) Checks for presence on the outer
wall of the sample tray (1st) and mid (2nd) rings for cups
housing or tubes on the Sample Tray.
Located below the Cups (3rd ring) Checks for presence of any
Sample Tray grey Flange container on the innermost (3rd)
Adjustable. ring on the Sample Tray.
NOTE: Prior to performing this procedure verify that the Autosampler Movement
Assy with its grey Flange Adjustable is properly aligned (see sub-section 7.6.5 and
7.7.1).
1. Take a Sample Tray with all the positions free and place:
• In position 33 (1st , outer ring) a new 2 mL cup
• In position 34 (2nd , middle ring) a new 2 mL cup
• In aux. ring position A9 (3rd, innermost ring) a 4ml bottle with label
and adaptor
NOTE: Make sure that the cups are new and free from any scratches.
2. Access the Service environment, place the prepared Sample Tray in its
compartment then enter Service, Sensor Test and Optical Sensor test. The
system displays the screen below:

3. On the window SELECT RING TO TEST, set the appropriate ring.

NOTE: Adjust the 2nd ring first because the adjustment made on the trimmer RV6
will affect the voltage reading on the 1st ring. The Acquisition & Sensors Board,
through RV6 sets the maximum current in the Outer Sensor, which is used for both
the rings, and RV10 sets the gain of the reading circuit for the 1st ring.
4. With the 2nd ring selected from the onscreen menu verify that a new 2 mL cup
is placed into the autosampler at position 34.
5. Manually move the autosampler tray to place position 34 in front of the sensor.
Keep moving (in either direction) until the highest voltage reading is found on
the LCD for the 2nd ring.
6. When at the highest voltage, adjust RV6 (bd. #3) in order to obtain the
minimum voltage required on the screen to cause cup detection (check mark
icon (√) on LCD screen turns on). Typically this will be below 3 volts.
7. Rotate cup in position 34 to check for any positions that cause loss of detection
(check mark icon (√) turns off on screen) when the cup is not moving (check
mark may momentarily turn off while cup is rotating so detection should be
checked when operator stops rotating cup).
8. At any position where detection is lost, adjust RV6 up until cup is detected
again.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until rotating the cup to any new positions does not result
in loss of detection when cup is sitting still (while rotating the check mark icon
(√) may momentarily blink off, but will stay on when the cup stops rotating).
10. Check the voltage displayed on the screen and then adjust RV6 so that this
voltage is increased another +0.2 volts. For example, if the value on the screen
is 2.16V, then adjust RV6 to get 2.36V (2.16V + 0.2V).

NOTE: Operator may round up to the nearest tenth volt and ignore the second
decimal place. Using the example above, if the screen shows 2.16V, add +0.2V
(2.36V) and round up (2.4V) and adjust RV6 until screen shows 2.4x volts where "x"
can be any number.
11. Remove the cup and check that the displayed voltage on screen is less than 1V
and the check mark icon (√) turns off.
12. On the LCD screen select the 1st ring and place a 2ml cup into the
Autosampler at position 33.
13. Manually move the autosampler tray to place position 33 in front of the sensor.
Keep moving (in either direction) until the highest voltage reading is found on
the LCD for the 1st ring. Verify that the voltage is >3.0V. If not, adjust RV10
(bd #3) to obtain a voltage reading >3.0V.
NOTE: If the voltage is too high, such as 10.0V trim it down with RV10.
14. Remove the cup and check that the displayed voltage on screen is less than 1V
and the check mark icon (√) turns off.
Sample tray ring Sample tray pos. Container Value Adjust

2nd – middle ring Position 34 Cup 2 mL Refer to RV 6
procedure
no-scratches
1st – outer ring Position 33 Cup 2 mL > 3.00 V RV 10
no-scratches

Sample tray ring Sample tray pos. Container Value

2nd – middle ring Position 34 No container < 1.00 V
1st – outer ring Position 33 No container < 1.00 V
15. Insert a 4mL bottle adaptor into AUX position A9. Place a 4ml bottle with a
label into the adaptor making sure that the glass is facing the adaptor handle
and the label is facing away from the handle.
16. Observe the status line for the Inner Ring. Turn RV7 on the Acquisition &
Sensors Bd, (bd #3) to the maximum value. Manually rotate the autosampler
around the internal ring sensor position and look for the maximum obtainable
value. This has to be ≥ 6V.
NOTE: If obtaining ≥ 6V is not possible, remove the autosampler tray and
flange. Use sensor alignment tool to check the position of the internal ring
sensor. Place the alignment tool over the Autosampler hub and sensor. The
front of the sensor should be against the tool. If not, loosen the sensor and
adjust the sensor so it is touching the tool. Install the Adaptor Plate on top of
the sensor). Tighten the sensor. Repeat steps 10 and 11.
NOTE: If sensor alignment tool is not available loosen the sensor and adjust
the sensor out toward the front of the unit. Adjust sensor so the tip of the
sensor is flush with the white sample area inner wall. The tip of the sensor
should not protrude out from the hole beyond the white wall.
If the positioning of the internal ring sensor (sensor touching the tool), seems
to be fine, install a spacer, underneath the sensor. Install the Adaptor Plate on
top of the sensor (see diagram). Recheck sensor alignment. Repeat steps 10
and 11.
17. Insert a 4ml bottle with a label filled with DI water into the adaptor in position
A9. Manually move the sample tray around the sensor to get the maximum
voltage displayed on the 3rd ring status line.
18. Adjust RV7 on the Acquisition & Sensor Bd, (bd #3), for an output value on
the LCD between 3.2 to 3.5V.
19. Remove the bottle and verify that the output value is < 2.2V. (See note below).
20. Remove the empty 2mL adaptor and observe that the output value is < 2.2V.
(See note below).
NOTE: If obtaining < 2.2V is not possible, remove the autosampler and
flange. Use sensor alignment tool to check the position of the internal sensor.
The front of the sensor should be against the tool. If the positioning seems to
be fine, install spacer underneath the sensor and repeat steps 10 - 15.
A maximum of two spacers are allowed underneath the sensor. If there are still
problems, replace the sensor

21. Place an empty 2mL cup into the adaptor and observe that the output value is ≥
3.6V.
Sample tray ring Sample tray pos. Container Value

rd
3 – inner ring Position A9 4ml adaptor < 2.2 V
with no bottle
3rd – inner ring Position A9 No adaptor, no < 2.2 V
bottle
To thoroughly assess the proper functioning of sensors through all available positions
of the Sample Tray, it is advisable to perform the “Autosampler / BCR test”. This is
the next test described in this sub-section.
Autosampler / BCR test
The Autosampler / BCR (Bar Code Reader) test is designed to verify the proper
reading of Autosampler Optical Sensors and BCR under dynamic conditions.
These conditions replicate the real use during the analysis cycles. Specific Offset can
be entered to trigger an early/late reading on the optical sensors. This will compensate
for some mechanical play that may produce a small shift of the Sample Tray during
rotation.
1. On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The
system shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.

2. Prepare a Sample Tray with all the even positions (2nd, middle ring) loaded
with new empty 2 mL cups. Make sure that the cups are new, free from any
scratches. Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
3. Touch key START WITHOUT BCR. The system will perform a complete
turn of the Autosampler reporting on the screen cups presence (1 present; 0 not
present) and position.
NOTE: There are 3 other columns in the result area of the screen. The first is
the “Offset” column. The second is the “ADC Value” column, read on each
position during the test. The last is the “Bar Code Values” column where is
reported the value read by the BCR on the Patient ID Barcode Label. This
column is compiled only when the test starting by touching the button “START
WITH BCR”.
4. Assess that all the even positions on the screen report “1” for presence.
5. If any positions fail then check that the relevant cup is in good condition,
replace the cup and repeat test. Checks also in the “ADC Value” column that
the highest value read for this position is close to the set point of the sensor
(see the test “Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment” described above
in this sub-section).
6. If the problem persist then enter on the window CENTRAL RING OFFSET
a new value close to zero (the value suggested are –5 to +5) and repeat the test
a few times until confident that the proper value is found.
Once achieved, unload cups from mid ring, place them on outer ring and perform this
test for the outer ring. Set OUTER RING OFFSET if necessary and enter an offset
value close to zero (the value suggested are –5 to +5) and repeat the test a few times
until confident that the proper offset value is found. Also, install bottles without labels
on the Auxiliary Ring (inner ring) and perform the test again.

Set INNER RING OFFSET if necessary and enter an offset value close to zero (the
value suggested are –5 to +5) and repeat the test a few times until confident that the
proper offset value is found.
Test functionality of the internal Bar Code Reader performing the following
procedure. Make sure internal BCR is enabled and appropriate symbologies selected.
1. On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The
system shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.
2. Prepare a Sample Tray with primary tubes equipped with Bar Code Labels.
Place tubes in both the middle and outer rings. (It is not necessary to place
tubes in every position, but make sure tubes are in both the middle and outer
ring). Make sure that the labels are valid, in good condition (see also Appendix
B Bar Code Label specification) and positioned toward the Bar Code Reader.
3. Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
4. Touch key START WITH BCR. The system will perform a complete turn of
the Autosampler reporting on the “Bar Code Values” column the value read by
the BCR on the Patient ID Barcode Label.
5. Confirm that all positions containing tubes indicate a “1” for presence.
6. If any position fails check that the relevant primary tube label is in good
condition, replace the primary tube and repeat the test. If any position
continues to fail repeat the Autosampler Sensor Adjustment procedure and cup
Offset Procedure.
7. Confirm that the barcode value read matches the barcode label and that the bar
code value is displayed in the correct tray position.
8. If the barcode values are not in the correct tray positions, then enter on the
window BCR OFFSET a new value and repeat the test (move the Offset value
+ or – 1 at any repetition). Repeat several times until confident that the BCR
reads correctly all primary tube labels.

NOTE: The value reported in the “Offset” column is approximately the cup presence
Optic Sensors output.
7.6 Motor Adjust

This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow stepping
motors phase adjustments and/or check out of the Optical Sensors (Dual/Single
Channel Optical Switch) functionality.
Following are the stepper motors check out procedures:
7.6.1 Rotor Motor
7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor
7.6.3 Sample Arm Horizontal Motor
7.6.4 Sample Arm Vertical Motor
7.6.5 Autosampler Motor
7.6.6 Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motors
7.6.7 Transport (Slider) Motor (ACL ElitePro only)
7.6.8 Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor (ACL ElitePro only)
7.6.9 Rotor Arm Vertical Motor (ACL ElitePro only)
Operator interface for each motor adjustment screen is very similar. Some exceptions
exist for the Rotor Holder Cover Motor. The functionality of the commands available
and the most common dynamic labels are described in the following sub- section.
Most common commands
The following section provides a description of the commands whose functionality is
replicated in each of the motor adjust screens.
Rotation C.W. Arrow/Rotation C.C.W. Arrow
Allows the clockwise/counterclockwise stepping of the motor. The number of steps
executed for each command is in accordance with the current STEP INCREMENT
value present in the windows.
Next C.W. Position / Next C.C.W. Position
Steps the motor to the next “meaningful position” in the clockwise/counterclockwise
direction that can be reached from the current motor position. At each touch the
system will update values on the following labels on the screen:
PRESENT PHASE
COVER SENSOR
HOME SENSOR
POSITION SENSOR
STEP DONE
The following “meaningful positions” can be achieved:

Motor Meaningful position

Rotor Motor 20 Rotor cuvette positions (Home Position is with cuvette #20
in front of the Optical Fiber).
Rotor Holder Cover 3 Positions:
• Closed.
• Intermediate. Utilized only for automatic rotor
exchange.
• Opened (Home Position).
Sample Arm Motor 13 Positions: (17 for ACL ElitePro):
Horizontal • Over the Sample Tray (Elite Home Position is over A1)
• Over the Peltier reagent tray. (R1-R4)
• 1 Over the waste/wash reservoir.
• 4 Over the room temperature reagent tray. (R5-R8)
• 1 Over the Rotor Holder position.
• 4 Over the 2nd Peltier reagent tray. (R9-R12) (ElitePro
only) (ElitePro Home Position is over R12)
Sample Arm Motor 3 Positions:
Vertical • Rotation (Home Position).
• Reagent picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery.
• Sample picking.
Autosampler Motor 20 Positions (Home Position is with A1 in the direction of the
Sample Arm. Access to 50 positions is achieved through the
outer, middle and inner ring.
Dilutor Motors 2 Positions:
• Fully upward (Home Position).
• Fully downward.
Slider Motor 2 Positions:
(Transport Motor) • Under the Rotor Stack (Home Position).
• Rotor Arm picking.
Rotor Arm Horizontal 2 Positions:
• On the Rotor waste / picking (Home Position).
• On the Rotor Holder.

Motor Meaningful position

Rotor Arm Vertical 2 Positions:
• Up for Rotation (Home Position).
• Down for Rotor picking/delivery.
Home position
Brings the stepper motor to the Encoder Home Position.
Motor Off
De-energizes the motor. The motor status reported on the relevant window “MOTOR
STATUS” changes from “Energized” to “De-energized”.
Store phase / Store step
This command allows saving of a “new” stepper motor phase (or step) that best fits
the Optical Sensor with the “optical window” on the encoder.
CAUTION!
Operating within the Service environment no verifications are made concerning
illegal operations (e.g. conflicts with other modules), safe movements have to be
verified prior to activating any key.
Most common dynamic labels
Listed are descriptions of the dynamic labels that are available inside each of the
Motors Adjustment screens.
Motor Label Name Range Meaning

All Present phase 0 - 15 Shows the motor phase currently in
use.
Stored phase 0 - 15 Shows the motor phase stored at
Home Position.
All Motor status Energized / De- Energized: Stepping motor windings
energized powered (motor tensioned).
De-energized: Stepping motor
windings not powered (motor de-
tensioned).
All Cover sensor On / Off Indicates status of the magnetic
sensor that detects the Rotor Cover
position.

Motor Label Name Range Meaning

All Home sensor On / Off Indicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the home position of the
current motor.
Position sensor On / Off Indicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the position of the current
motor (e.g. 20 cuvettes position on
the rotor holder).
All Steps Done xxxx Number of steps performed when the
motor is being operated in the service
program. The steps increment (or
decrement) from the Home Position
(considered step 0)
7.6.1 Rotor motor

This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible to use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1 Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor Motor.
The system displays the screen below.
3 On the tool bar touch the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise the
cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor Cover).

4 Home the Rotor Motor by touching the Home Position button on the screen. The
system moves to the Home Position the Rotor Motor. The Rotor Holder cuvette
#20 is in front of the Coagulimetric Channel Optic Fibre.
5 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both ON.
6 With the Step Increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow) button
on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
actual condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until both the status changes from light to
dark then reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical
sensors becomes dark again after the light window.
8 It is now possible to determine the width of the optical window (notch on the
encoder disk).
9 Pressing on the cw (or ccw) arrow keys move to the middle of the window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
10 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Rotor Motor is centered on the encoder and the test is
over. Press “√” to exit.
11 Or, press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the STORE PHASE key
indicates an illegal condition of the Rotor Motor phase exist. Touch the cw (or
ccw) arrow key to restore a legal motor phase condition.
12 Visually inspect the Rotor Holder and confirm that the middle of the cuvette
position #20 is in front of the coagulation optic fibre.
13 If yes and if the present and stored phase are still in disagreement, touch STORE
PHASE.
14 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor

This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if necessary), the alignment of the
Rotor Cover Encoder Disk and the Optical Sensor. It is also possible to use it to verify
the functionality of the stepper motor and the optical sensor. The encoder disk
identifies three rotor cover positions which are closed, intermediate and home (fully
open).
2 If the Rotor Cover Movement Assy was replaced or in any case removed and
then assembled, verify that when the Cover is closed the Encoder is in the
position indicated in the following drawing (the top edge of the encoder disk
should be approximately 1mm above the top edge of the dual channel optical
sensor). If the Encoder is not in the correct position then adjust it by loosening
the two setscrews that fix the Encoder to the motor shaft and adjust the
encoder up or down as necessary. Tighten the encoder set screws after
adjustment.

NOTE: On a properly adjusted encoder the upper side of the encoder has to be about
1 mm above the upper side of the Dual Channel Optical Switch Sensor when the
Rotor Holder Cover is in the closed position. If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder
Centering Tool.
Encoder Disk
Top edge of encoder disk is

Encoder Disk
approximately 1mm above top
Closed position
of optical sensor
Intermediate position
Fully open position
Dual Channel
Optical Sensor
Rotor Cover Encoders:
NOTE: The Elite Pro encoder is larger than the Elite's.
Positions of importance for the Rotor Cover:

ELITE ELITE PRO
Open: 36 Open: 51
Intermediate: 0 Intermediate: 0
Closed: 100 Closed: 100
Mechanical Stops: Mechanical Stops:
10-25 Minus (-) signs 2-5 Minus (-) signs

3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor
Holder Cover. The system displays the LCD screen below.
4 The Rotor Holder Cover sets to its intermediate position (automatic loading
position).
5 Touch the HOME POSITION key, and the Cover Motor opens the cover
until the –36 Step (ACL Elite) or –51 Step (ACL ElitePro) is reached. Cover
is fully open.
6 The Home and the Position Sensors are ON.
7 Touch the STEP UP ARROW key and verify that the Home and the Position
Sensors go to OFF (indicated by minus (--) signs on the relevant status bar) at
least 2 to a maximum of 5 steps before the cover hits the mechanical stop.
NOTE: ACL Elite specification is 10 to a maximum of 25 minus (-) signs.
| = Rotor cover has reached mechanical stop
Home |--+++++ Pass

Position | - + + + + + +
Home |-----+++ Pass

Position | - - - - + + + +
Home | - + + + + + + Fail (encoder requires adjustment)

Position | + + + + + + +
Home | - - - - - - - ++ Fail (encoder requires adjustment)

Position | - - - - - - + + +
NOTE: If there are too many minus signs (greater than 5) loosen the setscrews and
rotate the encoder downward. If there are too few minus signs (less than 2) loosen the
setscrews and rotate the encoder upward. Repeat steps 3 thru 7 above.

8 Touch the HOME POSITION key and then the NEXT CW POSITION key.
Step count should be 0.
9 Press NEXT CW POSITION key. The cover should close to form a hermetic
seal against the fluidic plate. Touch the STEP UP or STEP DOWN key as
necessary to insure a hermetic seal of the cover and fluidic plate.
10 Once closed verify that the position sensor is ON (+ on the relevant status bar).
It is not necessary to set in the middle of the optical window.
11 Touch the STORE STEP key, the system will update the value.
12 Touch once the NEXT CCW POSITION to raise the cover back to the
intermediate position.
13 Once the intermediate position is reached verify that the dynamic label STEP
DONE sets to a value of 0. The dynamic labels of cover, home and position
sensor should be set as specified (see table below).
Cover Cover Home Position Step Done Step Done

Position Sensor Sensor Sensor ACL Elite ACL
Status Status Status ElitePro
Fully Open OFF ON ON -36 -51
Intermediate OFF ON OFF 0 0
Closed ON OFF ON Stored Stored
Steps Steps
14 Touch any time the NEXT CCW POSITION and the NEXT CW
POSITION until confident that the adjustment is acceptable.
15 Touch “√” to return at the Service main menu screen.
7.6.3 Sample Arm Horizontal Motor

reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample
Arm Motors and Horiz. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen
below.

3 Manually Raise the Sample Arm to the rotation height.

4 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample
Arm Horizontal Motor to place the Sample Arm over the Autosampler housing
(position A1 on the Sample Tray).
5 Verify that both the “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are ON.
6 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow)
button on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors
show the condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark,
then reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical
encoder disk).
9 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the position in the middle of the
window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
10 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels.
If phases are equal then the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the
encoder and the test is over. Press “√” to exit.
11 If not press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the STORE PHASE
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch cw
(or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition, then touch STORE
PHASE.

7.6.4 Sample Arm Vertical Motor

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample
Arm Motors and Vert. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen
below.
3 Manually move the Sample Arm over the waste/wash position.

4 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample
Arm Vertical Motor to the rotation position height.
5 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR”
are both in ON condition.
6 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample Arm to the
Reagent picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery position.
are respectively in OFF and ON conditions.
8 Touch once the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample Arm to the
Sample picking position.
are respectively in ON and OFF condition.
NOTE: The Sample Arm Vertical Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.

7.6.4.a Vertical Sample Arm Step Position Adjustment Procedure
Sample Tray Area
1 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.

2 Press the Home Position key.
3 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
4 Press the Home Position key and then insert 4ml bottle and adapter in A1.
5 If the instrument is an ACL ElitePro Press Next CCW Position key until the
arm is over A1. Press “√” then, NO to de-energize motor prompt, to exit.
6 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
7 Select Sample Tray from menu under Horizontal Arm Logical Area on
screen.
8 Press the Home Position key. Then press the Next Down Position key twice.
9 Increment the sample arm downwards by pressing the down arrow icon until
the needle hits the bottom of the glass bottle or the “Step Done” box displays a
value not greater than 991 steps.
10 Press the up arrow icon 5 to 7 times to raise the probe away from the glass
bottom or to obtain a “Step Done” value of 991 or less.
11 Press Store Position key.
NOTE: The maximum “Step Done” value that can be stored is 991. If a value greater
than 991 is attempted to be stored, the error message “Invalid Input” is displayed.
12 Press “√” then YES to exit.
Reagent Area R1-R4
1. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.

2. Press the Home Position key.

3. Insert 4ml bottle and adapter in positions R1 and R4.
4. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
5. Press the Home Position key
6. Press the Next CCW Position key until the arm is over R1 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
8. Select R1-R4 from the menu under Horizontal Arm Logical Area on the
screen.
9. Press the Home Position key. Then press the Next Down Position key
once.
10. Increment downwards by pressing the down arrow icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
11. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the up arrow icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the up arrow icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
12. Make a note of the value displayed in the “Step Done” box.
13. Press “√” then YES to exit.
15. Press the Home Position key
18. Press the Next CCW Position key until the arm is over R4 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
screen.
21. Press the Home Position key. Then press the Next Down Position key
once.
22. Increment downwards by pressing the down arrow icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
23. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the the up arrow icon to
raise the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the up arrow icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.

24. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the
same as the value noted for the R1 position press the Store Position button
on the screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the R4
position than the R1 position press the up arrow icon until the R4 value
equals the R1 value and press the Store Position button on the screen. If
the value in the “Step Done” box is lower for R4 position than the value
for the R1 position press the Store Position button on the screen.
NOTE: If plus signs are not present in the “position sensor” row when
attempting to store position, continue to press “up arrow” key until at least 3
plus signs appear then store position.
Reagent Area R5-R8

6. Press the Next CCW Position key until the arm is over R5 position. Press “√”
then NO to exit.
screen.
9. Press the Home Position key. Then press the Next Down Position key once.
10. Increment downwards by pressing the down arrow icon until the needle hits
the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line.
11. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the up arrow icon to raise the
probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the position
sensor display line, press the up arrow icon to display at least 3 +++ signs on
14. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor
15. Press Home Position key.
17. Press Home Position key.
then NO to exit.


screen.
24. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the same
as the value noted for the R5 position press the Store Position button on the
screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the R8 position than
the R5 position press the “up arrow” icon until the R8 value equals the R5
value and press the Store Position button on the screen. If the value in the
“Step Done” box is lower for R8 position than the value for the R5 position
press the Store Position button on the screen.
attempting to store position, continue to press the up arrow key until at least 3
Reagent Area R9-R12 (ACL ElitePro only)

then NO to exit.
screen.

then NO to exit.
screen.
24. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the same
as the value noted for the R9 position press the Store Position button on the
screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the R12 position than
the R9 position press the up arrow icon until the R12 value equals the R9
value and press the Store Position button on the screen. If the value in the
“Step Done” box is lower for R12 position than the value for the R9 position
press the Store Position button on the screen.
attempting to store position, continue to press the up arrow key until at least 3
7.6.5 Autosampler Motor


2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then
Autosampler Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Autosampler motor until the Home Position is achieved.
5 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on
the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
6 Continue to press cw (or ccw) until status changes from light to dark, then
reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of the optical
encoder disk).
8 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
If phases are equal then the Autosampler Motor is centered on the encoder and
the test is over. Press “√” to exit.
10 If not press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the “STORE
PHASE” key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist.
Touch once cw (or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and
then touch STORE PHASE.

NOTE: Check the Autosampler Movement Assembly “Backlash” (lag between the
belt, pulley and motor). Check the backlash as follows:
1. From the windows like menu, enter Service, then select Motors Adjust,
Autosampler.
2. Touch the Home button on the screen to Home the Autosampler.
3. Press the cw or ccw arrow buttons until the “Home Position” sensor status
changes from “+” light, to “-“ dark.
4. While observing the status of the Home Sensor press the opposite direction
arrow and continue pressing the arrow until the Home Sensor status changes
from “-“ dark to “+” light.
There should be 5 or less minus signs “-“ prior to the status changing for the
Home Sensor. If there is greater than 5 minus signs the autosampler has
excessive play between the belt, pulley and motor and the autosampler should
be replaced.
- - - - + + + + acceptable backlash - - - - - - + + + + Unacceptable backlash
7.6.6 Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motor

1 Turn the Instriment On. Then access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Dilutor
Motors and Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motor. The system displays the
screen below.

3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motor fully upward.
4 Verify that the dynamic labels that the “HOME SENSOR” is in ON condition.
5 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample/Reagent Dilutor
Motor to the full down position.
6 Verify that the dynamic labels that the “HOME SENSOR” is in OFF
condition.
NOTE: The Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motors don’t require phases to be stored.
7.6.7 Transport (Slider) Motor (ACL ElitePro only)

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider
Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Rotor
Transport (slider) under the Rotor Stack.
are both in the ON condition.
5 Touch the NEXT CCW POSITION to move the Rotor Transport (slider) to
the left (rotor picking position).

are respectively in OFF and ON condition.
NOTE: The Transport (Slider) Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.
7.6.8 Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor (ACL ElitePro only)

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Horiz. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Manually raise the Rotor Arm to the rotation height.

4 Touch on the tool bar the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise
the cover (the icon acts as toggles switch to raise/lower the cover).
5 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. System moves the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor over the rotor picking/waste position.
7 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on
the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the

8 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark
(use for reference only the home sensor windows), then reverse motion by
touching the opposite key until the status of the optical sensor becomes dark
again after the light window.
It is now possible to determine the width of the home sensor optical window
(notch on the encoder disk).
9 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
If phases are equal then the Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the
encoder and the test is over. Press “√” to exit.
11 If not press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the “STORE PHASE”
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch the
cw (or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and then touch
STORE PHASE.
7.6.9 Rotor Arm Vertical Motor (ACL ElitePro only)

1 Turn the Instument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
Motors and Vert. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.

3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system raises the Rotor
Arm to the rotation height.
are respectively in OFF and ON condition.
5 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the rotor arm to the bottom
position.
NOTE: The Rotor Arm Vertical Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.
7.7 Module Positioning

This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow matching of
the major system modules. Following are the relevant assembly sub-sections covered
in this section:
7.7.1 Sample Arm Assy
7.7.2 Autosampler Assy
7.7.3 Rotor Holder Assy
7.7.4 Needles Block Assy
7.7.5 Rotor Stack Assy (ACL ElitePro Only)
7.7.6 Rotor Arm Assy (ACL ElitePro Only)
7.7.7 REM (Rotor Exchange Module) Centering (ACL ElitePro Only)
7.7.8 Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment (ACL ElitePro Only)
7.7.9 REM (Rotor Exchange Module) Self Test (ACL ElitePro Only)
The Module Positioning Tests options are available under the service programs main
menu. On the windows like menu, the sequence Service - Module Positioning Test
gives access to the following operational tests:
• ST – SA – RH Test
• RA – SL Test
• RA – RH Test
• RA – SL – RH Test
To perform a complete alignment of all the modules in the instrument the following
sequence must be followed. Note that the Sample Arm is the “Reference Point.” The
sample arm drive assy vertical shaft must be centered in the fluidic plate opening and
the arm must be aligned to the rinse/waste reservoir prior to performing any other
alignments. All other alignments are referenced to the Sample Arm. Also, verify that
all motor phase settings are correct prior to performing module alignments. The
module alignment sequence is:

• Sample Arm
• Autosampler
• Rotor Module
• REM
NOTE: Sample Arm vertical shaft must be centered in the fluidic plate prior to
performing any further alignments. Use alignment tool to center shaft to fluidic plate.
All above modules have to properly match to each other to insure proper picking and
delivery of samples and reagents as well as rotors for the analysis. Should any module
loose its pre-set position (e.g. due to the fact it was dismantled and re-fitted for service
purposes) it must be re-adjusted. The following table provides a summary of tests to
be done based upon the module that was replaced/adjusted, to restore the proper
working conditions.
Module replaced Mechanical Adjustment / Verification Refer to

reference to Test section
point/assembly
Sample Arm assy Needles ST – SA – RH Test 7.7.1
Wash/Waste Pot
Autosampler Assy Sample Arm ST – SA – RH Test 7.7.2
Rotor Holder assy Sample Arm ST – SA – RH Test 7.7.3
Needles Block Rotor Holder Needles Position 7.7.4
Assy
Rotor Stack Assy Rotor Transport RA – SL – RH Test 7.7.5
Rotor Arm assy Rotor Transport RA – SL Test 7.7.6
R.E.M. (Rotor Rotor Holder Snap RA – RH Test 7.7.7
Exchange Module)
centring
Rotor Tilt Adjust. Fluidic Plate RA – RH Test 7.7.8
R.E.M. Self Test RA – SL – RH Test 7.7.9
7.7.1 Sample Arm Assy

The Sample Arm must be aligned with respect to the needles Wash/Waste Pot and
represents the mechanical reference to the other major assemblies. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior to starting any position
adjustment on other modules.
In case the Sample Arm module was adjusted/replaced the following procedure needs
to be completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.

Materials / tools necessary for the test: Needles Waste Centring Tool
Sample Arm centring tool
Needles Position Tool
1 Position the Sample Arm module in place from the bottom of the system and
secure it by using the 3 black column screws but without tightening
completely.
2 Re-connect cables as required.
3 Insert the Sample Arm Centering Tool on the shaft of the Sample Arm
Movement assy, between the shaft and the Fluidic Plate hole.
4 Tighten the 3 black column screws making sure that the Sample Arm
Movement shaft is in the middle of the Fluidic Plate hole.
5 Remove the Sample Arm Centering Tool.
6 Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides and
fold back the two stands and then lower the instrument on the bench.
7 Replace the needles Wash/Waste Pot adapter with the Needles Waste Centring
Tool.
8 Turn On the Instrument then access at the Service program main menu.
9 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning test and
(ST – SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs motors initialization
and displays the screen below.
10 Put the Sample Arm on the Sample Arm Movement shaft (at the bottom) using
caution not to lose the current shaft position.
11 Manually move the Sample Arm (with the needle block assembled) over the
needles Waste/Rinse Reservoir.

12 Lower the Sample Arm Movement shaft to allow the Needles Block to enter
the Waste Centering tool.
13 Adjust the Sample Arm (rotational and horizontal adjustment) to match the 2
needles with the 2 reference points on the Waste Centering tool.
NOTE: Use the 2 screws located on the top of the aluminium support to set the depth
of the Needles Block assy (if required).
14 Tighten the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support that holds
the Sample Arm in place. Tighten the 2 allen head screws that secure the
horizontal movement of the arm.
15 Place the Needles Position Centring Tool on the Rotor Holder.
16 Raise the Sample Arm Movement assy. Touch the NEXT POSITION key.
The Sample Arm moves over the Rotor Holder and lowers to dispensing
position.
17 Adjust the Needles Block height by setting the needles tip on the 2 white
points of the Needles Centring tool surface.
NOTE: Loosen and secure the Needles Block by using the white knob located on the
rear of the Sample Arm. If during this check out it is necessary to move the Rotor
Holder module position then perform the R.E.M. module positioning as described in
the section 7.7.7.
18 Remove the Wash Centering tool from the Wash/Waste Pot and install the
Waste/Rinse Reservoir.
19 Raise the Sample Arm Movement assy. Touch the NEXT POSITION key the
Sample Arm moves over the Autosampler to position #1of the Sample Tray.
20 Remove the Needles Position Tool from the Rotor Holder.
21 Touch the NEXT POSITION key. The Sample Arm raises, moves over the
Rinse Waste Pot and lowers on the Rinse Waste Reservoir.
22 Visually inspect that needless are centered with respect to the Rinse Waste
Reservoir.
23 Touch the STOP icon and then Ok to return at the Service main menu.
NOTE: Before resume normal operation it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor
Test as detailed in section 7.4.1.
7.7.2 Autosampler Assy

The Autosampler must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior to starting any position
If the Autosampler module was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: 0.5 mL disposable sample cups or
primary tubes

1 Position the Autosampler assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure
it by using the 4 black column screws but without tightening completely.
2 Re-connect cables as required.
3 Tighten the 4 black column screws making sure that the Autosampler shaft is
in the middle of the fluidic plate hole.
4 Install the inner ring optical sensor and lock it in place.
5 Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides folding
back the two stands and then lower the instrument on the bench.
6 Put the grey Flange Adjustable in place on the top of the Autosampler
movement. Secure it by the 2 screws but not completely tightened (it shall still
be possible to turn it by hand).
7 Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
8 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and
(ST – SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs modules initialization
and displays the screen below.
9 Touch the NEXT POSITION key. The Sample Arm moves over to the Rotor
Holder and lower to dispensing position.
10 Load a Sample Tray with a 0.5 mL cup in the position #1. Put it on the Flange
Adjustable.
11 Touch the NEXT POSITION key again. The Sample Arm raises, moves over
to the Autosampler housing and lowers on the position #1 of the Sample Tray.
12 Visually inspect that Sample Needle is centered in the cup. If off-center, gently
turn the Sample Tray to achieve best fit.
NOTE: May be necessary to adjust the Autosampler assy if the Sample Needle
is not in the middle of the cup. In this case, to adjust the Autosampler
Movement position loosen the 4 black column screws, move the Autosampler
to achieve best fit and then tighten the 4 black column screws again.

Visually inspect that (with the Sample Tray inside) the distance between the
Sample Tray and the external wall of the Autosampler housing circumference
is at least 2mm.
It’s also advisable to test the middle and inner rings positions (#2 and A1) by
using together the Motor Adjust options for the Autosampler and for the
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor. During this test on #1, #2 and A1 it is not
possible to align all 3 positions perfectly, so obtain a best fit alignment.
The following positions may also be tested.
Sample tray Outer Ring Mid Ring Inner Ring

rotation
0° - 360° (Home) 1 2 A1
90° 11 12 None
180° 21 22 A6
270° 31 32 None
13 Touch the toggle key TO RAISE / LOWER ARM. The Sample Arm moves up
and down. Repeat the operation to verify proper centering.
14 With the Sample Arm fully raised and paying attention that you are not
moving the Flange Adjustable from current position, remove the Sample Tray
and tighten the two fixing screws.
15 Refit the Sample Tray with the cup in position #1 and verify that the Sample
Needle is centered.
16 Once proper matching is achieved touch the STOP icon and then OK to return
at the Service main menu.
7.7.3 Rotor Holder Assy

The Rotor Holder must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior starting any position
If the Rotor Holder module was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Needles Position Tool
Disposable rotor
1 Put the Rotor Holder assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure it by
using the 3 black column screws but without tightening completely.
2 Re-connect cables and optic fibres as required.
3 Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides and
folding back the two stands then lower the instrument on the bench.
4 Turn On the Instrument then access at the Service program main menu.

5 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning test and
(ST – SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs the modules
initialization and displays the screen below.
6 Place the Needles Position Tool on the Rotor Holder.

7 Touch the NEXT POSITION key. The Sample Arm raise, moves over the
Rotor Holder and lower to dispensing position.
8 Adjust the Rotor Holder position to achieve best fit between the needles tip
and the 2 white points on the Needles Centering tool surface then tighten the 3
black column screws.
9 Touch the toggle key TO RAISE / LOWER ARM. The Sample Arm will
move up and down. Repeat this operation to insure proper centering.
10 Once proper matching is achieved Touch the STOP icon and then OK to
return to the Service main menu.
NOTE: Once Rotor Holder has been centered with respect to the Sample Arm then
perform verification against the R.E.M. (see section 7.7.7. for the details).
Before normal operation is resumed it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor Test as
detailed in the sub-section 7.4.1 and a Needles Position test available in the
Diagnostic menu using a plastic rotor.
7.7.4 Needles Block Assy

This test has the purpose to Adjust/Verify the Needles Block Position every time that
is needed (Replacement, Maintenance, accidental hit or for service action).
Materials / tools necessary: Needles Position Tool
Brand new rotor.

WARNING!

on this area.
1 Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Analytical Main Program.
2 On the tool bar touch the small icon of the Analysis Compartment Cover to
raise the cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor
Cover).
3 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Needles Position. The
system initializes the Sample Arm, the Rotor Holder and displays the screen
below.
4 Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert the Needles Centering
Tool with the side “A” facing up.
Reference Dots
A
5 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the Rotor Holder.

6 Using the knob located on the rear of the Sample Arm adjust the height of the
Needles Block so that the needle tips come in contact with the upper surface of
the Needles Position Tool. During this operation pay attention to put them in a
vertical position.
7 Secure the Needles Block by tightening the relevant knob without losing the
current position.
8 Make sure that the needle tips match with the 2 reference dots of the tool. If
the needle tips don’t match then verify the Sample Arm and the Rotor Holder
positioning as described in the section 7.7.
9 Once the Needles Block adjustment with the tool is achieved, press the
Raise/Lower Arm button. The arm is raised. Remove the Needles Centering
Tool.
10 Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert a brand new plastic
rotor.
11 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the plastic rotor on
the Rotor Holder.
12 Visually inspect for the proper position of the needles in the center of the 2
holes of the cuvette.
13 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is raised. By touching the Rotate
button (now active) the plastic rotor on the Rotor Holder is rotated 90°.
14 Repeat steps 11 thru 13 to be sure that in the 4 test positions the Needles Block
adjustment is acceptable.
NOTE: The needles alignment may not be identical in the 4 rotor cuvettes. However
insure that the needles enter the cuvette holes without touching the edges, etc. for each
test position.

A B C
Sample probe centred
or biased Left
15 When the needles adjustment is acceptable press the red Stop icon on the tool
bar and confirm the operation with OK to end the test.
7.7.5 Rotor Stack Assy (ACL ElitePro only)

The Rotor Stack must be aligned with the Rotor Transport (slider). Both the Rotors
Stack and the Rotor Transport (slider) are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module). The R.E.M. itself is aligned with the Rotor Holder assy.
This procedure is designed to center the Rotor Stack (silos) to the Rotor Transport
(slider).
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Disposable rotor
2 Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test.
Select RA-SL-RH test.
4 During the test visually inspect for the proper feeding of rotors from the Rotor
Stack to the Rotor Transport (slider). Rotors should drop freely and align on
the slider.
5 If the Rotor Transport (slider) is not aligned then loosen the 3 locking screws
that secure the Rotor Stack (located below the R.E.M. support Plate).

6 Gently move the Rotor Stack assembly to obtain best alignment. Also, the
slider “Home” sensor and/or flag may be adjusted left or right to set the stop
position of the slider under the rotor stack.
7 Secure the Rotors Stacks in place by tightening the 3 locking screws again.
8 Verify the proper position of the Rotor Stack repeating the RA-SL-RH test
until confident that adjustment is acceptable.
NOTE: The Rotor Stack Cover Sensor needs to detect the presence of the magnet in
the cover to perform the test correctly (use an external magnet).
7.7.6 Rotor Arm Assy (ACL ElitePro only)

The Rotor Arm assy must be aligned with respect to the Rotor Transport assy. Both
the Rotor Arm assy and the Rotor Transport are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module). The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder assy.
If the Rotor Arm was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Rotor Arm Centring Tool
Disposable rotor
1 Turn On the Instrument and access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider
Motor. Touch in sequence Home Position then Next CCW Position. Touch
“√” to return at Service main menu and touch NO on the “De-energize
motor?” dialog box
3 Put the Rotor Arm alignment bushing on Rotor Transport.
4 On the windows like menu perform the sequence Service – Motor Adjust –
Rotor Arm Motors – Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence Home
Position, then touch “√” to return to service main menu and NO on the “De-
energise motor?” dialog box

On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
5 Touch the Home Position key. Now both the Rotor Arm and the Transport
motors are initialized.
6 Install now the Rotor Arm on its shaft (do not tighten the 3 setscrews). Raise
the analysis compartment cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen
tool bar.
7 Touch on the current value of the window Chose Step Increment. The value
goes in reverse video.
8 Press Canc/Delete on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 40 as new
value.
9 Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will
lower by 40 steps.
10 Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm to
the Rotor Arm alignment bushing (in the meantime visually inspect for best fit,
if necessary manually guide the Rotor Arm paying attention to don’t move the
shaft from the previously set position).
11 Once the Rotor Arm is lowered and matching achieved tighten the 2 screws on
the Rotor Arm aluminium support.
12 Gently tighten the 3 setscrews paying attention not to move the shaft from the
previously set position.
13 The adjustment is now complete, press “√” to return to service main menu.
Touch YES on the “De-energize motor?” dialog box.
14 Remove the alignment bushing and place a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.
15 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and
RA – SL – RH Test.

16 The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm and Rotor Transport in sequence. Let
the system operate for a suitable number of cycles and verify for proper
matching, touch Abort once confident that adjustment is acceptable.
7.7.6.a Rotor Arm Vertical Height Adjustment (ACL ElitePro only)
1 From service environment, press cover open icon.

2 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Horiz. Arm Motor.
3 Press the Home Position key.
4 Push the next CW position key. The pliers will move on top of the rotor
holder.
5 Remove tool if necessary, from transport plate and place a rotor onto the plate.
6 Push the next CCW position key. The pliers will move over the transport
plate.
7 Press “√” then NO to exit.
8 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Vert. Arm Motor.
9 Select Waste Position for horizontal arm logical area.

10 Press Home Position.
11 Open the pliers arms manually by pressing the pin inwards.
12 While holding the pliers open, press the Next Down position key.
13 Release the pin and verify that the pliers arms do not lift the rotor from the
plate (pliers are too low) or sit on the edge of the rotor (pliers are too high).
Use the up arrow or down arrow buttons to make appropriate adjustment.
NOTE: Over the Waste Position the arm may be adjusted +/- 27 steps.
14 Press store position, then YES.


18 Manually place rotor in the pliers arms.
19 Push the next CCW position key.
21 Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Vert. Arm Motor.
22 Select Rotor Position for horizontal arm logical area.
24 Press Next Down Position. Check for alignment between the the pliers and
the rotor holder. The rotor should drop perfectly over the snap assembly and
onto the rotor holder. Switch between “next up position” and “next down
position” buttons as needed.
NOTE: To center the pliers onto the rotor, you may need to loosen the five set
screws located on top of the REM assembly and move the REM assembly left
or right, forwards or backwards to achieve perfect centering.
25 With a rotor seated on the rotor holder and the pliers in home position, open
pliers manually by pushing solenoid pin in.
26 Press next down position. Verify that the pliers arms do not lift the rotor from
the plate (pliers are too low) or sit on the edge of the rotor (pliers are too high).
Use the up arrow or down arrow buttons to make appropriate adjustment.
NOTE: Over the Rotor Position the arm may be adjusted +/- 7 steps.
27 Press Store position key, then YES.
28 Press home position.
31 Press Home Position. Verify that the pliers do not make contact with the
fluidic plate during movement. If contact is made, make the necessary
adjustments and verify the stored positions for the vertical motor.
32 Press “√” then YES to exit.
7.7.7 R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) Centering (ACL ElitePro

only)
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates Rotor Stack, Rotor
Transport and Rotor Arm assy. The R.E.M. must be aligned with respect to the Rotor
Holder.
This procedure is designed to center the R.E.M. to the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Disposable rotor

Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. Touch Home Position, and then touch
“√” to return to service main menu. Touch NO on the “De-energize
motor?”dialog box.
3 Raise the Rotor Cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen tool bar.
4 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor
Motor. Touch Home Position, and then touch “√” to return to service main
menu. Touch “NO” on the “De-energize motor?” dialog box.
Motors and Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence Home Position,
Next CCW Position. Touch “√” to return to service main menu. Touch NO on
the “De-energize motor?” dialog box.
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
7 Touch Home Position and then on the current value of the window “Chose
Step Increment”. The value goes in reverse video.
8 Press Canc/Delete on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 40 as new
value.
9 Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will
lower by 40 steps.
10 Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm
down until it actuates the Rotor Holder Snap mechanism located in the center
of the Rotor Holder. Visually inspect for best matching. Set “Step Incerment”
back to 1.
11 If off center loosen the 5 R.E.M. locking screws located over the Fluidic Plate,
gently move the whole R.E.M. assembly to obtain the best matching then
secure the R.E.M. in place again.

12 The adjustment is now complete, press “√” to return to service main menu.
Touch YES on the “De-energize motor?” dialog box.
13 Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Holder.
14 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and
RA – RH Test.
15 The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm performing repeated picking/loading
of rotor from/to the Rotor Holder. Let the system operate for a suitable number
of cycles and verify for proper operation, touch Abort once confident that
adjustment is acceptable.
NOTE: While performing RA-RH test check that rotor is carried freely to/from the
Rotor Holder. Should the rotor touch the fluidic plate during the motion then follow
the “Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment” procedure as detailed in section 7.7.8.
7.7.8 Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment (ACL ElitePro only)

If during the Rotor Arm movement the rotor carried touches the Fluidic Plate, it is
necessary to repeat the Rotor Arm Centring procedure as described in the sub-section
7.7.6 with an additional operation at point 13. Before tightening the 3 setscrews put
the aluminium support at the top of the shaft housing (about 2 mm over) to lift up the
Rotor Arm.
If the problem persists it can be solved also with the tilt up of the Rotor Arm through
the setscrew located below the electromagnet pin.
To tilt up the Rotor Arm proceed as follows:
1 Remove the Rotor Arm Electro-Magnet.
2 Locate the setscrew which allows tilt adjustment (see figure below).
Setscrew
located under
electromagnet shaft
3 Loosen a little the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm in place.

4 Turn cw the setscrew to raise the Rotor Arm and obtain best condition (inserting a
rotor in the Rotor Arm and then, with the vertical motor raised, inspecting the
distance from the bottom of the rotor and the Fluidic Plate).
5 Tighten the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm on the aluminium support.
6 Replace the Rotor Arm Electromagnet paying attention to the distance of the
magnet and the run of the pin (too close won’t open enough; too far jam and won’t
close).
7 Perform the R.E.M. self test as detailed in section 7.9. to insure proper fit.
NOTE: Also insure that the Hex Nut securing the two rotor arms is tightened
sufficiently to allow the arms to securely grasp the rotor edge in the arm slot. If the
Hex Nut is loose one arm may be lower or higher than the other and may ride above
the rotor edge preventing the rotor from being picked up.
7.7.9 R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) Self Test (ACL ElitePro

only)
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates the Rotor Stack,
Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm. The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder. The
procedure is detailed in section 7.7.7.
This test is designed to verify the proper alignment of the major sub-assembles of the
Rotor Exchange Module and the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Disposable rotors
2 Load a stack of 10 new rotors in the Rotor Stack. Empty the Rotor Waste
container and place it back onto its housing.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and RA –
SL – RH test.
4 The instrument initializes the motors of the R.E.M., the Rotor Holder and the
Rotor Cover.
5 Once initialization is completed the system starts loading / unloading rotors until
the stack of rotors is exhausted.
NOTE: If the R.E.M. cover is open or is out of place then the Rotor Stack Cover
Sensor detects this condition and the system, for safety purposes, won’t allow opening
of the Rotor Stack Upper Electro-Magnet. To override this situation and achieve a
good visual inspection without the R.E.M. Cover, put a little magnet on the magnetic
sensor (try both the 2 sides of the magnet to find the proper polarization).
Visually inspect for proper movement of rotors. If any problem is present then
perform the relevant check out and adjustment procedure.

7.8 System Dilutors Test

This service program sub-menu includes two different options, these are available via
Service then Dilutors Test:
7.8.1 Dilutor Test
7.8.2 Volume Check
7.8.1 Dilutor Test

This test is designed to verify the overall system precision. The test is automatically
performed by the instrument and performs three series of six replicates with each
solution at three different concentrations (undiluted, diluted 1/2 and diluted 1/4).
CV % are then calculated for each series, and reported on the screen. The test can be
configured for one Channel (Coagulimetric / Chromogenic) and one dilutor (sample /
reagent) at a time. Any imprecision of the system could be generated either by the
fluidics system (Fluidic parts obstruction, Electro-Valves, air bubbles and/or dilutors
compensation value) or by the optical system (light sources and/or detectors).
NOTE: Should this test fail, it would be advisable to perform the “Optical channel
check out and adjustment procedure” to verify the system optics. If the system optics
pass the tests then troubleshoot the fluidic system.
Following are described the procedures to test the Reagent Dilutor with both the
Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channels.
• Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel.
• Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel.
NOTE: To test the Sample Dilutor with both Channels, set the Loading Type with
“Sample Dilutor”. The only additional operation required is to temporarily exchange
(only for the duration of the test with the Sample Dilutor) the two fluidic tubes that are
connected to the Needles Block.
Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel

Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
1 Gain access to the service program menu.
2 Thoroughly clean, using distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes)
of the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fiber of the
Coagulimetric Channel.

3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test. The
system presents the screen below.
4 Select on the screen Coagulimetric on the left window and Reagent Dilutor on
the right window.
5 Load 4 ml of Wash-Reference Emulsion into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and
place it with its adapter in the reagent position R1.
6 Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and place it with
its adapter in the reagent position R4.
7 Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.
8 Press Start in Manual Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes picking the Wash-Reference Emulsion and the distilled water from the
reagent vials by using the reagent needle and the Reagent Dilutor.
9 Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle then verify that the
following results are obtained.
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) :<=4
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) : < = 4.5
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) : < = 5
CV% (Reference) :<=3
R2 : >= 0.996
10 Press “√” twice to exit.

Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel

Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
2 Thoroughly clean, use distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes) of
the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fiber of the
Chromogenic Channel.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test.
The system presents the screen below.
4 Select on the screen Chromogenic on the left window and Reagent Dilutor on
the right window.
5 Take the content of two vials (4 mL) with PNA concentration 160 µmol/L into a
clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Green adapters and place it in reagent
position R1.
6 Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and place it with
its adapter in reagent position R4.
7 Place a new rotor into the analysis compartment.
8 Press Start in Auto Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor cuvettes
picking the PNA and the distilled water from the reagent vials, by using the
reagent needle and Reagent Dilutor.

9 Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle, then verify that the
following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) : < = 5
R2 : >= 0.996
10 Press “√” twice to exit.
7.8.2 Volume Check

This test is designed to verify and/or adjust the overall accuracy of the dispensation of
the dilution system. The accuracy of the dispensation is verified by means of a special
tool called “Graduated Capillary”. It allows a visual verification of the volumes being
delivered.
The test can be performed using distilled water, however as the results are based on
visual inspection of liquid being actually drawn into the capillary, a dye based aqueous
material works better. If an inaccuracy is found a correction can be made through the
system software introducing either a positive or a negative offset.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Graduated Capillary Kit
Small beaker (10 ml) or other suitable
container
Distilled water (or dye based aqueous
solution)
1 Prepare a small beaker with a few ml of either distilled water or a dye based
aqueous solution (if available).
3 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Priming. The system performs a
fluidic priming cycle.
4 Once the priming is over go through the sequence Service then Dilutors Test then
Volume Check and Sample Dilutor/Reagent Dilutor. The system presents the
screen below.

5 Disconnect the Sample/Reagent needle tubing (the tubes on the Needles Block)
and connect it to a Graduated Capillary (connect the capillary to the upper tubing
to test the Sample Dilutor line or to the lower tubing to test the Reagent Dilutor
line).
6 While holding the capillary above a small beaker out of the liquid press Start. The
system will perform a short prime cycle (to fill the capillary) followed by a re-
aspiration. At this time an air bubble is withdrawn in the Graduated Capillary and
a dialogue box is presented on the screen
7 Immerse the Graduated Capillary into the distilled water, or a dye based aqueous
solution then press OK.
8 The system aspirates about 10 μL of water or a dye based aqueous solution (if
available) into the capillary. Verify that the head of the liquid sets between the two
upper marks of the Graduated Capillary.
9 After 10 seconds the instrument will automatically deliver most of the content out
of the Graduated Capillary.
10 Check that the liquid that remains sets between the two lower marks of the
Graduated Capillary (more close to the middle as possible). In this condition
(dispensed volume within range) no adjustments are needed, but if the liquid sets
above or below the two lines then a correction is required. The correction can be
entered in the Select Correction Value window.
11 Increase value if too much water stays in the Graduated Capillary at the end of
step 9 (dispensed volume insufficient), while decrease value if the water is too
close or below the lowest mark on the Graduated Capillary (dispensed volume too
high).
12 Repeat test to assure that entered value achieves proper volume dispensing.
13 If value has changed with respect to the original setting, record the new value on
the paper label located on the right side of the instrument.

14 Press “√” to exit, remove the Graduated Capillary and refit tubing to the
Sample/Reagent needle.
Following are the Graduated Capillary conditions during the test:
Up p e r Re fe re n c e lin e s
Lo w e r Re fe re n c e lin e s
A sp ira tio n Le v e l
D isp e n se d D isp e n se d D isp e n se d .

Vo lu m e Vo lu m e Vo lu m e
IN SUFFIC IEN T W ITHIN RA N G E TO O HIG H

7.9 Magnetic Sensors

Specific Magnetic sensors are located under the Fluidic Plate and on the Rotor Stack
with the purpose to detect for Rotor Holder and Rotor Stack Covers positions.
Following are the two sensors check procedures.
7.9.1 Rotor Holder Cover Sensor
7.9.2 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
7.9.1 Rotor Holder Cover Sensor

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Holder Cover
Sensor.
1 Remove the side and rear covers to gain access to the cardcage.
2 Connect a DVM between TP21 on the Acquisition & Sensors board (bd#3), and
ANA GND, TP0 on board #4.
3 Press the Cover icon to open the rotor cover. With the rotor cover open adjust
VR5 on the Acquisition & Sensors board (bd#3) to read 2000mv ± 20mv on the
DVM. Also, check that LED DL3 is “OFF”.
4 From the Service menu select Optical Module Test, Acquisition Adjustment.
Push Start. The rotor cover will close. With the rotor cover closed check that the
voltage on the DVM is 2800mv or greater. Check that LED DL3 is “ON.”
5 If the values are not met check the position of the Hall Sensor (located underneath
the rotor module) with respect to the magnet (located in the rotor cover). If
necessary, loosen and move the Hall Sensor and repeat the procedure.
6 Press “√” to exit.
NOTE: To work properly, this sensor needs correct assembly and the presence of its
permanent magnet. This is placed inside the Rotor Cover Assembly and must be
correctly polarized.
7.9.2 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor.
1 Gain access to the Service program menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor
Test. The system presents the screen below:

3 Open the Rotor Stack Cover.

4 Check that on the “Rotor Storage Sensor Open” line there is displayed a “√”.
5 Close the Rotor Stack Cover.
6 Check that on the “Rotor Storage Sensor Open” line the “√” disappears.
NOTE: To work properly, this sensor needs the presence of a permanent magnet. It’s
placed inside the Rotor Stack Cover and must be correctly polarized.
This sensor doesn’t need adjustment because it works with a digital output signal (On
or Off).
7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Waste Presence
Switch.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor
Test. The system presents the screen below.

3 Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and verify the presence of the Rotor
Waste Container (if absent put it in place) then close the door.
4 Check that on the “Rotor Waste Presence Switch” line there is displayed a “√”.
5 Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and remove the Rotor Waste Container
then close the door.
6 Check that on the “Rotor Waste Presence Switch” line the “√” disappears.
NOTE: This sensor doesn’t need electronic adjustments because it works with a
digital output signal (On or Off).
7.11 Switching Power Supply Check Out and Adjustment

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Switching Power Supply
Board.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: DVM
NOTE: Prior to starting this procedure it’s advisable to remove the Metallic Drip Tray
located between the Dilutors Module and the Switching Power Supply.
1 Turn On the Instrument.
2 Gain access to the service program menu. Then turn “On” the Halogen Lamp.
3 Set the DVM to read dc voltages.
4 Connect the ground cable of the DVM to the Test Point TP9 on the Switching
Power Supply.
5 Check that on the other Test Points the values read are in accordance with the
table below.

Test Point Names Voltages Output Acceptable Trimmers for

Set Values (V) Ranges (V) Adjustments
TP1 +70VPW 68.5 64 to 73 -
TP2 +12VPW 12 10.8 to 14.5 -
TP3 +9VPW 9 8.5 to 9.5 -
TP4 –15VANA -15 -14.25 to -15.75 RV5
TP5 +15VANA +15 14.25 to 15.75 RV4
TP6 +6VLAMP 6 5.94 to 6.06 RV2
TP7 +5VDGT 5.1 4.85 to 5.25 RV3
TP8 +12VDGT 12 11.4 to 12.6 RV6
NOTE: The trimmers are located on the Switching Power Supply in the zone under
the CPU Master Board. To gain access to them it is required that the Instrument is
Turned Off and is necessary to remove the entire CPU Master package (CPU Master,
PC104 and HDD).
If there are voltages Out of Range, try to check the S.P.S. Board without loads. If
without loads the problem persists then replace the S.P.S. Board.
NOTE: The S.P.S. Board has many protection circuits on board (see sub-section
3.3.10). When one of them is activated the S.P.S. enters into “Protection Mode” (Turn
Off all the voltages and put the LED DL1 On).
7.12 Touch Screen Calibration

This procedure is designed to calibrate the parameters in the Touch Screen Control
Board in respect to the physical dimension of the Touch Screen surface.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Touch Screen Calibration Tool
NOTE: If the Touch Screen Calibration Tool is not available then it’s advisable use
an object with the tip rounded. Don’t use any object that can damage the Touch
Screen surface.
1 For units equipped with the Pentium CPU and PC104 Board the serial Connection
COM1 must be disconnected from the PC104 Board (connector CN-6) and
reconnected to the CPU Mother Board connector CN-25. To gain access to CN-
25 on the Main CPU board it is also necessary to disconnect COM2 (CN-7),
COM3 (CN-8) and COM4 (CN-9) from the PC104 Board. Leave COM 2, COM 3
and COM4 connectors disconnected for this procedure.
2 For units equipped with the ATOM 945 Single Board Computer disconnect the
cable labelled CN30 (connector J10 on SBC) and leave it disconnected.
Disconnect cable labelled CN6 (connector J11 on SBC) and connect cable CN6 to
SBC connector J10.

3 Insert the DOS 6.2 Boot Diskette into the floppy drive and power the instrument
ON.
4 At the C:\ prompt type cd touch (and press ENTER) to get to the Touch
directory. From the Touch directory type Smartset (and press ENTER) to open
the Series Setup Utility.
5 Check the following and change if necessary:
• Interface type: Serial (default) and press ENTER.
• Communications Port: COM1 (default) and press ENTER. Ignore error
messages displayed on the screen and press ENTER to continue.
NOTE: If unit is equipped with ATOM 945 Single Board Computer the
Communications Port must be changed to COM2.
The Touch Screen has to be configured as follows, (use the arrow keys to move to
items and ENTER to change options).
• Communication:
o Hardware Handshaking: select Disabled
• Touch Mode:
o Stream Touches: select Disabled
o Calibration: select Enabled
o Scaling: select Enabled
• Touch Reporting:
o Report Delay (x 10ms): select 15
• Scaling:
o X high: select 800
o Y high: select 600
• ASCII Setup: press ENTER
o Type C2 (C must be upper case) and press ENTER
6 With the proper pointed tool (IL part number 190574-00), touch the following
corners of the display screen.
• Upper Left Corner
• Lower Right Corner
Several lines of touch screen communication data should be displayed after
each successful touch.
7 Save the calibration by typing: N$01$07 and press ENTER then press ESCAPE
(Esc) to save the calibration and exit.
8 To check the calibration select Touch Testing and press ENTER. The following
Touch Testing screen will appear.
Press ESCAPE to get back to main Menu.

Touch packet format: Smartset Binary

X Y Z Status: Touch Flag:
9 Touch the top left and then the bottom right corners of the display screen with the
pointed tool (IL part number 190574-00) and confirm that the displayed
coordinates for X and Y are approximate to the theoretical values 0 to 800 for X,
and 0 to 600 for Y. The maximum acceptable tolerance for these readings is +/-2.
For example:
X Y Z Status: Touch Flag:
0 0 255 1 Initial
0 0 255 4 Un Touch
800 600 255 1 Initial
800 600 255 4 Un Touch
NOTE: If the touch screen cannot be set within the specified tolerance, return
to the Main Menu and repeat steps 5. thru 8.
10 Upon successful completion press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
11 Check and if necessary select the following settings.
Touch Mode: Stream Touches Enabled
Load/Save Setup: Data Source Destination To NVRAM
Load/Save Setup: Setup Press ENTER (to save modifications)
12 After the configuration has been saved, select EXIT to exit the Smartset program.
Remove the boot disk and power off the ACL.
13 If the unit is equipped with the Pentium CPU and PC104 Board the serial
Connection COM1 must be reconnected to the PC104 Board. Disconnect the
COM1 cable from the CPU Mother Board connector CN-25 and connect it to the
PC104 Board connector CN-6. Reconnect COM2 (CN-7), COM3 (CN-8) and
COM4 (CN-9) to the PC104 Board.
If the unit is equipped with the ATOM 945 Single Board Computer the touch
cable labelled CN6 must be removed from SBC connector J10 and reconnected to
SBC connector J11. Cable connector labelled CN30 must be reconnected to SBC
connector J10.
14 Reboot the ACL. Confirm touch screen operation using the ACL system software
by pressing the selection buttons and pull down menus on the screen. Using your
finger, confirm that pressing the center of the icon, button or pull down menu tab,
the function is activated.
An alternative method to check/calibrate the touch screen is as follows. This method
is not as accurate as the method described above.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Touch Calibration.

A window appears with inside the information that “The current Touch Screen
calibration will be lost. The operation cannot be reverted. It’s OK to proceed?”
3 Press OK.
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please touch into red rectangle
1”.
4 In the upper left corner of the screen a red rectangle has appeared. Touch it with
care using the Touch Screen Calibration Tool.
5 Repeat the same operation with the red rectangle 2 located on the lower right of
the screen.
6 In order to verify the calibration repeat the operation also the check red rectangle
3.
7 A window appears with inside the information that “Touch Screen successfully
calibrated. Save the calibration?”
8 Press OK to save the calibration and exit.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure any error may occur or the time out to touch
the proper red rectangle on the screen has expired (15 seconds). In this case a
windows appears with inside the information that the touch screen calibration is
aborted. In this condition the Touch Screen is “out of order” and is needed to use the
TAB key (or the mouse if available) to select the Retry button and then press the Enter
key. Repeat the entire procedure until the Touch Screen is successfully calibrated.
7.13 Interfaces Test

This section provides information in order to verify through the Interfaces Test the
proper functionality of the interfaces relevant circuitry.
Following are the specific procedures to test the proper functionality of each circuit.
7.13.1 RS 232 Serial Mouse HW loop
17.13.2 RS 232 Host HW loop
17.13.3 USB Ports
17.13.4 Parallel Printer
7.13.1 RS 232 Serial Mouse HW Loop

This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Mouse interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Adapter
NOTE: If the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available
then it’s advisable use the customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Female) as reported in
the section 6.2 “Service Tools.”


2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Interfaces Test. The instrument
3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232 Mouse HW
loop option.
4 Press Continue.
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please install RS 232 Check
Connector on Mouse serial port”.
5 Properly install the RS 232 C Check Connector with the RS 232 C Check
Connector Adapter on the Mouse serial port.
6 Press Start.
7 The next window with the results may be “Test Passed” or “Test Failed”. If the
test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Mouse serial line.
8 Press OK to exit.
NOTE: In case of the result “Test Failed” then investigate the Interface Board, the
Flat Cable, and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.13.2 RS 232 Host HW Loop

This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Host interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Adapter

NOTE: If the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available
then it’s advisable use the customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Female) as reported in
the section 6.2 “Service Tools”.
3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232 Host HW
loop option.
4 Press Continue.
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please install RS 232 Check
Connector on Host serial port”.
5 Properly install the RS 232 C Check Connector with the RS 232 C Check
Connector Adapter on the Host serial port.
6 Press Start.
The next window with the results may be “Test Passed” or “Test Failed”. If the
test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Host serial line.
7 Press OK to exit.
NOTE: In case of the result “Test Failed” then investigate the Interface Board, the
Flat Cable, and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.13.3 USB Ports

There is no Diagnostic test available for the USB ports. To test a USB port, connect a
USB device such as a USB mouse and verify system operation.

7.13.4 Parallel Printer

This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Parallel Printer interface parallel
port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: External Printer Cable
PC Standard Parallel Printer
(ESCP2 / PCL5 Protocols compatible)
Before turn on the Instrument connect through the External Printer Cable the PC
Standard Parallel Printer.
1 Turn on the Instrument then gain access to the Service program menu.
3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the Parallel Printer
option.
4 Press Continue.
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please connect an external printer
on the parallel printer port”.
5 Turn on the printer and verify the presence of the paper inside then put the printer
“On Line.”
6 Press Continue.
The next window with the results may be “Printer Test Passed” or “Printer Test
Failed”. If the test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Parallel Printer
line.
7 Visually inspect the print out of the External Printer in order to detect data
transmission problem.
8 Press OK to exit.

NOTE: In case of the result “Test Failed” or “Wrong” print out then investigate the
Interface Board, the Flat Cable and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.14 Temperature Control

This section provides information in order to verify all the temperatures of the devices
onboard the Instrument as well as all the other temperature over heating protection
checks. More information on the instrument assemblies temperatures and the internal
cooling system are also provided in the drawing “Operating Temperature and Internal
Ventilation” reported in the figure 7.14 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Temperature Probe
NOTE: Before performing this check procedure make sure that the Instrument is turn
on at least for 30 minutes.
2 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Temperature Control. The
instrument shows the screen below.
3 Verify that all the devices are in the proper range of Temperature.
NOTE: If the System detects a temperature out of range, after few seconds a warning
is displayed and the temperature is displayed in red color. If the instrument has been
turned on for only a few minutes or there is a problem on a specific device then the
temperature may be out of its range. In this case the temperature is displayed with “–
– –“ when the temperature is too low or with “* * *” when the temperature is too high
in respect to its working range.
4 In order to troubleshoot the device with a temperature problem, verify the reading
of the temperature sensor (thermistor) by touching with the hand the device (Ex:
Rotor Holder at room temperature and “ * * * ” on the display).

IMPORTANT: For Rotor Holder temperature verification use the Temperature Probe
to measure temperature inside the analysis plastic rotor. The relevant test is described
with the tool in the section 6.2 “Service Tools”.
The Instrument is provided with an internal cooling system. This is composed of the
Instrument Fan Assy, located on the rear-right side of the instrument, that forces
airflow inside the instrument and cleans it from dust through the Air Filter.
A Secondary Fans system, located on the left side of the instrument, forces the heated
air outside.
A specific Fan Control Board with onboard a temperature detector is also present.
This board provides power to the Peltier Fan that is always working and turns on the
Auxiliary Fan when the temperature of the air around the board exceeds 36 °C (over
36 °C turn on the Auxiliary Fan, under the 34 °C turn off the Auxiliary Fan).
The functionality of this board may be tested using a hair-drier.
The maintenance of the Air Filter is very important for the maximum efficiency of the
internal air cooling system.
NOTE: The inefficiency of the internal air cooling system may be critical for the
Switching Power Supply Board. The SPS is provided with a temperature control
circuit which displays a temperature warning (over 60 °C) and then shuts down the
instrument if the temperature exceeds 75 °C.
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test

This section provides information in order to verify through the Floppy Disk Drive
Test the proper functionality of the Floppy Disk Drive and its relevant circuitry.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: 1.44 MB Floppy Disk formatted
NOTE: If a 1.44 MB Floppy Disk formatted is not available it’s possible to format a
new one with a Personal Computer with standard operative system (DOS / Windows).
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Floppy Disk Drive Test. The
instrument shows the screen below.

3 At the beginning of the floppy presence test verify that there is no floppy disk in
the Floppy Disk Drive.
4 Press Continue.
5 A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please wait”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “Disk present in
drive. Extract floppy before proceeding”.
6 At the beginning of the floppy write protected test insert a write protected floppy
disk in the Floppy Disk Drive.
7 Press Continue.
A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please wait”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “The inserted
Floppy disk is not write protected”.
8 At the beginning of the floppy usability test insert a formatted blank floppy disk in
the Floppy Disk Drive.
9 Press Continue.
A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please wait”
then another window with the test progress bar is displayed. At the end another
window appears with inside the message “Floppy disk drive test successfully
completed”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “Usability floppy
disk test failed (on creating file)!”.
10 Press OK and then Cancel to exit.
NOTE: In any of the tests fail then investigate the Floppy Disk Drive, the Flat Cable
and the CPU Master Board.

7.16 Software Checking & Loading

This section provides information in order to completely explain the upgrade
procedure of the software in the system. The software is stored on the Hard Disk
Drive and in the Flash Memory Chips on the boards.
Following are the specific procedures.
7.16.1 Software Identification
7.16.2 Databases Check
7.16.3 Backup / Restore of the System Configuration
7.16.4 Upgrade IL Library
7.16.5 Complete Software Re-install
7.16.6 Hard Disk Drive Formatting
7.16.7 Main CPU Board BIOS Setup
7.16.8 PC104 Board Expansion Module Settings
7.16.9 ATOM 945 SBC Cable Connection Reference Diagram
7.16.1 Software Identification

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software and Software
Identification. The instrument shows the screen below.
3 Verify that all the Software releases are in the latest versions available.
NOTE: The Master and the IL Library software version displayed are the software
version stored on the HDD, while the Slave and the REM software version displayed
are the software version stored in the boards Flash EPROMS memories (Boards #2
and #4).
If for troubleshooting purposes the current Slave Board #2 or REM Board #4 are
replaced it’s required to perform the Upgrade procedure. This will program the new
board memories with the last software revision that is Uploaded (stored) on the Hard
Disk Drive. Only after the Upgrade procedure will the last software revision be
written to the boards Flash EPROM memory.

The “Upgrade” program allows the software to be loaded from the Hard Disk Drive to
the specific board memory.
7.16.2 Databases Check

This sub-section is designed to clarify the actions that are possible when a database
error is encountered.
If the Checking Database during the Init System phase (at Turn On) detects a problem
then the system shows the following menu.
Database check reported some errors. Please select one of these options.
Option 1: Restore last saved database (on “Date” and “time”)
If this option is selected then the system proceeds with the restoration of the last valid
database saved.
CAUTION! That means that all the data and modifications stored from the last self-
backup (on “date” and “time”) to now will be lost!
Option 2: Power off and call service
If this option is selected then the system proceeds showing the message “System
halted. You can safely turn off ACL.”
NOTE: It is recommended to select Option1: Restore Last Saved Database if a
database error is encountered and this message is displayed. By selecting option 1 the
chance of saving a possibly corrupted database is minimized.
CAUTION! It is possible that after the Init System the instrument is halted with a
database failure message. This may result in the instrument database being corrupted
and the access to the Operator Main Program is denied. In this case the only option is
to turn off and then on again the instrument, and choose 1 (Restore last saved
database) in the menu.
CAUTION! If, after the Init System, is possible gain access to the Service Program
then it’s advisable try to perform an “Archive” of all the data not saved yet (QC, AR,
Calibrations and Patient data) and also a Backup of the system configuration (if an
other one is not available) as described in the sub-section 7.16.3.
After this, on the windows like menu enter Service then Databases Check.
The system shows a window where it is possible to select one of the four following
options:
• Restore whole Database
• Restore Setup and Calibration Database deleting other data
• Restore Setup Database deleting other data
• Ignore error

If also through this menu it’s impossible to recover Data and/or Setup configuration
then Log-Out, switch off and then On the Instrument and in the menu select the option
“1 – Restore last saved Database”.
7.16.3 Backup / Restore of the System Configuration

This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Backup / Restore of the
system configuration.
The following procedure allows the service engineer to save on a floppy disk the
current configuration of the instrument with the purpose to create a backup copy that
may be restored in the future on the same but also on other instruments.
The databases that will be saved contain information about the setup of:
• Liquids
• Tests
• Profile
• QC
• AR
• Interface configuration
• System configuration
Materials / tools necessary for the test: Available Floppy Disk
1.44 MB formatted.
1 Gain access to the Analysis / Service program menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
4 Touch Backup. The system takes a few minutes to prepare the data for the
backup displaying the message “Backup of database in progress, please wait”.
5 When required insert the floppy disk in the Floppy Drive and press OK.
6 The system writes the data on the disk displaying a progress bar.
7 When finished extract the floppy disk and put an identification label on it.
Following is the procedure is to restore the backup data file on the instrument.
2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
4 Touch Restore. The system displays a choice box with the message “Restoring
the saved instrument configuration some results in the databases could be
erased” then press Yes.
5 When required insert the proper floppy disk in the Floppy Drive and press OK.

6 The system reads the data on the disk displaying a progress bar and then takes
few minutes to restore the data.
7 When finished extract the floppy disk.
Touching the button View Backup Date it is also possible to check the date of the
Backup file on the floppy disk without proceeding with the Restore.
7.16.4 Upgrade IL Library

This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Upgrade of the IL
Library.
The following procedure allows the service engineer to perform the IL Library
Upgrade.
The databases that will be updated contain information about:
• New Liquids
• New Profiles
• New Interference Table
• New Tests
For all the tests updated in the databases with a new revision the calibration, AR, QC
and patients data will be lost. In the end of the operation the system provides to the
service engineer / customer the list of all the data erased.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: IL Library Upgrade Disk
2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Upgrade IL Library.
3 The instrument shows a window with the message “Load DB file from floppy
disk” then touch continue.
4 Insert the first disk as required and touch OK.
5 The system takes a few minutes to read the data and Upgrade the libraries.
6 When finished extract the floppy disk from the Floppy Drive and press OK.
7.16.5 Complete Software Install

Software installation is suggested for an instrument that is unable to successfully
complete the start-up sequence.
Sub-sections:
7.15.5.a Slave Code Upgrade and Software Installation
7.16.5.b REM Code Upgrade
7.16.5.c Upgrade IL Library
7.16.5.d Configuring Instrument for Elite or ElitePro

7.16.5.a Slave Code Upgrade and Software Installation
The Slave software upgrade must be selected before the application software is
installed. To select Slave Upgrade and install software perform the following steps:
1. From ACL Main Menu, select the UTILITY menu
2. Select the SOFTWARE option
3. Select the SOFTWARE UPGRADE option.
4. Select the SW SLAVE option.
5. Select the UPGRADE option. The “Upgrade Slave Code” window appears with
the following text: “Upgrade Code Selected. Do you confirm?”
6. Select the Yes button, the text will change briefly to state: “Upgrade in progress. .
.”
7. The text will automatically change to state: “The Device is ready to receive the
code, please Logout, Switch the system off, wait a few seconds and switch it back
On, to continue the Upgrade”. Select the OK button.
8. Select the Log Out button from the toolbar (key on the far right). When the
“Logout” message appears that states: “Do you really want to shutdown ACL?”
appears, select Yes.
9. Wait for the “Login” window and power down the ACL.
10. Insert the floppy disk labeled “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 1” into the floppy
drive and power on the ACL.
11. The “Scandisk” program will start automatically. When completed it will be
followed by the “Defrag” program.
12. Wait until “Defrag” is completed.
13. You will be prompted to insert the last disk of the set, insert the disk titled “ACL
Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 4”, then the disks “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 1”,
“ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 2”, “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 3” and
“ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 4” when prompted..
14. When the following prompt appears:
“Do you want to install a new database?” with the following options:
• “Press Y if you want to install a new Data Base”
• “Press N if you want to maintain the actual Database”
• “Press N to keep the database” (If upgrading existing software or reloading
software onto an existing Hard Drive).
• Press Y if loading software onto a New or Re-Formatted Hard Drive or if
the Database is suspect of corruptio).
• Automatically the “Scandisk” program will start, when completed it will
be followed by the “Defrag” program.

15. Wait for the instrument to finish with the disks as indicated by the C:\TEMP>
prompt and remove “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 4” from the floppy drive.
16. Power Off and then Power On the ACL to start the SLAVE UPGRADE
procedure.
17. Several screens appear before the ACL initialization. During the machine
initialization, the message “Erase Flash Memory in progress. . .Please wait!” is
displayed, followed by “Slave Code Upgrade in progress. . .Please wait!”
18. At the end of the SLAVE UPGRADE procedure the ACL is upgraded at new
release of software for the Slave and the Master boards.
19. At the end of the start-up the “ACL Login” window should be displayed. Log into
the machine using the user “Service” and password “System Fix”.
7.16.5.b REM Code Upgrade
After installation of the application software it may be necessary to perform the REM
Upgrade. To upgrade the REM software use the following steps:
2. Select the SOFTWARE option
3. Select the SOFTWARE UPGRADE option
4. Select the SW REM option
5. Select the UPGRADE option. The “Upgrade REM Code” window is displayed
with “Upgrade code selected. Do you confirm?” as text.
6. Select the Yes button, the text will change briefly to state: “Upgrade in progress. .
.”
7. The text will automatically change to state: “The Device is ready to receive the
code, please Logout, Switch the system of, wait few seconds and switch it back
On, to continue the Upgrade”. Select the OK button.
8. Select the Log Out button from the toolbar (key on the far right). When the
“Logout” message appears that states: “Do you really want to shutdown ACL?”
appears, select Yes.
9. Wait for the “Login” window and power down the ACL.
10. Wait for a few seconds and turn the ACL on.
11. Several screens appear before the ACL initialization. During the machine
initialization, the message “REM Code Upgrade in progress. . .Please wait!”
12. At the end of the UPGRADE procedure the ACL is upgraded at the new release
software for the REM board.
7.16.5.c Upgrade IL Library
The IL Library upgrade procedure must be used for re-installing the IL Library.
The IL Library upgrade is divided into the following steps:


2. Select the UPGRADE IL LIBRARY option
3. A message box pops up that reads “LOAD DATABASE FILE FROM FLOPPY
DISK” Select Continue
4. Insert into the floppy drive the floppy disk labeled “ACL Elite/ElitePro IL
LIBRARY UPGRADE DISK”, click OK and then follow the instructions that
prompt the operator to UPGRADE the IL Library. (At this time, the above steps
for upgrading the library are executed) A “Upgrade completed, please wait”
message is displayed.
The IL Library upgrade is divided into the following steps:
Step Time
IL Liquids Upgrade 3 minutes
IL Tests Upgrade 10 minutes
IL Profile Upgrade (no IL Profile at 1 second
this moment)
IL Test Groups Upgrade 30 seconds
IL Interference Table upgrade 1 minute 30 seconds
5. At the end of this procedure the ACL is upgraded to the new IL LIBRARY and
displays the “Upgrade IL Library” window; select the Confirm button to close the
window.
6. Select Setup->Tests->Default Tests from the main menu. If a series of beeps
occurs when entering this window, record the tests present in the list to the right of
the window, and select Setup->Tests->View/Define from the main menu. Verify
that all tests recorded are enabled, and if they are not, enable them.
7.16.5.d Configuring Instrument for Elite or ElitePro
Once logged onto the ACL, you must make sure that the machine knows if it is an
Elite or ElitePro. To do this, use the following steps:
1. Select the Utility menu option and click Software, then Software Identification.
2. Verify that the correct versions of software for the Master, Slave, REM and IL
Test Library are displayed: Select the confirm button to exit the window.
3. Select the Diagnostic” menu option and click on the Service option.
4. If you did not log onto the machine as user name “Service” you will be asked to
now, the password is “System Fix” and is case sensitive.
5. Once you are logged in as “Service”, select the Service menu option and click the
Hardware Configuration option.
6. If the instrument is an ACL Elite, the box labeled Additional Reagents should be
de-selected, and the box labeled REM Installed should be de-selected.

7. If the instrument is an ACL ElitePro, the box labeled Additional Reagents should
be selected, and the box labeled REM Installed should be selected.
8. The “Instrumentation Model” text box will display the type of instrument that
has been selected.
9. Press the Confirm button to save this setting.
7.16.6 Hard Disk Drive Formatting

NOTE: Replacement Hard Disk Drives will not have the ACL Application Software
installed. Replacement Hard Disk Drives must be prepared to accept the ACL
Application Software. Preparation of the hard disk drive includes partitioning and
formatting the drive.
1. Insert the floppy disk labelled “Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW” into the floppy drive
and turn the instrument on to boot up in the DOS environment.
2. To partition the hard disk drive, at the A:\ prompt type the fdisk command and
press the Enter key.
3. A Menu is displayed indicating 4 options. Select option 1 Create DOS Partition
or Logical DOS Drive, and press Enter.
4. A new Menu is displayed with 3 options. Select option 1 Create Primary DOS
Partition and press Enter.
5. The system will display “Do you want to use the maximum available size for a
Primary DOS Partition and make the Partition active?” Select Y and press Enter.
The Partition routine will start. When finished the partition status will be
displayed as follows:
Partition Status Type Vol Mbytes System Usage

Label
C: 1 A Pri DOS 2047 FAT16 26%
6. When the partition has been created press ESC to exit from the “fdisk” command.
7. With the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk in the floppy drive power the instrument
off and on again to reboot.
8. At the A:\ prompt type “format c:” and press the Enter key. Confirm the
message “Warning: All data will be lost. Non-Removable Disk Drive C will be
lost” by pressing Y and press the Enter key. This will start the formatting routine.
9. After format completion the display will indicate “Volume Label (11 characters,
Enter for none)”. Press Enter for no volume label.
10. When the formatting is complete press the Enter or ESC key to finish.

11. Remove the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk from the floppy drive and power the
instrument off.
To install the application software follow the procedure outlined in section 7.16.5.
After formatting harddrive and loading software the motor phases, instrument
configuration, (ie Interfaces, Barcodes, etc.) must be performed.
7.16.7 Main CPU BIOS Check (Pentium CPU Board)

If the Main CPU board is replaced the System BIOS Setup should be checked. To
check System BIOS Setup perform the following:
1. To enter the BIOS Setup environment turn the instrument power on and hold
down the [Del] or [Canc] key.
When you are in the BIOS Setup environment the following options will be
displayed:
SYSTEM BIOS SETUP -- UTILITY VERSION 2.05
Basic CMOS Configuration
Advanced CMOS Configuration
Chipset Configuration
Reset CMOS to Last Known Values
Reset CMOS to Factory Defaults
Write to CMOS and Exit
Exit Without Changing CMOS
To select an option, use “↑” or “↓” key followed by Enter key.
2. Confirm BIOS is configured as indicated below, and modify if necessary.
BASIC CMOS CONFIGURATION
Date: Insert date and correct hour
Floppy Drive A: not installed
Floppy Drive B: 1.44MB, 3.5
ADVANCED CMOS CONFIGURATION
Swapping of A: and B: Enabled
Seek Hard Drive at Boot: Enabled
Seek Floppy at Boot: Enabled
Boot Sequence: A: → C:
CHIPSET CONFIGURATION
Internal VGA Boot On: CRT + FP
Internal COM 1: Enabled
Internal COM 2: Enabled

Internal COM 3: Disabled Internal

COM 4: Disabled
Internal COM 5: Disabled
Internal Audio: Disabled
3. After confirming or modifying BIOS Setup, select Write to CMOS and Exit and
press the Enter key.
7.16.7.a ATOM 945 SBC BIOS Check / Setup
1. Power on the ACL Elite/ElitePro. Press the Delete key until the following
message is displayed.
“Entering Setup: Please Wait”
“Please Digit Password”
<hit enter>
2. Follow the instructions provided in each screen to verify BIOS settings or make
changes as required. Refer to the following table for System BIOS Settings.
3. Upon completion scroll down to “Write to CMOS and Exit”. Press Enter key.
4. Reboot ACL Elite/ElitePro unit.
System BIOS Settings for ATOM 945 SBC
Basic Configuration
Data: <set to current>
Time: <set to current>
Floppy Drive A: 1.44MB 3.5"
Floppy Drive B: Not Installed
Hard Disk C: Automatic search
Hard Disk D: Not Installed
Keyboard: Standard PC/AT Keyboard
Display Type: EGA/VGA/SVGA
Base Mem: 640
Extended Mem: 1039296
Advanced Configuration
Boot as fast as possible: Enabled
Display Setup message: Disabled
Wait to ease setup mem: Disabled
Display Test Behavior: Disabled

System Configuration Box: Disabled

Memory Test Tick: Enabled
Test Above 1MB: Enabled
Wait for F1 on Error: Enabled
Ignore Keyboard Error: Disabled
Internal video boot on: Default
Boot video first from: PEG
Show Graphic Logo: Disabled
USB Keyboard after boot: Disabled
Enhanced BIOS loading: Disabled
Ignore IDE 80 cable check: Disabled
No zero extended RAM: Enabled
Seek Hard Drive on Boot: Disabled
Sec. to wait for HD Reset: 2
1st Boot Device: USB Disk
2nd Boot Device: FLOPPY
3rd Boot Device: IDE1 Mst
4th Boot Device: IDE0 SLV
NumLock State on boot: Enabled
Typematic Programming: Disabled
Typematic rate Delay: 250ms
Typematic Rate: 30.0 cps
PowerFail Resume Type: Always on
Power Button Instant Off: Disabled
ACPT Tables: Enabled
Chipset Configuration
PCI slot 1: ON
PCI slot 3: ON
PCI Express slot 1: ON
PIC INTA/other device: IRQ 10
PCI INTC / USB 4-5: IRQ 7

Internal LAN: IRQ 5

Internal SMBUS PCI Device: ON
Internal UHCI USB ports: 8
Maximum UDMA mode: 5(ATA100)
Thermal Management: TM2
Chipset Spread Spectrum: Enabled
Internal Video Mem Mb: 8
Internal Flat Panel Type: 640 x 480
POST port 80H decode: PCI
PCI slot 2: ON
PCI slot 4: ON
PCI INTB/SMBUS/USB2-3 IRQ: 11
PCI INTD / USB 6-7 IRQ: 7
Internal LAN: ON
Internal Audio Type: AC97
Internal EHCI USB: E
Internal IDE/SATA mode: SATA+PATA
Maximum CPU Frequency MHz: 1600
LVDS Spread Spectrum %: none
Internal IDG function 1: ON
PEG Graphics Device: ON
Super IO Configuration
COMA base addr: 3F8(COM1)
COMB base addr: 2F8(COM2)
COMB interface: RS-232
LPT mode: STANDARD
FDC Controller: Enabled
Pointing Device (mouse): Enabled
COMA: IRQ 4
COMB: IRQ 3

COMB IrDA signal pin: IRRX/IRTX

LPT IRQ: NO
Parallel Connected to: FDC
7.16.8 PC104 Board Expansion Module Setting (not used with

ATOM 945 SBC)
If the PC 104 Board is replaced the Module Settings should be checked. To check
settings perform the following:
1. Disconnect cables CN7, CN8 and CN9 form the PC 104 Board. Leave these
cables disconnected.
2. Disconnect the video cable, CN6 from the PC 104 Board and connect it to CN25
on the Main CPU Board.
3. Insert the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk into the floppy drive and boot the
instrument.
4. From the C:\ prompt type new_set4 command and press the Enter key.
Instructions to configure the system with the following options will be shown:
Check that the system is configured as indicated below.
Type = PRIMARY Com BaseAdd = 380H Alternative IRQ = 2

Net Node = 2 Net Base Add = 240H Net IRQ = 2
COM 1 = Enable Base Add = 380H* IRQ Line = 10
COM 2 = Enable Base Add = 388H* IRQ Line = NONE
NOTE: The values identified with an (*) may not be changeable. Continue
with the configuration.
5. To exit from the “new_set4” environment saving the configuration, press the End
or Fine key.
6. Remove the disk from the floppy drive and power off the instrument. Connect all
cables (CN6, CN7, CN8 and CN9) to their original positions.
7. Power on the instrument and confirm system boots.
NOTE: If the touch screen is inoperative it may be necessary to perform the touch
screen calibration described in section 7.12).

7.16.9 ATOM 945 SBC Cable Connection Reference Diagram
TOUCH MOUSE
VGA
CN6 J11 CN30 J10
VGA CN30
ARCNET
HOST X CN1
CN8 J13 ETHERNET
X J17
POWER
Parallel Printer
CN10 J20
CN26 J5
Kbd, Mouse, Speaker NOT

USED
CN21 J15
USB FLOPPY
HDD POWER
P24 J13 CN22 J7
Or CN16 HDD2 xx
Reference Legend for Cable connector designation

ATOM 945 SBC
Connector
Function
System
Cable MOUSE New ATOM 945 SBC
Connect Connector Number
Number CN30 J10

ACL Elite/EliteProService Manual
Chapter 8 System Interfacing

This chapter provides the main information related to the configuration of the instrument
interface for the communication with external devices.
8.1 Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 2
8.2 External Parallel Printer ........................................................................................... 3
8.3 Network.................................................................................................................... 4
8.4 Modem ..................................................................................................................... 4
8.5 Mouse....................................................................................................................... 4
8.6 Host Computer ......................................................................................................... 4
8.7 Internal Bar Code Reader ......................................................................................... 6
8.8 External Bar Code Reader........................................................................................ 7
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing Page 1 of 7

8.1 Keyboard
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Keyboard”. The system
displays the screen below.
The window in this screen allows configuring the ACL Elite/ElitePro PC standard
keyboard for the language and layout used. Also the enabling of the on-screen keypad is
configurable by selecting:
KEYBOARD TYPE: English (United Kingdom)
French
German
Spanish
Italian
USA
NUMERICAL KEYPAD: Disabled
All numerical fields
All numerical fields and Sample ID
Page 2 of 7 Chapter 8 – System Interfacing

8.2 External Parallel Printer

On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Printer”. The system
The window in this screen allows configuring of an external printer selecting:

PRINTER PROTOCOL: ESC/P2 (for Epson-like printers)
HP-PCL (for HP-like printers)
PAPER DIMENSION: A4 (210 x 297 mm.)
Letter (8½ x 11 inch)
PAPER FORMAT: Single sheet
Continuous sheet
REPORT TYPE: Cumulative
Sample Report
PRINTED SAMPLES: Any (analyzed)
Completed
AUTOMATIC PRINT OUT: Checked (Enable)
Empty (Disable)
SAMPLE REPORT DATA: Instrument Name (Checked Enable)
Normal Ranges (Checked Enable)
Date/Time (Checked Enable)

CUSTOMIZE HEADER: Enter in the “Custom Header” screen.
8.3 Network
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.4 Modem
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.5 Mouse
The mouse may be used as a selecting device in place of touching the screen.
At instrument turn on, during the “Init. System” phases, the instrument checks the proper
serial port or USB port for the presence of a mouse.
If the mouse is detected then the cursor arrow appears on the display.
If the mouse is connected after the “Init. System” phases then the instrument will not
detect it until the next time the instrument is powered off and on.
8.6 Host Computer

On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Host”. The system

The window in this screen allows configuring of Host Computer interface selecting:
BAUD RATE: 2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
AUTOMATIC DATA TX (TRANSMISSION): Not Required
Patient Samples Only
QC, AR and Patient Samples
HOST QUERY: Checked (Enable)
Empty (Disable)
DELETE AUTOMATICALLY AFTER TX Checked (Enable)
(TRANSMISSION): Empty (Disable)
UNIQUE INSTRUMENT ID: Checked (Enable, from 1 to 9)
Empty (Disable)
Information about the “Host Communication Protocol” is detailed in chapter 12
Appendix A of this manual.
The ACL to Host Computer Interconnect Cable is P/N 184202-38.
The following table provides information regarding the wiring of the interconnection
cable between the ACL and Host Computer.
ACL Side Host Computer Side
Interface Type: DTE Interface Type: DTE

9 Pin Female Delta Connector 9 Pin Female Delta Connector
PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION
1 N.C. 1 N.C.
2 TXD 2 RXD
3 RXD 3 TXD
4 DTR 6 DSR
5 Signal GND 5 Signal GND
6 DSR 4 DTR
7 RTS 8 CTS

8 CTS 7 RTS
9 N.C. 9 N.C.
Shield to connector shell Shield to connector shell
8.7 Internal Bar Code Reader

On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Internal Barcode”. The
system displays the screen below.
The first step is enable (Checked) the Internal Barcode Reader.

The four fields visible on the screen correspond to the four families of barcodes that may
be activated on the ACL, along with their corresponding subtypes of barcodes. Choose
for each field one of the options below according to the laboratory’s needs.
CODABAR: Disabled
No Checksum
AIM Mod 16
NW7 Mod 11
NW7 Mod 16
CODE 39: Disabled
No Checksum
Mod 43

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5: Disabled
No Checksum
USS Mod 10
OPCC Mod 10
CODE 128: Disabled
No Checksum
8.8 External Bar Code Reader

On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “External Barcode”. The
system displays the screen below.
The External Bar Code Reader is used to Identify IL Reagent Bar Code labels. Enable the
external barcode reader by selecting the box labelled External BCR Enabled. Select
additional fields as appropriate.

Chapter 9 Part List

This chapter contains information about the service parts for use with the ACL Elite/ElitePro System. These items may be ordered using their Part
Numbers listed below:
RoHS Additional / Extended

Part Number Description ACL Elite ACL ElitePro Compliant Description
00000000408 ACL 3.5" Diskette Kit - contains one (1) floppy diskette and label Y Y N
00002609006 TUBING URH .040 ID, 5FT/PK, 9000/ELITE Y Y Y
00006425245 O-Ring for Sample Tray Indexing Pin Y Y Y
00006501110 Floppy Disk Drive Y Y N FOR LEGACY UNITS ONLY!
00006501120 Keyboard Y Y N Beige color
00006545610 Push - Push Latch (latch for rotor waste door) Y Y Y
00006721805 Fiber Optic for LED Y Y Y
00007090700 Single Channel Optical Switch Y Y Y
00007090800 Dual Channel Optical Switch Y Y Y
If ordering this part you must specify how many continuous

feet needed. Otherwise 1 foot lengths will be shipped. Order
00007328901 Tubing, URTH .040ID x .100OD Clear N N Y PN 00002609006 TUBING URH .040 ID, 5FT/PK, 9000/ELITE
00007406800 Connector, Tubing 3 - Way Y Y Y
00008243300 BIPOLAR STEPPER MOTOR WIRED Y Y Y
00008262700 Chrom Sensor Board Y Y Y
00008486936 Optical Sensor Silos Upper Y Y
00008486937 Optical Sensor Silos Lower Y Y
00008486938 Autosampler Internal Ring Sensor (reagent ring) Y Y Y
00008486939 Autosampler External Ring Sensor (sample cups) Y Y Y
00008486944 Chrom Coaxial Cable Y Y Y
00008486946 Coag Sensor With Cable Y Y Y
00008486947 Optical Sensor Rotor waste Full N Y Y
00008486960 Rotor Waste Micro Switch Assy N Y Y
00008972100 Filter Optical 405nm Y Y Y
00009920810 Screwdriver, Flex BGE/BG3 Y Y Y
00009963503 Set Screw M4 x 10 for Caliper Arm Leveling N Y Y
00018100068 Cable assy, flat, liquid sensor Y Y Y Flat cable from fluidics interconnect board to mother board.
00018100069 Guide ball modified Y Y Y Keyboard drawer slides
Chapter 9 – Part List Page 1 of 5

00018100070 FAN ASSY INSTRUMENT, ACL9000 Y Y Y
00018100071 FAN ASSY AUXILIARY, ACL 9000 Y Y Y
00018100072 FAN ASSY SECONDARY, ACL9000 Y Y Y
00018100073 FAN ASSY PELTIER, ACL9000 Y Y Y
00018100077 SYSTEM SATA HDD PRELOADED WITH ELITE Rev 3.X Y Y Y
00018100110 Cylix DB9-RS232 Y Y Y
00018100111 Cylix DB25-PARLL Y Y Y
00018100203 ELITE ATOM 945 CPU PCB W/O HDD Y Y Y
00018100333 Barcode Scanner Bracket Y Y Y Product Improvement to address sample ID readibility
00018100447 KIT, ELITE 04.00.00/02.03.00 USB Y Y Y
00018100449 KIT, ELITE ALL-IN-ONE UTILITY USB Y Y Y
00018102128 Peltier Temperature Sensor Y Y Y
00018102181 Halogen Lamp Y Y Y
00018102195 Optical Culminator Assy Y Y Y
00018102443 Brushes Assy (rotor holder) Y Y Y
00018102515 LED and Socket Assy (Coag Channel) Y Y Y
00018110306 Spring for Rotor Arm N Y Y
00018110322 Spring for Rotor Stack N Y Y
00018110364 Protective Glass Barcode Scanner Y Y Y
00018110365 Flange Adjustable (Grey flange to support sample Tray Y Y Y
00018110385 Cover Ref-Emulsion Cable Connection Y Y Y
00018110634 Peltier #2 Assy N Y Y
00018110648 ROTOR HOLDER COVER MOTOR ASSY ACL 10000 N Y Y
00018110655 FAN ASSY ACL 10000 N Y Y
00018110802 Rotor Cover Sensor Y Y Y
00018110826 Instrument Fan Assy Y Y Y
00018110827 Secondary Fan Assy Y Y Y
00018110828 Peltier Fan Assy (Peltier #1) Y Y Y
00018110829 Auxiliary Fan assy Y Y Y
00018110830 Autosampler Movement Assy Y Y Y
00018110834 Peltier #1 Assy Y Y Y
00018110835 Stirrer Motor Y Y Y
00018110838 Dilutor Electrovalve 3-Way Y Y Y
00018110840 Reference Emulsion Sensor Y Y Y
00018110843 Needle Block (probe block) Y Y Y
00018110846 Rotor Cover Assy Y Y Y For Legacy Units
Page 2 of 5 Chapter 9 – Part List

00018110847 ROTOR COVER MOTOR ASSY ACL 9000 Y Y For Legacy Units
00018110850 Rotor Holder Movement Assy Y Y Y
00018110851 Rotor Holder Snap Y Y Y
00018110853 Rotor Exchange Module Assy (REM) N Y Y
00018110854 Pliers Movement Assy (caliper arm movement assy) N Y Y
00018110857 Rotor Transport Assy N Y Y
00018110858 Dilutor Drive Assy Y Y Y
00018110860 Electromagnet (silos) Gripper soleNid N Y Y
00018110894 Rotor Stack Assy (silos) N Y Y
00018110896 Rotor Arm (caliper) N Y Y
00018110898 Sample Tray for 13x75mm & 13X100mm (5ml) sample tubes Y Y Y
00018110899 Sample Tray for 13x75mm (3ml / 3.5ml) sample tubes Y Y Y
00018110906 Preheater Elite Y Y
00018110925 Cable VGA LCD Y Y Y
00018110926 Cable RS232 LCD Y Y Y
00018110931 LCD Monitor Y Y Y
00018112056 CABLE, USB PENTIUM TO INTERFACE PCB Y Y Y For units without USB only!
00018112070 Interface Board Elite Only Y Y Y For units without USB only!
00018112105 Visor Elite (plastic reagent hinged cover) Y N Y
00018112106 Visor ElitePro (plastic reagent hinged cover) N Y Y
00018112117 REM and Silos Cover Assy N Y N For Legacy Units
00018112127 Door Rotor Waste Y Y N For Legacy Units
00018112131 Barcode Scanner Hand Held Y Y Y
00018112145 Kit Upgrade Barcode scanner Linear Y Y N For Legacy Units
00018112179 Mouse Optical USB 2 Button with Wheel Y Y Y
00018181271 AIR FILTER ASSY PKG. Y Y Y Discontinued refer to PN 00018200338
Sarstedt Sample Tray 11.5x66mm (3ml) & 11.5x92mm (5ml) sample
00018181285 tubes Y Y Y
00018200080 INTERIOR BCR CABLE ETHERNET Y Y Y
00018200206 CPU SLAVE BD #2 Y Y Y Replaces PN 00018235530
00018200207 PCB, ACQUISITION & SENSOR BD #3 Y Y Y Replaces PN 00018235540
00018200208 REM BOARD #4 (ELITE PRO ONLY) N Y Y Replaces PN 00018235600
00018200209 PHOTOMETRIC & TEMP CONTROL BOARD #6 Y Y Y Replaces PN 00018235561
00018200210 PCB, MOTORS #5 Y Y Y Replaces PN 00018235550
00018200211 PCB ASSY USB I/O REAR PANEL Y Y Y

00018200212 LCD VOLTAGE ISOLATOR PCB Y Y Y Product Improvement for SCREEN ROLLING ISSUE.
CABLE GOES FROM J11 PCB ASSY USB I/O REAR PANEL
00018200213 USB CABLE, I/O PCB TO SBC Y Y Y TO ATOM 945 AND TO WHERE FDD WAS LOCATED
On Refresh Units. Can be used on Legacy units. Procedure

00018200215 POWER MODULE INLET Y Y Y included in kit.
00018200216 ASSY, SYSTEM SATA HDD, W/ELITE SW 4.X Y Y Y Contains SW4.X For Refresh or USB Upgraded Units only!
00018200217 ATOM-945, CPU&HDD UPGRADE W/SW4.X Y Y Y Contains SW4.X For Refresh or USB Upgraded Units only!
00018200218 DOOR, ROTOR WASTE (BLACK) Y Y Y For Refresh units
00018200338 AIR FILTER ASSY PKG. Y Y Y Replaces PN 00018181271 Bright white color
00018200220 REM AND SILOS COVER ASSY (WHITE) N Y Y For Refresh units
00018235350 Speaker Board Assy Y Y Y
00018235530 CPU Slave Board #2 Y Y N Use up stock. Replaced by PN 00018200206
00018235540 Acquisition & Sensors Board #3 Y Y N Use up stock. Replaced by PN 00018200207
00018235550 Motors Board #5 Y Y N Use up stock. Replaced by PN 00018200210
00018235561 Photometric & Temperature Control Board #6 Y Y N Use up stock. Replaced by PN 00018200209
00018235570 Mother Board Y Y Y
00018235580 Loading Area Interconnection Interface Board / Modules Interconnect Y Y Y
00018235600 Rotor Exchange Module Board #4 Y Y N Use up stock. Replaced by PN 00018200208
00018235610 REM Upper Interconnection Board N Y Y
00018235620 REM Lower Interconnection Board N Y Y
00018235630 Photometric Interconnect Board Y Y Y
00018235640 Liquid Level Detection Board Y Y Y
00018235650 Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interconnect Board Y Y Y
00018235660 Switching Power Supply Y Y Y
00018235670 Silos Hall sensor Board Y Y Y
00018235680 Dual Channel Optical Switch (Flat) Y Y Y
00018235690 Fan Control Board Y Y Y
00019035500 Power Line Filter Y Y N
00019035780 Hard Drive Maintenance Kit Diskette Y Y N
00019054708 USB Extension cable (ATOM 945 CPU configuration only) Y Y N
00019065300 Kit Service Tools Y Y N
00019069200 Barcode Reader Assy (internal) Y Y Y
00019069300 PM Kit ACL 8-9-10K-Elite/ElitePro Y Y Y
00019069991 ELITE, ATOM-945,CPU&HDD UPGRADE W/SW 3.X Y Y Y
00019075100 Vibration Dampner (10 pack) Y Y Y
Page 4 of 5 Chapter 9 – Part List

00019079800 Belt Timing Autosampler Rotation Y Y Y
00019080455 Belt Timing Vertical Tip Movement Y Y Y
00019080456 Belt Timing Horizontal Tip Movement Assy Y Y Y
00019080456 Belt Timing Rotor Transport Y Y Y
00019080457 Belt Timing Caliper Arm Rotation Y Y Y
00019080458 Belt Timing Caliper Arm Vertical Y Y Y
00019082260 Timing Belt Angst+Pfister 8/2.5/106/265
replacing 0006667560 which is SAP Sales Code 01 Nn-
00019082260 Rotor Cover Belt Y Y Y Saleable
00019083498 Needle Arm Y Y Y
00019085020 Dilutor Gasket Kit Y Y Y
00019085602 Power Entry Module Assy Y Y N
00019085607 Tip Movement Assy Universal Y Y Y
00019085616 Kit, LLD Cable Replacement Y Y Y
00019085621 Cable Power LCD Y Y Y
00019085647 Dilutor Chamber with Electrovalves Y Y Y
00019085689 Harddrive with ACL Elite & Elite Software Preloaded Y Y N For Pentium units only!

Chapter 10 Drawings
This chapter is designed to group all the main drawings related to the specific chapters
included in this service manual. The drawings are organized by section number (chapters
where referenced) and then for number of drawing used in the section (chapter).
Following is the index of the drawings:
2.5.1 Drawing 1 Analysis Windows Like Menu Bar Expanded Diagram
2.5.2 Drawing 1 Service Windows Like Menu Bar Expanded Diagram
3.1.2 Drawing 1 Instrument Fluidic System Cycles Diagram
3.3.1 Drawing 1 Mother Board & Interconnections General Block Diagram
3.3.3 Drawing 1 Quick Reference Board Functions Diagram
3.3.4 Drawing 1 CPU Master Board General Block Diagram
3.3.4 Drawing 2 PC104 Board General Block Diagram
3.3.5 Drawing 1 Slave Board General Block Diagram
3.3.5 Drawing 2 Slave Board Communication Section
3.3.5 Drawing 3 Slave Board Memory Section
3.3.5 Drawing 4 Slave Board Main Logic Section
3.3.6 Drawing 1 Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram
3.3.6 Drawing 2 Acquisition & Sensors Board Multiplexer &
Acquisition Section
3.3.6 Drawing 3 Acquisition & Sensors Board Channel Amplifier
Section
3.3.6 Drawing 4 Acquisition & Sensors Board Sample Tray Detectors
Emitter Section
3.3.6 Drawing 5 Acquisition & Sensors Board Sample Tray Detectors
Receiver Section
3.3.6 Drawing 6 Acquisition & Sensors Board Needles Sensors Section
3.3.6 Drawing 7 Acquisition & Sensors Board Reference Emulsion
Presence Sections
3.3.6 Drawing 8 Acquisition & Sensors Board Analysis Compartment
Cover Sensor Section
3.3.7 Drawing 1 Rotor Exchange Module Board General Block Diagram
3.3.7 Drawing 2 Rotor Exchange Module Board Transport Motor Section
Chapter 10 - Drawings Page 1 of 41

3.3.7 Drawing 3 Rotor Exchange Module Board Rotor Arm Motors

Section
3.3.7 Drawing 4 Rotor Exchange Module Board Memory &
Communication Section
3.3.7 Drawing 5 Rotor Exchange Module Board Infra Red Sensors Section
3.3.7 Drawing 6 Rotor Exchange Module Board Electro Magnet Control
Section
3.3.8 Drawing 1 Motors Board General Block Diagram
3.3.8 Drawing 2 Motors Board Autosampler Motor
Section
3.3.8 Drawing 3 Motors Board Sample Arm Motors
Section
3.3.8 Drawing 4 Motors Board Dilutors Motors Section
3.3.8 Drawing 5 Motors Board Magnetic Stirrer Motors
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 1 Photom & Temp Control Board General Block Diagram
3.3.9 Drawing 2 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotor Motor Section
3.3.9 Drawing 3 Photom & Temp Control Board Analysis Compartment
Cover Motor Section
3.3.9 Drawing 4 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotor Thermoregulation
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 5 Photom & Temp Control Board Peltiers Thermoregulation
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 6 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotors Transport & Feed
Stack Section
3.3.10 Drawing 1 Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram
3.3.11 Drawing 1 Instrument Ground Circuit
4.1.5 Drawing 1 Rotor Exchange Module Replacement
4.2 Drawing 1 Instrument Covers
7.14 Drawing 1 Operating Temperatures & Internal Ventilation
Page 2 of 41 Chapter 10 - Drawings








































Appendix A Host Communication Protocol

Content
A.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2

A.2 PRODUCT PERSPECTIVE ........................................................................................ 2
A.3 DATA LINK AND LOGICAL LAYER ......................................................................... 3
A.4 SESSIONS .............................................................................................................. 4
A.5 TEST ORDER DOWNLOADING ................................................................................ 5
A.6 REJECTED TEST ORDER....................................................................................... 15
A.7 DOWNLOAD SESSION VOLUMES.......................................................................... 17
A.8 TEST RESULTS UPLOADING................................................................................. 18
A.9 TEST RESULT MESSAGE ...................................................................................... 19
A.10 UPLOAD SESSION VOLUMES ............................................................................ 28
A.11 NOT SUPPORTED RECORDS .............................................................................. 29
A.12 TRANSMISSION ABORT .................................................................................... 29
A.13 ELITE/ELITE PRO SUPPORTED CHARACTERS ............................................... 30
A.14 ELITE/ELITE PRO SUPPORTED UNITS .......................................................... 30
Appendix A Page 1 of 31
A.1 Introduction
This appendix is a guide to integrate a Laboratory Information Management system
with the Instrumentation Laboratory ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments using the
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) specification to transfer
information between clinical instruments and computer systems.
ASTM specification E-1394-91 Standard Specification for Transferring Information
between Clinical instruments and Computer Systems and E-1381-91 Standard
Specification for the Low Level Protocol to transfer Messages between Clinical
Laboratory Instruments and Computer Systems have been used as standard to develop
ELITE/ELITE PRO Host Communication Protocol.
Specification E-1394 defines the logical layer of ASTM standard; all significant
information for ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments application can be found in chapters
Specific Requirements and following.
Specification E-1381 refers to low level protocol; significant information for
ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments application can be found later on in this
document.
A.2 Product Perspective

Communication sessions with host computer can be started on ELITE/ELITE PRO
family instruments by operator request or automatically at session completion.
If the operator requires a manual download session, the instrument will open
communication with the host computer that will provide transmission of all test
orders.
If the operator requires an upload session, the instrument will transmit a subset of
sample results (identified by the user) stored in the instrument patient database or QC
database or Analytical Reference database.
If the instrument is properly configured, automatic downloading or uploading sessions
can be started by ELITE/ELITE PRO instrument.
Automatic downloading will occur at session start if host query is configured. In this
condition the instrument will request test orders for specific sample IDs recognized on
the sample tray.
The second condition will occur, if automatic uploading has been requested, at session
completion.
In case the communication session is not generated from the instrument, any host
computer message is ignored.
All information received by the host computer must be associated with a Sample ID
which is the primary key of the database. In addition to programmed tests a certain
amount of information can be associated with a Sample ID (patient data) and stored in
ELITE/ELITE PRO database. This information is optional.
The sample ID is the primary key to access information in the database.
If the checks fail, any downloading operations will be aborted. See Test Order
Downloading section.
At most 1000 samples can be stored in ELITE/ELITE PRO database; each sample can
have a maximum of 30 tests associated (double tests are considered as 3 tests).
The system behavior when these limits are exceeded is explained in the paragraph
Test Order Downloading.
If 1000 samples are present in the database, the FIFO (First In First Out) will not
accept additional samples during a Manual Downloading.
The test ordering operation, to identify the type of ordered test, by host computer must
refer to a computer code that is instrument specific. Refer to Test Order Downloading
for further details and to the Appendix at the end of this document for the test codes
table.
NOTE: for the downloading the Host should send to the ELITE/ELITE PRO string
information in single frame (single line) during the transmission or up to 240 bytes
maximum during the transmission.
Low level interface conforms to ASTM specification E-1381-91. The following
characteristics are supported and are configurable by Operator Interface:
Baud Rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38600

Character Length 8 bit
Parity No parity
Stop Bits 1
A.3 Data Link and Logical Layer

For the Data Link and Logical Layer the ASTM specification E-1381-91 has been
maintained as a reference. Protocol limits and constraints are those declared by the
standard.
To mention some of them, the data part of the frames exchanged between the
instrument and the host computer should be done as single frame. As a consequence
during transmission sessions specific routines provide the ability to divide large
records into multiple frames and during a reception session they re-build partial
frames in a single record. The application level has no evidence of this mechanism.
According to ASTM standard the following characters cannot be part of data records:
<SOH>, <STX>, <ETX>, <EOT>, <ENQ>, <ACK>, <DLE>, <NAK>, <SYN>,
<ETB>, <LF>, <DC1>, <DC2>, <DC3>, <DC4>.
Timeout and retry logic are those specified by the standard; the Low Level Clinical
Message State Diagram representing the implemented automatic is the reference.
In interrupt request status the instrument accept remote EOT.
A.4 Sessions
There are two types of sessions that the instrument handles with the ASTM interface:
the test orders download and the test results upload. These sessions can be initiated by
the operator or automatically activated by the instrument.
When the user/operator requests a download operation (Receive Command), the
instrument will send a request to the host for available test orders (all) or for test
orders requested for specific samples, and the host will answer with the test orders
available for the instrument.
Test results upload (Transmit Command) are initiated by the user or automatically by
the instrument at the same way. The host is not allowed to transmit unsolicited
messages, any type of inquiries or test orders not explicitly required by the instrument.
A.4.1 Message Header and Message Terminator Records

Following ASTM specification, each type of transaction between the instrument
(DTE) and the host computer (DCE) has two common records that are the Message
Header record and the Message Terminator record. These records open and close data
transmission between ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments and host computer.
Their fields are described in the following:
Message Header Record:
Record Type ID Always set to ‘H’

Delimiter Definition The 5 ASCII characters composing this field define the
type of delimiters that will be used in the following
records. See Appendix B for supported delimiters.
Message Control ID Not provided
Access Password Not provided
Sender Name or ID Set to ‘ACL9000’ when transmitting to host or
receiving. As an option, the ability to identify
univocally the instrument by means of an extension to
the instrument name is also supported: the name syntax
becomes ‘ACL9000-xx’ where xx is a two digit code in
the range 01-99.
The extension to the instrument name is user
configurable in the set-up environment.
The instrument ID is always ACL9000 independently
from the model; ELITE/ELITE PRO.
Sender Street Address Not provided
Reserved Fields Not provided
Sender Telephone Number Not provided
Characteristics of Sender Not provided
Receiver ID Must be set to ‘ACL9000’ when receiving from host.

Depending on the instrument set-up, the ability to
identify univocally the instrument by means of the
extension to the instrument name is also supported: the
name syntax becomes ‘ACL9000-xx’ where xx is a two
digit code in the range 01-99.
If the ID is different from the expected one, the session
is interrupted.
Comment or special Instructions Not provided
Processing ID Always set to ‘P’ meaning Production
Version No. Set to the current ASTM standard version = ‘1’
Date and Time of Message Format is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Example of message sent from the ELITE/ELITE PRO :

H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
Example of message sent from Host:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
Message Terminator Record:
Record Type ID always set to ‘L’

Sequence Number always set to ‘1’
Termination Code set to ‘N’ for normal termination and to ‘E’ for
abnormal termination while transmitting to host;
not considered for received data
Example of Terminator:
L|1|N<CR>
A.5 Test Order Downloading

Test order downloading is used to request test orders available on the host and to have
them on the instrument. This operation can be obtained in two ways: manually
opening a download session from the DMS environment or enabling on the
instrument the host query function.
In the first case the host will have to transmit to the instruments all pending test
requests; in the second case the instrument will automatically require specific
information for the samples placed on the sample tray and without any test requests.
Details for both modalities are explained in Receive Session from DMS and Host
Query paragraphs.
Subsections:
A.5.1 Receive Session from DMS
A.5.2 Host Query
A.5.3 Test Request Message
A.5.4 Test Order Message
A.5.1 Receive Session from DMS

The operator manually initiates the test order download from the DMS environment.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
The host sends usually all test orders for which it has not yet received results even if
they have been previously transmitted.
ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments will process each received test order to validate fields
supported; some information will be extracted from the received record while other
information will be ignored.
Only test orders related to patient samples are considered, if the required sample ID
does not exist in the patient database and the required sample ID is not used in the QC
database, a new record is created. If the database is full, the transmission session will
be aborted.
If the test orders are for a sample already existing in the sample data base, the new
orders will be added to the existing tests but all tests already ordered or performed
will remain unchanged.
If a test order with more than the maximum number of programmable tests is sent, the
request is rejected. The limit is 30 single tests or 10 double tests.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO
family instruments, it is rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using
a record containing the list of rejected test orders.
During a downloading session the listed error conditions can be detected, the
associated instrument behavior and actions are listed as well:
Error Condition Action User Message

Sample ID used in the QC data base Abort communication Sample ID already
used in the QC data
base
Bad Sample ID (long, unsupported Abort communication Invalid Sample ID
characters)
Data Base full Abort communication Patient Data Base is
full
Patient record has no associated test Abort communication Not identified sample
order record ID for patient data
Test order has no associated patient Abort communication No patient record for
record ordered tests
Instrument Identifier different from Abort communication Invalid instrument
ACL9000 or extended name identifier
Too many test requests for the same Reject test order -
sample ID
Unknown test request Reject test order -
Bad Test Reject test orders -
Illegal record format Abort communication Incorrect record
format in host
messages
All abort conditions imply that ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments will send to
the host computer a message with the reason for transmission interruption (see Reject
Test Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When
transmission abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will
follow (see Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ELITE/ELITE PRO Data Management System. It must be
observed that if any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that all sample
data have been rejected.
The set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal requests for the
same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ELITE/ELITE PRO limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.
NOTE: for the downloading the Host should send to the ELITE/ELITE PRO string
information in single frame (single line) during the transmission or up to 240 bytes
maximum during the transmission.
A.5.1.1 Test Request Message
The Test Request Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to start the test order
download session. It is composed from a Message Header record, a Request
Information record and a Message Terminator record.
The “Request Information record” requests from the host ALL test orders available
for the specific instrument.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record:
Record Type ID always set to ‘Q’

Sequence Number as defined by the standard set to ‘1’ when query is
sent
Starting Range ID Number set to the string ‘ALL’
Ending Range ID Number not provided
Universal Test ID not provided
Nature of Request Time Limit not provided
Beginning request Results Date and not provided
Time
Requesting Physician Name not provided
User Field #1 not provided
Request Information Status Code always set to ‘O’ (requesting test orders and
demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request

information record and message terminator record) is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|ALL||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
A.5.1.2 Test Order Message
To answer the ELITE/ELITE PRO Test Request Message, the host computer sends the
Test Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being requested
for each specified sample. The host computer may answer with one or more message;
each one contains one or more test order specifications. The test order specification
consists of a Patient Information record followed by one or more Test Order records.
The host can send for the same sample ID a Patient Information record followed by
many Test Order records or, for each test to be ordered, a pair composed by the
Patient Information record followed the Test Order record.
COMMENT: Record messages during downloading operations are ignored by
ELITE/ELITE PRO.
A.5.1.2.1 Patient Information Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following:

Patient Information Record:
Record Type ID Must be ‘P’

Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and then must increment
by one for each new Patient Information
record
Practice Assigned Patient ID Ignored
Laboratory Assigned Patient ID Stored, if available, as a string in the Patient
ID field of the sample record.
No checks are performed for this field and the
string will be truncated to 15 characters.
Patient ID #3 Ignored
Patient Name Stored, if available, as a unique string in the
‘name’ field of sample record considering only
the first two sub fields in this data field
(second and first name). The string will be
truncated to 30 characters. If a character not
supported is found (see Appendix for
supported characters), the patient name and
all the other strings in the same patient record
will be ignored.
If the patient name is not available 4
separators must be transmitted: ^^^^.
Mother’s maiden Name Ignored
Birth date Stored, if available. The data will be converted
and displayed in the following in according to
ELITE/ELITE PRO supported format.
Expected format, conforming to ASTM
standard, is YYYYMMDD
Patient Sex Stored if available. Allowed characters are
‘M’, ‘m’, ‘F’, ‘f’, ‘U’, ‘u’; any other character
is interpreted as ‘U’.
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin Ignored
Patient Address Ignored
Reserved Field Ignored
Patient Telephone Number Ignored
Attending Physician ID Ignored
Special Field #1 Ignored
Special Field #2 Ignored
Patient Height Ignored
Patient Weight Ignored
Patient’s Known or Suspected Ignored
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medications Ignored
Patient’s Diet Ignored

Practice Field #1 Ignored
Practice Field #2 Ignored
Admission and Discharged Dates Ignored
Admission Status Ignored
Location Stored if available as a free string in the
‘department’ field of sample record. The string
will be truncated to 30 characters. See
Appendix B for supported characters.
Nature of Alternative Diagnostic Ignored
Code and Classifiers
Alternative Diagnostic Code and Ignored
Classifiers
Patient Religion Ignored
Marital Status Ignored
Isolation Status Ignored
Language Ignored
Hospital Service Ignored
Hospital Institution Ignored
Dosage Category Ignored
A.5.1.2.2 Test Order Record

Test Order Record:
1. Record Type ID Must be ‘O’ (letter)

2. Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and then must
increment by one for each new test order
record for the same patient
3. Specimen ID This is the ELITE/ELITE PRO sample ID;
the field must be less than or equal to 15
characters and must be consistent with
rules on sample ID (ID already in use for
QC database are not legal). Non
conforming sample IDs will cause an abort
of the download process.
See Appendix B for ELITE/ELITE PRO
supported characters.
4. Instrument Specimen ID Ignored
5. Universal Test ID The field is composed of 4 parts; only the
Manufacturer’s Code component is used as
a 4 character code (user configurable on
board); unknown test ID will be rejected.
6. Priority If the field contains in any of the sub fields

the S char the sample ID will be
considered a priority sample; any
additional flag will be ignored. If the field
does not contain the S char or it is empty,
the sample will be identified as a routine
sample.
7. Requested/Ordered Date and Time Ignored
8. Specimen Collection Date and Time Ignored
9. Collection End Time Ignored
10. Collection Volume Ignored
11. Collector ID Ignored
12. Action Code Ignored
13. Danger Code Ignored
14. Relevant Clinical Information Ignored
15. Date/Time Specimen Received Ignored
16. Specimen Descriptor Ignored both fields
17. Ordering Physician Stored if available as a free string in the
‘physician’ field of sample record. The
string will be truncated to 30 characters.
See Appendix for supported characters.
18. Physician’s Telephone Number Ignored
19. User Field No. 1 Ignored
20. User Field No. 2 Ignored
21. Laboratory Field No. 1 Ignored
22. Laboratory Field No. 2 Ignored
23. Date/Time Results Reported or Last Ignored
Modified
24. Instrument Charge to Computer System Ignored
25. Instrument Section ID Ignored
26. Report Types Set to O (letter); other codes will cause
records rejection
27. Reserved Field Ignored
28. Location of Ward of Specimen Ignored
Collection
29. Hospital Information Flag Ignored
30. Specimen Service Ignored
31. Specimen Institution Ignored
An example for a complete test ordering is given by:

H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||ROSSI^MARIO^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP01||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR.
VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|5|SMP02||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
P|2||PTNT2||GIALLI^LUCA^^^||19551028|F||||||||||||||||||DEP
2||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP10||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Example of download without patient name:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||^^^^|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|LAURA01||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Note: Separators are always expected from Host and are always transmitted
independently from the information contained in the string.
A.5.2 Host Query

Host query is automatically activated by the instrument each time the system is
properly configured. Beginning the pre-analysis phase of a single test or profile or test
group, one or more samples have no type of test requests associated.
The instrument will send, using the requested information record, the sample IDs
requiring test programming and will accept only test orders for those sample IDs.
The instrument will accept for the queried samples any test orders independently by
the type of test which will be executed in the starting session.
The mechanism supported by ASTM requires sending to the host a Request
Information record for each sample ID or sending to the host a range of queried
sample IDs. The mechanism supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO is the first option, so
will be independent of the sorting system used by instrument or host computer on the
samples.
As a consequence the instrument will send a query for the first sample, will wait for
the host information and will send later a new query for the next samples (if any). All
the host query sessions will be organized in this manner.
Because the instrument is asking for information regarding a specific sample ID, it
will reject any type of information associated with different sample IDs.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
ELITE/ELITE PRO will process each received test order validating the fields that
ELITE/ELITE PRO supports; some information will be extracted from the received
record while other information will be ignored.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO it
will be rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using a record
containing the list of rejected test orders.
Host Query is only performed if the Sample ID is not located in the database for the
ACL system.
During a download session the listed error conditions can be detected, the associated
ELITE/ELITE PRO action is listed as well:
Error Condition Action User Message

Sample ID used in the QC data base Abort communication Sample ID already
used in the QC data
base
Bad Sample ID (long, unsupported Abort communication Invalid Sample ID
characters)
Data Base full Abort communication Patient Data Base is
full
Patient record has no associated test Abort communication Not identified sample
order record ID for patient data
Test order has no associated patient Abort communication No patient record for
record ordered tests
Instrument Identifier different from Abort communication Invalid instrument
ACL9000 or extended name identifier
Too many test requests for the same Reject test order -
sample ID
Unknown test request Reject test order -
Bad Test Reject test orders -
Illegal record format Abort communication Incorrect record
format in host
messages
All abort conditions imply that ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments will send to
the host computer a message with the reason of transmission interruption (see Reject
Test Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When
transmission abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will
follow (see Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ELITE/ELITE PRO Data Management System. It must be
observed that if any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that all the
sample data have been rejected.
The set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal requests for the
same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ELITE/ELITE PRO limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.
NOTE: If the Sample ID is not present at the Host level during the Host Query, the
Host will return only the Header and the terminator.
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
NOTE: If the Host requests a test that is disabled on the ELITE/ELITE PRO, the test
will not be programmed on the ELITE/ELITE PRO and a reject message of this type
will be returned back to the Host.
C|1|I|UKNOWN_T|PatientID^0080|I<CR>
A.5.3 Test Request Message

The Test Request Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to require information for
each specific sample that has no test orders in the instrument database. It is composed
from a Message Header, a Request Information and a Message Terminator record.
The Request Information record requests in this case information for one specific ID
at time. The ASTM protocol limits the number of Request Information records to one.
As a consequence the instrument will wait for the host answer before sending a
second Request Information record for a second sample.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record:
Record Type ID always set to ‘Q’

Sequence Number as defined by the standard set to ‘1’ when query is
sent
Starting Range ID Number set to the specific sample ID to require
information on; the meaningful component is the
second one
Ending Range ID Number not provided
Universal Test ID not provided
Nature of Request Time Limit not provided
Beginning request Results Date and not provided
Time
Requesting Physician Name not provided

Request Information Status Code always set to ‘O’ (requesting test orders and
demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request

information record and message terminator record) is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|^S001^||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Answer from Host:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19960210103256<CR>
P|1||||ROSSI^MARIO^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|S001||^^^0001|||||||||||^| DR. VERDI
||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|5|S001||^^^0002|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
A.5.4 Test Order Message

As an answer to the ELITE/ELITE PRO Test Request Message the host computer
sends the Test Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being
requested for the queried Sample ID.
See Test Order Message for details.
A.6 Rejected Test Order

At completion of download operations, or at completion of the download operation
for a single sample in the host query mechanism, ELITE/ELITE PRO can transmit a
message to inform host computer about rejected test orders and samples or about the
reasons for transmission interrupt.
The Rejected Test Order Message consists of a Message Header record followed by
one or more Comment records and completed by the Message Terminator Record. A
comment record will be transmitted for each rejected information.
It must be observed that if no legal information has been received, the download
process is interrupted and the rejected test order message will signal the reason for the
interruption.
If the download process has been completed normally, the possible following rejected
test order message will report no legal test orders.
Comment Record structure is described in the following table:
Record Type ID Always set to ‘C’

Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and then it will increment by one for each new
comment record
Comment Source Always set to ‘I’ (as ASTM: clinical instrument system)
Comment Text This field indicates the reason of the test order rejection. It is a
string with two components, each one can assume the reported
values:
Rejection Reason:
BAD_TEST: the transmitted test code is invalid
QC_MA_ID: the specified ID is already used as a material in the
QC
data base
BAD_S_ID: the specified ID is invalid
WRONG_ID: the host is sending information for a sample ID
different
from the expected one
PDB_FULL: patient data base is full
M_TEST_E: more tests than expected
UKNOWN_T: unknown test requested
INSTR_ID: invalid instrument identifier
NO_TESTS: no test ordered for patient record
NO_PATIE: no patient record for ordered test
BAD_RECO: incorrect record format
Identification: This string contains the identification of the sample
causing the problem; if a test order caused the problem the sample
ID and test ID are transmitted sequentially. The character used to
separate the rejection reason, and the two strings used for the
identification field is ‘|‘.
Lacking information will be signaled as “UNKNOWN”.
If BAD_RECO is the reason of the rejection the field will contain
the record number and the field number caused the failure.
Comment Type Always set to ‘I’ (as ASTM: instrument flag comment)
To summarize the possible values for the rejection reason and identification fields are
reported in the following table:
Rejection Transmission Identification: first Identification: second

Reason Interrupted sub_field sub_field
QC_MA_ID yes sample ID (causing the UNKNOWN
problem)
BAD_S_ID yes sample ID (causing the UNKNOWN
problem)
PDB_FULL yes sample ID (causing the test_ID
problem)
NO_TESTS yes UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
NO_PATIE yes sample ID (causing the test_ID
problem)
INSTR_ID yes UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
M_TEST_E no sample ID test ID (causing the problem)
UNKWOWN_ no sample ID test ID (causing the problem)
T
BAD_TEST no sample ID test ID (causing the problem)
BAD_RECO yes Record No. (debug purpose) Field No. (debug purpose)
An example for a complete rejection phase is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19982110103227<CR>
C|1|I|M_TEST_E|SMP01 ^010|I<CR>
C|2|I|BAD_TEST|SMP01 ^000|I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
A.7 Download Session Volumes

Approximate data volumes for download sessions is provided as a guide for
estimating the time required completing typical sessions. System latencies (both in
ELITE/ELITE PRO and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if the host has no test orders available for
ELITE/ELITE PRO. In this condition ELITE/ELITE PRO sends the test request
message, the host would respond with a message containing no test orders (only
message header and message terminator record).
In conditions in which the host has test orders for the instrument, the estimated data
volume is:
Test Request Message = Message Header (41) +17 + Message Terminator Record (6)
= 64
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +
Number of patient records (82 + 55 *number of ordered test)
+ Message Terminator Record (6)

Test Order Rejected = Message Header (41) +
+ 41 * number of rejected records
+ Message Terminator Record (6)
So considering the following situation: the host has 50 sample IDs to be download,
each one with 4 tests, consider 10 rejected records the data volume can be estimated
in:
Test Request Message = 64
Test Order Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 55 *4) + 6 = 15147
Test Order Rejected = 41 + (41 * 10) + 6 = 457
Total = 15668 characters
At 9600 “baud rate” and with no system overhead it would take approximately 17
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 27 seconds.
All estimations have been done using the maximum expected length for string fields.
A.8 Test Results Uploading

Test Result Uploading allows transmission of results of the tests performed on
ELITE/ELITE PRO to the host computer. Results, related to patient, QC samples and
Analytical Reference materials, are transmitted on explicit user request or
automatically at session completion.
In the first case the user must require the transmission command in the DMS or in the
QC or in the AR environment, select the patient samples or QC samples or AR set of
data to be transmitted (in according with one of the supported selection criteria) and
start operation.
In the second case the transmission will happen automatically at session completion
and the instrument will provide to upload patient and/or QC samples data and/or AR
data.
The type of data to be transferred during an automatic upload session depends upon
the instrument set-up (the automatic data transmission can be set to “patient samples
only” or “QC and patient samples” or “QC and AR patient samples”).
If upload is manually requested, all data are transmitted independently from the
transmission flag.
If transmission is performed automatically at session completion, the instrument will
upload for patient samples all the data available for the sample IDs just analyzed and
will upload, for QC data, the results just obtained.
From a general point of view the automatic data transmission of the patient samples is
equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in DMS, of patient samples
belonging to a specific load-list. While the automatic data transmission of the QC data
or AR data is equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in QC database or
AR database, or the data in a specified interval for the QC material present in the
load-list.
Considering that ELITE/ELITE PRO fills the strings used for Sample ID, department
and patient name with space characters (to align data), the host computer must ignore
space characters on the right of these fields.
If uploading is completed successfully for patient, QC samples and AR data, the
transmission flag associated to the single record will be updated from ‘L’ to ‘T’
(transmitted).
It must also to be underscored that on ELITE/ELITE PRO, modifications to sample
data already transmitted (such as adding of a new test result or modifications of
sample data) cause the transmission flag to change from ‘T’ to ‘L’.
It does not apply to QC or AR data because the only modification the user can request
on these data is to omit or to clear statistic. The effect of omit operation is to exclude
the data from the statistic but the data is not modified.
Modifications in the set-up values and note field do not modify the transmission status
of QC data and AR data.
While transmission is in progress the user will be updated on the number of the
sample being transmitted.
ELITE/ELITE PRO does not accept inquiries for test results.
A.9 Test Result Message

The Test Result Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to transmit any available test
results for a sample. All available test results will be transmitted for patient samples
even if data have been already transmitted partially.
The message consist of a Message Header record, a Patient Information record, one
or more pair Test Order records followed by one or more Results records (depending
upon the number of available test results and the number of results for each specific
test).
The Result record can be completed with a Comment record containing flags
associated to the executed test.
Tests are uploaded using the same sorting used on board. The complete set of
available test results is globally uploaded to the host computer independently by the
set of results defined as to show in the sample list.
In some conditions, depending by the instrument status (i.e. calibrated, not calibrated,
AR used, etc.) only a subset of the results supported by the test will be transmitted to
the host computer.
The Message Terminator record completes the transmitted data.
The same structure is used also to upload QC and AR data. In the following
paragraphs any differences in the way to treat patient, QC and AR data will be
underlined.
Subsections:
A.9.1 Patient Information Record
A.9.2 Test Order Record
A.9.3 Result Record
A.9.4 Comment Record

A.9.5 Error Codes
A.9.1 Patient Information Record

This information is transmitted to the host only if available on the instrument. The
Patient Information structure is:
Patient Information Record:
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR

Record Type ID Must be ‘P’ must be ‘P’
Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and then must begin with ‘1’ and
must increment by one for each then must increment by
new Patient Information record one for each new Patient
Information record
Practice Assigned Patient ID Not provided not provided
Laboratory Assigned Patient Provided if defined as a string not provided
ID containing up to 15 characters.
Patient ID #3 Not provided not provided
Patient Name Provided if known as a single not provided
string containing up to 30
characters
Mother’s Maiden Name Not provided not provided
Birth date Provided if known as a single not provided
string without any checks
Patient Sex Provided if known as a single not provided
character
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin Not provided not provided
Patient Address Not provided not provided
Reserved Field Not provided not provided
Patient Telephone Number Not provided not provided
Attending Physician ID Not provided not provided
Special Field #1 Not provided not provided
Special Field #2 Not provided not provided
Patient Height Not provided not provided
Patient Weight Not provided not provided
Patient’s Known or Suspected Not provided not provided
Diagnosis
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR

Patient Active Medications Not provided not provided
Patient’s Diet Not provided not provided
Practice Field #1 Not provided not provided
Practice Field #2 Not provided not provided
Admission and Discharged Not provided not provided
Dates
Admission Status Not provided not provided
Location Provided if known as a 30 not provided
characters free string
Nature of Alternative Not provided not provided

Diagnostic Code and
Classifiers
Alternative Diagnostic Code Not provided not provided
and Classifiers
Patient Religion Not provided not provided
Marital Status Not provided not provided
Isolation Status Not provided not provided
Language Not provided not provided
Hospital Service Not provided not provided
Hospital Institution Not provided not provided
Dosage Category Not provided not provided
A.9.2 Test Order Record

Test Order Record:
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR data

Record Type ID Must be ‘O’ Must be ‘O’
Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and then Must begin with ‘1’ and
must increment by one for then must increment by one
each new test order record for for each new test order
the same patient record for the same patient

Specimen ID Provided, is the Provided, is the
ELITE/ELITE PRO sample ELITE/ELITE PRO QC
ID. material ID for QC data; or
is the ‘AR’ keyword for AR
See Appendix for
data. See Appendix for
ELITE/ELITE PRO
ELITE/ELITE PRO
Instrument Specimen ID Not provided Not provided
Universal Test ID The field is composed of 4 The field is composed of 4
parts, only the parts; only the
Manufacturer’s Code Manufacturer’s Code
component is used as a 4 component is used as a 4
character code (host codes are character code (host codes
user configurable on board). are user configurable on
board).
Priority Provided if set as a ‘S’ char Not provided
for priority samples.
Requested/Ordered Not provided Not provided
Date/Time
Specimen Collection Date Not provided Not provided
and Time
Collection End Time Not provided Not provided
Collection Volume Not provided Not provided
Collector ID Not provided Not provided
Action Code Not provided Set to ‘Q’
Danger Code Not provided Not provided
Relevant Clinical Not provided Not provided
Information
Date and Time Specimen Not provided Not provided
Received
Specimen Descriptor Not provided both fields Not provided both fields
Ordering Physician Provided, if available, as a Not provided
string containing up to 30
chars
Physician’s Telephone Not provided Not provided
Number
User Field #1 Not provided Not provided
User Field #2 Not provided Not provided
Laboratory Field #1 Not provided Not provided

Laboratory Field #2 Not provided Not provided
Date/time Results Reported Not provided Not provided
or Last Modified
Instrument Charge to Not provided Not provided
Computer System
Instrument Section Not provided Not provided
Report Type Set to F Set to F
Reserved Field Not provided Not provided
Location of Ward of Not provided Not provided
specimen Collection
Hospital Information Flag Not provided Not provided
Specimen Service Not provided Not provided
Specimen Institution Not provided Not provided
A.9.3 Result Record

The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following table.
A result record is send to the host computer for each available test result. For double
tests all available single values will be transmitted to the host computer (no mean
values). Each result record will contain one of available test results.
Result Record:

Record Type ID Set to ‘R’ Set to ‘R’
Sequence Number Must begin with ‘1’ and Must begin with ‘1’ and
then must increment by one then must increment by one
for each result record for the for each result record for the
same patient test record for same patient test record for
the same patient record the same patient record
Universal Test ID The field is composed of 4 The field is composed of 4
parts, only the parts, only the
Manufacturer’s Code Manufacturer’s Code
component is used as a 4 component is used as a 4
character code (host codes character code (host codes
are user configurable on are user configurable on
board). board).

Data or Measurement Value The field contains the The field contains the
obtained numeric value or obtained numeric value or
qualitative message (Error qualitative message (Error
xx). All numerical results xx). All numerical results
are sent. * are sent. *
Units Provided if the previous Provided if the previous
field is a numeric value; is a field is a numeric value; is a
free string (see Appendix C free string (see Appendix C
for standard units) for standard units)
maximum number of maximum number of
characters is 8). characters is 8).
Reference range Not provided Not provided
Result Abnormal Flag Not provided Not provided
Nature of Abnormality Flag Not provided Not provided
Result Status Set to ‘F’ Set to ‘F’
Data of Change in Instrument Not provided Not provided
Normative Values or Units
Operator Identification Not provided Not provided
Date/Time Test Started Not provided Not provided
Date/Time Test Completed Execution time, string of the Execution time, string of the
type type
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Instrument Identification Not provided Not provided
* Specific ranges must be set at the Host level.
A.9.4 Comment Record

The Comment record allows integration of the transmitted test results with possible
error messages.
One or more comment records can follow the result records. Fields characterizing this
record are specified in the following.
Comment Record:
Record Type ID set to ‘C’

Sequence Number must begin with ‘1’ and then must increment by one
for each comment record
Comment Source set to ‘I’
Comment Text this field specifies the instrument errors (see table) as
a numeric code (2 characters) plus the associated
message
Comment Type set to ‘I’
A.9.5 Error Codes

TEMPERATURE WARNING
ROTOR STACK TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 41,

SLIDER TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 43,
REAGENT TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 45,
INCUBATION TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 49,
MECHANICAL WARNING
AUTOSAMPLER WARNING = 50,

ROTOR MOTOR WARNING = 51,
HORIZONTAL MOTOR WARNING = 52,
VERTICAL MOTOR WARNING = 53,
REAGENT DILUTOR WARNING = 54,
SAMPLE DILUTOR WARNING = 55,
PHOTOMETRIC COVER WARNING = 56,
STIRRER1_FAIL = 57,
STIRRER2_FAIL = 58,
STIRRER3_FAIL = 59,
STIRRER4_FAIL = 60,
LIQUID WARNING
LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (SAMPLE) = 73,

LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (REAGENT) = 74,
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (SAMPLE) = 75,
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (REAGENT) = 76,
MATERIAL_SHORT = 77,
MANDATORY_MATERIAL_SHORT = 78,
FLUSH_PRE_WARNING = 79,
FLUSH WARNING = 80,
CLEANING_NOT_PERFORMED = 83,
MISCELLANEOUS WARNING
COVER_OPEN_DURING_LOADING_OR_INCUBATION = 86,
TIMEOUT_EXPIRED_DURING_LOADING = 87,
ERRORS ON RESPONSE
OUTSIDE SCALE RANGE LOW = 98

OUTSIDE SCALE RANGE HIGH = 99
SATURATION_ERROR = 205,
FIRST_THRESHOLD_ERROR = 206,
SECOND_THRESHOLD_ERROR = 207,
DELTA_ERROR = 208,
INITIAL_SLOPE_ERROR = 209,
FINAL_SLOPE_ERROR = 210,
FINAL_REACTION CURVE ERROR = 211,
FIRST_DERIVATIVE_ERROR = 212,
SECOND_DERIVATIVE_ERROR = 213,
FIRST_PART_REACTION CURVE ERROR = 214,
ERRORS ON CALIBRATION CURVES
INSUFFICIENT_STANDARD POINTS IN ONE_SEGMENT = 215,

INVALID CURVE INSUFFICIENT DATA = 216,
NUMBER OF_STANDARD OUT OF RANGE = 217,
INVALID_TRANSLATION_OR_MANDATORY_STANDARD = 219,
INVALID_STD_INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES = 220,
INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES = 221,
INVALID_REPLICATES = 222,
CV_OUT_OF_RANGE = 223,
SLOPE OUT OF RANGE: INVALID CALIBRATION CURVE = 225,
R2_OUT_OF_RANGE = 226,
NOT MONOTONIC CURVE = 228,
ERRORS ON ANALYTICAL REFERENCE, QC, RATIO AND

NORMALIZED RATIO
AR_INVALID = 229,
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE = 230,
AR_NOT_CHECKED = 233,
DUPLICATE OUT OF RANGE = 239,
QC_INVALID = 240,
QC_OUT_OF_RANGE = 242,
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR = 249,
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR: S/Sa out of range = 250,
NORMALIZED RATIO ERROR: AR/Ara out of range = 251,
NORMALIZED RATIO: CALCULATION ERROR = 252,
STD_NOT_FOUND = 253,
AR_NOT_FOUND = 254,
ACTIVATE SAMPLE NOT_FOUND = 255,
ARa_NOT_FOUND = 256,
RATIO_NOT_FOUND = 257,
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE = 258,
AR_NULL = 259,
STD_NULL = 260,
SAMPLE_NULL = 262,
REF_NULL = 263,
AR_RATIO_ NULL_ = 264,
ACTIVATED_AR NULL_ = 265,
NULL_DIFFERENCE = 266,
Out of range indications referring to normal or test ranges are not transmitted to the
host computer. The * symbol (outside Normal Range) is presented only on the
Cumulative and Sample Reports.
An example for a complete test uploading sequence is given by:

Sample
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||BLU^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP01||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^0001|12.8|||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
P|2||PTNT1||Gialli^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP10||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^0001|14.5|s||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
QC
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|Normal C.||^^^0001|||||||Q||||^|||||||||||F||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
AR
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|AR||^^^0001|||||||Q||||^|||||||||||F||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
A.10 Upload Session Volumes

Approximate data volumes for upload sessions is provided as a guide for estimating
the time required to complete typical sessions. Obviously, system latencies (both in
ELITE/ELITE PRO and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if ELITE/ELITE PRO has no test results to be
transmitted; no data is sent and the data volume is zero.
In conditions in which the ELITE/ELITE PRO has results to be transmitted, the data
volume can be estimated on the Test Order and Test Result record size base.
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +
Number of patient records (82 + Results) + Message Terminator
Record (6)
Results = number of ordered test (55 + 60*number of test result + 56* number of error
messages)
Consider the following situation: ELITE/ELITE PRO has 50 sample IDs to be
uploaded each with 4 tests, each test with 3 results and each test with 2 flags, the data
volume can be estimated in:
Test Result Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 4(55 + 60*3 + 56*2)) + 6
Total = 69547 characters
At 9600 “baud rate” and with no system overhead it would take approximately 73
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 116 seconds.
A.11 Not Supported Records

The Scientific record and the Manufacturer Information record are not supported by
ELITE/ELITE PRO protocol.
As a consequence the instrument ignores any type of information they contain.
A.12 Transmission Abort

The download or upload transmission session can be interrupted for an explicit user
request detected on the instrument, because the host computer is not responding or
because the host computer required interruption of the transmission process.
Further, as reported above, the download process can be interrupted because an illegal
sample Identifier has been received. Instrument behavior in this particular condition
was defined in and Reject Test Orders.
ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments behavior in each of the listed conditions is
described in the following:
Condition Action
ELITE/ELITE PRO’s ELITE/ELITE PRO will signal the end of transmission to the host
operator requested stop and will discard any following messages. The host must consider
download process the interrupt request.
It must be emphasized that ELITE/ELITE PRO will signal the
transmission interruption with a message that is a rejected test
order message if any information has been rejected or with a
message header plus a message terminator record if no
information has been rejected.
ELITE/ELITE PRO ’s ELITE/ELITE PRO will complete the message in progress with
operator requested stop the message terminator and will not transmit any further test
upload process results.
Host computer is not During download and upload transmission sessions, operation by
responding ELITE/ELITE PRO is stopped. If download was in progress, no
rejected test messages will be transmitted.
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: “Host Computer not responding”
Host computer required Both during download and upload sessions, operation by
EOT ELITE/ELITE PRO is stopped. If download was in progress, no
rejected test messages will be transmitted.
It must be emphasized that the host computer must request the
transmission interruption with a message composed by a message
header plus a message terminator record.
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: “Host Computer required interrupt transmission”
Condition Action
Incorrect record format Transmission/reception is aborted and the user is informed:
“Incorrect format in host messages”
A.13 ELITE/ELITE PRO Supported Characters

Subsections:
A.13.1 Supported Characters for Sample ID
A.13.2 Supported Characters for Patient name, Department and Units
A.13.3 Supported Characters for Delimiters
A.13.1 Supported Characters for Sample ID

The ASCII set of characters considered is in the decimal range 32 to 126, because a
Sample ID can be accepted only if it contains at least one character different from a
space.
A.13.2 Supported Characters for Patient name, Department and

Units
Is the ASCII set of characters considered in the decimal range 32 to 255.
A.13.3 Supported Characters for Delimiters
! “ # $ %
& ‘ ( ) *
+ / : ; =
@ [ \ ] ^
_ { | } ~
ASCII character 127 is not allowed as delimiter.

Note: Separators are always expected from Host and are always transmitted
independently from the information contained in the string.
A.14 ELITE/ELITE PRO Supported Units
Unit Abbreviation
Time s
Activity %
Unit Abbreviation
Ratio R
International Normalized Ratio INR
NR
Concentration mg/dL
g/L
ng/mL
U/mL
µg/L
µmol/L
IU/mL
mg/L
ug/mL
Delta Optical Absorbance ∆ Abs

Delta ∆ (∆ ASCII code is 7F)
Activated Sample Sa Sa (Hex code EC)
Curve behavior Offset
Min
Max
Final
User defined free string containing up to 8
chars
NOTES: For duplicate (d) and extended duplicate (ed) tests only the individual
replicate results are sent to the host system. The mean value is not sent from the
ACL8/9/10000 system. This applies to all sample types including patient, QC and
Analytical reference.
Appendix B Bar Code Label Specification
Content
B.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 1
B.2 PURPOSE ....................................................................................................................... 1
B.3 DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................ 1
B.4 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................. 2
B.5 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 2
B.6 SUPPORTED CODES AND CHECKSUM TYPE...................................................................... 2
B.7 BARCODE SYMBOL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 3
B.8 BARCODE PARAMETERS ................................................................................................. 4
B.9 BARCODE LABEL POSITIONING ........................................................................................ 5
B.10 BARCODE LABEL DIMENSIONS ................................................................................... 5
B.1 Introduction
In the following sections the characteristics of the bar code labels that can be read
with the Welch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700 scanner installed on ACL 9000 family
instruments are described.
B.2 Purpose
Purpose of this document is to give indication of the scanner characteristics in terms
of readable codes, identify the requirements the barcode labels have to satisfy and
define constraints in terms of label positioning within ACL 9000 instrument.
B.3 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
WA Walch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700
Near Distance is the nearest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Far Distance is the farthtest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Scan Width is the length of the widest bar code that can be successfully
interpreted by the scanner.
Quiet Zone is the blank area located just before and just after the bar space
pattern.
Appendix B Page 1 of 5
B.4 References
Ref. 1 SCANTEAM 3700 - Technical Manual - Walch Allyn
B.5 General Description

The WA is a fixed mount CCD bar code scanner with integrated decoder for easy
integration into host equipment (ACL 9000 family instruments in our case).
The 3700 features Walch Allyn’s time-proven decoding algorithms in a micro-
processor-controlled bar code scanner/decoder and offers configurable operating
parameters.
The following mean features are available with every WA:
• High scan rate per second (100 is the standard)
• Flexible scan trigger configurations
• Decoder configurable for high security
• Scan voting to ensure bar code data integrity
• Ease of configuration through RS-322 interface
B.6 Supported Codes and Checksum Type
Code Type Checksum Type Data Digits

Code 128 No checksum up to 15
Code 39 Modulus 43 up to 15
No Checksum up to 15
Interleaved 2 of 5 USS - Modulus 10 up to 15
OPCC - Modulus 10 up to 15
No checksum up to 15
Codabar AIM - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits up to 15
NW7 - Modulus 11 up to 15
NW7 - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits up to 15
No Checksum up to 15
B.7 Barcode Symbol Specifications

All bar code symbols have to satisfy the appropriate AIM Uniform Symbology
Specification. In particular the following characteristics have to considered:
Background substrate
The barcode symbol should be printed on a material type that is reflective and has a
matte (not glossy) finish. A background diffuse reflectance of at least 70% to 80% is
suggested for optimum contrast.
Ink color and type
The ink type has to be compatible with 660 nm LEDs used in the scanner. The
barcode symbols inked bars should not exceed 10% reflectance at 660 nm that is
being used for reading, whether printed with black ink or colored ink.
Voids and Specks
The code has to be printed clearly, free of voids, specks, blemishes and lines which
could “fool” the scanner.
Definition
The bars in the barcode symbols should be well defined. Their edges should not be
rough or fuzzy, so that bar and spaces have the proper widths intended for the used
barcode symbology used. Definition should be sharp and consistent.
Tolerance
The ratio of the widths and spaces in a barcode symbol must conform to the
appropriate AIM barcode specifications and can cause problems if not correct
throughout the barcode. Problems can occur if bar edges are smeared or rough, or
when they exhibit voids.
B.8 Barcode Parameters

Parameters have to be considered in that context are:
• Density (bar code): refers to the number of cheracters in a linear inch of bar code.
• Ratio: refers to the ratio of the nominal wide element width to the nominal narrow
element width.
In order to ensure a good bar code reading (in addition to what indicated in the 2.2
section) the parameters above mentioned should be as follows:
• Density: not less 10 Mils
• Ratio: not less 2.5
These values are valid for all the above mentioned bar code types.
The relationship between reading distances, scan width and bar code density are
displayed in the following:
Near Far Distance Scan Width Scan Width Density

Distance (near (far (bar code)
distance) distance)
63.5 mm 114.5 mm 101.6 mm 152.4 mm 7.5 MIL
(290.83’’) (387.096’’)
(161.29’’) (258.064’’)
34.3 mm 130.3 mm 82.3 mm 178.3 mm 13 MIL
(87.122’’) (330.962’’) (209.042’’) (452.882’’)
In Appendix Decoder Zone Map the attached drawing defines the “decoder zone map”
for the data above displayed. The displayed graph has been experimentally obtained
from Welch Allyn Laboratories because the WA equipped for the IL requirement has
not a standard optics.
B.9 Barcode Label Positioning

In Appendix Barcode Label Dimension the attached drawing defines the barcode
labels dimensions and identifies constraints in positioning labels on vacutainers. The
13x75 vacutainers have been considered. The proposed barcode labels dimension and
positioning apply to all sample tray models. The following measurements are
reported:
Barcode label feature Dimension

Maximum label length (global label size) 52.6 mm (2.071”)
Maximum barcode length (printed area) 39.6 mm (1.559”)
Quite zone (white area before and after the printed area) 6.35 mm (0.256”)
Label position (it is identified as the label edge 58 mm (2.283”)
measured starting from the vacutainer lower part)
B.10 Barcode Label Dimensions
Label Length 52.6 mm max (2.071”)

Quite Zone Quite Zone
Barcode Length 39.6 mm max (1.559”)
6.5 mm (.256”) 6.5 mm (.256”)
Tube L standard - 13x75 mm Vacutainers
Label position 58 mm (2.283”)
Appendix C Interconnect Diagrams

4 3 2 1
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. # Description Date
3 REVISED PER CO 476441 2017-01-25
Pre-RoHS
D D
PN 00018200211
PCB ASSY USB I/O REAR PN 00018235610 Rotor Exchange Module
PANEL R.E.M. UPPER
INTERCONNECT BOARD PN 00008486937
PN 00018112131 U OPTICAL SENSOR SILOS
BARCODE SCANNER S J15 NOTE: HnPerconnecP
PN 00018200213 PN 00018200217 LOWER
HAND HELD B J18 P119
USB CABLE, ATOM-945, CPU&HDD GrMRing for APom-E4D
PN 00018112179 J14 FPU only
I/O PCB TO SBC UPGRADE W/SW 4.X P95 PN 00008486936
MOUSE OPTICAL USB P OPTICAL SENSOR SILOS
J13 J10 J10 P118
2 BUTTON W/WHEEL O PN 00018110925 UPPER
R Mouse PN 00018100203 J19 P/N 00018110931
CABLE ASSY
T J12 ELITE ATOM 945 CPU W/O HDD MONITOR, LCD 12-
VGA TOUCH SCREEN PN 00018110860
S J13 INCH BLACK
Host CPU Module J11 PN 00018110926 P112 ELECTROMAGNET,
CABLE ASSY ACL 9000
J9 J7
SERIAL PORTS RS232
J8 J17 TOUCHSCREEN PN 00018110860
J3 PN 00019085621
P113 ELECTROMAGNET,
+5VDGT CABLE ASSY,
CN1/ CN10/ PN ACL 9000
ETHERNET +12VDGT J7 TOUCHSCREEN POWER
J5 J6 J5 J15 Arcnet SATA1 00018200212 P96
(NON-FUNCTIONING) LCD Voltage PN 00018110860
Isolator P114 ELECTROMAGNET,
PARALLEL PRINTER J2 J1 ACL 9000
PN 00018235670 PN
PN 00006501120 PN PN 00018100070 FAN ASSY P116 00018110894
SILOS HALL SENSOR
KEYBOARD, USA J4 J3 00018235350 INSTRUMENT, ACL 9000 ROTOR
BD
PKG ACL 9000 Speaker BD STACK ASSY
ASSY PN 00018200216
J11 USB CABLE PANEL CABLE ASSY, SILOS
ASSY,SYSTEM SATA HDD P97 P117 NS
RESISTOR PAD &
W/ELITE SW 4.X THERMISTOR
PN 00018235620
P30 P29 P31 P12 R.E.M. LOWER
+5VDGT INTERCONNECT BOARD
P6
P28 P27
Mother Board +12VDGT CPU SLAVE BD #2
P32 SLIDE RESISTOR PAD
P1 P2 P111 NS
P/N 00018235570 P102 & THERMISTOR
P20
C K1 P11
PN 00008486944 PN 00018235530 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200206 RoHS
PN 00008243300
C
CHROM COAXIAL CABLE P103
PN +5VDGT +5VDGT BUS Slave ROTOR TRANSPORT
00018200215 16 bit P33 MOTOR
Line In K6 +12VDGT +12VDGT PN 00008486946
POWER +15VANA +15VANA COAG SENSOR WITH CABLE PN 00018235680
MODULE INLET -15VANA -15VANA
P23 P106 DUAL CHANNEL OPT.
PCB, ACQUISITION & SENSOR BD #3
SWIT. TRANSPORT
P3 P4 P100 MTR
PN K2 P13 P19
ROTOR ARM
00018235660 +9VPW +9VPW PN 00018235540 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200207 RoHS P104 NS
+12VPW +12VPW HORIZ MOTOR
SWITCHING
POWER PN 00018110853
PN
00018102181 SUPPLY REM BOARD #4 ELITE PRO ONLY PN 00018235680 ROTOR
K3 P107 EXHANGE
HALOGEN LAMP BOARD +6VLAMP
P14 P5 P6
DUAL CHANNEL OPT.
MODULE ASSY
+70VPW P18 SWIT. HORIZ MTR
+70VPW LDOCMPP1639
PN 00018235600 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200208 RoHS
P105 NS ROTOR ARM
VERT MOTOR
PCB, MOTORS #5
PN 00018235640 PN 00018235650
LIQUID LEVEL NEEDLE & WASH-R SENSOR PN 00018235680
P7 P8
DETECTION PCB INTERCONNECT BOARD DUAL CHANNEL OPT.
P101 P108
PN 00018235550 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200210 RoHS SWIT. VERT MTR
P78 PN 00019085616 P79 P89 PN 00018100068 P88
KIT, LLD CABLE CABLE ASSY, FLAT, LIQUID PN 00008486947
REPLACEMENT SENSOR P109 OPTICAL SENSOR
PCB PHOTOMETRIC & TEMP CONTROL BD #6
J2 P87 ROTOR WASTE FULL
P9 P10
P16 P15 P22 P21 PN 00018235561 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200209 RoHS PN 00008486960
P110
P17 P25 P24 ROTOR WASTE MICRO
PN 00018110840 SWITCH ASSY
PN 0001810843
NEEDLE BLOCK REFERENCE EMULSION
LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR SENSOR
COAG COAXIAL CABLE

B B
PN 00018235580 LOADING AREA INTERCONNECTION BD PN 00018235630 PCB, PHOTOMETRIC INTERCONNECT CHROM COAXIAL CABLE
BD ASSY
T80 T70 T130 T90 P140 P141
T120
PN 00008486944
CHROM COAXIAL
P82 P84 P81 P83 P85 P86 P73 P74 P76 P71 P72 P92 P93 P91 P94 P142 P147 P143 P144 P146 P145 P148 CABLE
P131 P132 P121 P122 P123 P124 P126 P135 P125
P75
PN 00018235690
FAN CONTROL BOARD PN 00018110847
PN 00018110634 PN PN PN
NS NS NS PN 1 2 3 4 ROTOR COVER PN
PELTIER 2 ASSY 00008243300 00008243300 NS 00008262700
`
PN 00008486938 SAMPLE ARM SAMPLE ARM MOTOR ASSY 00018102443 CHROM SENSOR
SAMPLE DILUTOR P127
REAGENT AUTOSAMPLER 00018200080 AUTOSAMPLER HORIZ. VERT ACL 9000 BRUSHES BD
MOTOR PN 00018110835 MOTOR,
DILUTOR MOTOR MOTOR ELITE INTERIOR INTERNAL RING PN 00018102128 MOTOR MOTOR OR ASSY
STIRRER MOTOR ROTOR HOLDER
BCR CABLE SENSOR PELTIER TEMP P128 P129 PN 00008486946
PN 00018110648
PN PN ETHERNET SENSOR PN PN PN 0007090800 COAG SENSOR WITH
PN PN 00018102128 ROTOR HOLDER
00007090700 00007090700 PN PN 00018235680 00018235680 DUAL CHANNEL CABLE
00018235680 PELTIER COVER MOTOR
SINGLE SINGLE 00018110838 00018110838 DUAL CHANNEL DUAL CHANNEL OPTICAL SWITCH
DUAL CHANNEL PN TEMPERATURE ASSY
CHANNEL CHANNEL DILUTOR DILUTOR PN 00018110655 OPTICAL OPTICAL ROTOR H.M. PN PN 00006721805
OPT. SWIT. ASSY 00018200214 SENSOR ACL 10000
Optical Switch OPTICAL ELECTROVALVE ELECTROVALVE FAN ASSY ACL SWITCH HORZ SWITCH VERT 00018102515 COAGULIMETRIC
A PN PN PN 00007090800
SWITCH 3-WAY 3-WAY AUTOSAMPLER 10000 PN M. PN 00018110802 LED SOCKET FIBER OPTIC
REAGENT MTR 00019069200 PN 00018100072 M. DUAL CHANNEL
REAGENT SAMPLE PN 000110830 EXTERNAL P/N 00018110834 PELTIER #1 ASSY 00018100073 00018110071 ROTOR COVER ASSY
SAMPLE MTR P/N 00019085607 OPTICAL SWITCH ASSY, ACL 9000
Autosampler BARCODE RING SENSOR FAN ASSY FAN ASSY FAN ASSY SENSOR
NOTE: PELTIER 2 ASSY is not TIP MOVEMENT ASSY UNIVERSAL R. COVER M. PN 00018110850
Movement Assembly READER ASSY SECONDARY, ACL PELTIER, ACL AUXILIARY,
on the ELITE ROTOR HOLDER MOVEMENT
PN 00019085647 DILUTOR CHAMBER WITH ELECTROVALVES (Autosampler Module) (internal) 9000 9000 ACL 9000 Analysis Compartment Module
Legend
NS NOT SALEABLE
A DESCRIPTION PROVIDED FOR

A
TROUBLESHOOTING PURPOSES
ONLY!
Instrumentation Checked: Date: 2016-02-11
Laboratory
DitlGr ELITE/ELITE PRO INTERCONN DWG - RoHS

4I 3
Z 1art CTIAGrr E
DrawMr JPETTERMAN
EC
4C L0018200228
4 V
3
FNrIatr BiBrNsNEt A H
VisiN N/A N 0F 1
- E
E ED
4 3 2 1
Appendix C Page 1 of 2
4 3 2 1
EIION ITOY
ev. # Description Date
2 EIED PE CO 476441 2017-01-25
RoHS
D D
PN 00018112070
PN 00018235610 Rotor Exchange Module
PCB ASSY USB I/O REAR
R.E.M. UPPER
PANEL
PN 00018112131 INTERCONNECT BOARD PN 00008486937
U
BARCODE SCANNER S J15
PN 00019069991 PN 00018112023 NOTE: HnPerconnecP OPTICAL SENSOR SILOS
HAND HELD B PN 00018112056 ATOM-945 CPU&HDD PENTIUM 266MHz CPU MASTER GrMRing for APom- LOWER
J18 UPGRADE W/SW 3.X BOARD #1 P119
J14 CABLE, USB PENTIUM E4D FPU only PN 00008486936
PN 00018112179 P95
P TO INTERFACE PCB OPTICAL SENSOR SILOS
MOUSE OPTICAL USB J10
O J13 PN 00018235520 PN 00018110925 P118
2 BUTTON W/WHEEL J10 PN 00018100077 PN 00018110931
R PC 104 BOARD (USED WITH J19 CABLE ASSY
Mouse ELITE ATOM 945 CPU W/O HDD MONITOR, LCD 12- 00018110860
PN 00019054708 T J12 NON ATOM 945 CPU) VGA TOUCH SCREEN INCH BEIGE ELECTROMAGNET,
USB Extension cable S J13
J11 PN 00018110926 P112 ACL 9000
(ATOM 945 CPU Host CPU Module CABLE ASSY
configuration only) J9 J7
SERIAL PORTS RS232 00018110860
J8 J17 TOUCHSCREEN
J3 ELECTROMAGNET,
+5VDGT P113 ACL 9000
CN1/ CN10/ PN 00019085621
ETHERNET +12VDGT J7
J5 J6 J5 J15 Arcnet SATA1 CABLE ASSY, P96
(NON-FUNCTIONING) 00018110860
TOUCHSCREEN POWER ELECTROMAGNET,
P114 ACL 9000
PARALLEL PRINTER J2 J1
PN
PN 00018235670 00018110894
PN 00006501120 PN PN 00018100070 FAN ASSY P116 SILOS HALL SENSOR ROTOR
KEYBOARD, USA J4 J3 00018235350 INSTRUMENT, ACL 9000 BD STACK ASSY
PKG ACL 9000 SPEAKER BD
ASSY PN 00006501110 CABLE ASSY, SILOS
J11 HDD FLOPPY DISK P97 P117 NS RESISTOR PAD &
SEE LEGEND DRIVE THERMISTOR
PN 00018235620
P30 P29 P31 R.E.M. LOWER
P12
INTERCONNECT BOARD
+5VDGT P6
P28 P27
Mother Board +12VDGT CPU Slave Board
P32 SLIDE RESISTOR PAD
P1 P2 P111
PN 00018235570 P102 NS
& THERMISTOR
C C
PN 00018235530 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200206 RoHS P20
PN PN PN 00008486944 PN 00008243300
00019085602 00019035500 K1 P11 CHROM COAXIAL CABLE P103 ROTOR TRANSPORT
POWER ENTRY POWER LINE +5VDGT +5VDGT BUS Slave
Line In P33 MOTOR
MODULE FILTER K6 +12VDGT +12VDGT PN 00008486946 16 bit
ASSEMBLY +15VANA +15VANA COAG SENSOR WITH CABLE PN 00018235680
-15VANA -15VANA DUAL CHANNEL OPT.
PCB ACQUISITION & SENSOR BOARD P23 P106
SWIT. TRANSPORT
P3 P4 P100 MTR
PN P19
K2 P13
00018235660 +9VPW +9VPW PN 00018235540 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200207 RoHS P104
ROTOR ARM
NS
SWITCHING +12VPW +12VPW HORIZ MOTOR
POWER PN 00018110853
PN SUPPLY REM BOARD (ELITE PRO ONLY) ROTOR
00018102181 PN 00018235680
K3 P107 DUAL CHANNEL OPT. EXHANGE
HALOGEN LAMP P14 P5
LDOCMPP1639 P6
+6VLAMP SWIT. HORIZ MTR MODULE ASSY
+70VPW P18
+70VPW
PN 00018235600 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200208 RoHS
P105 ROTOR ARM
NS
VERT MOTOR
PCB, Motor #5 ACL 9000
PN 00018235640 PN 00018235650
NEEDLE & WASH-R SENSOR P7 P8
LIQUID LEVEL PN 00018235680
DETECTION PCB INTERCONNECT BOARD DUAL CHANNEL OPT.
P101 P108
PN 00018235550 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200210 RoHS SWIT. VERT MTR
PN 00019085616 PN 00018100068
P78 P79 P89 P88
KIT, LLD CABLE CABLE ASSY, FLAT, LIQUID PN 00008486947
REPLACEMENT SENSOR P109 OPTICAL SENSOR
PCB, PHOTOMETRIC & TEMPERATURE CONTROL BD
J2 P87 ROTOR WASTE FULL
P9 P10
P16 P15 P22 P21 PN 00018235561 PRE-RoHS PN 00018200209 RoHS PN 00008486960
P110
P17 P25 P24 ROTOR WASTE MICRO
PN 0001810843 PN 00018110840 SWITCH ASSY
NEEDLE BLOCK REFERENCE EMULSION
LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR SENSOR
B B
COAG COAXIAL CABLE
PN 00018235580 LOADING AREA INTERCONNECTION BD PN 00018235630 PCB, PHOTOMETRIC CHROM COAXIAL CABLE
INTERCONNECT BD ASSY
T80 T70 T130 T90 P140 P141
T120
P/N 00008486944
P82 P84 P81 P83 P85 P86 P73 P74 P76 P71 P72 P131 P132 P92 P93 P91 P94 P142 P147 P143 P144 P146 P145 P148 CHROM COAXIAL
P121 P122 P123 P124 P126 P135 P125
P75 CABLE
PN 00018235690
FAN CONTROL BOARD PN PN PN 00018110847 PN P/N
NS NS PN 00018110634 2 3 4 NS
NS 1 00008243300 00008243300 ROTOR COVER 00018102443 00008262700
`
PN PELTIER 2 ASSY P127 SAMPLE SAMPLE MOTOR ASSY BRUSHES CHROM SENSOR
AUTOSAMPLER PN
REAGENT SAMPLE DILUTOR 00018200080 ARM HORIZ. ARM VERT. MOTOR, ACL 9000 ASSY BD
MOTOR 00008486938 PN 00018110835
DILUTOR MOTOR MOTOR ELITE INTERIOR PN 00018102128 MOTOR MOTOR ROTOR HOLDER OR
AUTOSAMPLER STIRRER MOTOR P128 P129 PN 00008486946
BCR CABLE PELTIER TEMP PN 00018110648
PN INTERNAL RING PN 0007090800 COAG SENSOR WITH
PN PN ETHERNET SENSOR PN ROTOR HOLDER
SENSOR PN 00018102128 PN DUAL CHANNEL CABLE
PN 00007090700 PN 00018110838 00018235680 00018235680
PELTIER 00018235680 OPTICAL SWITCH COVER MOTOR
00007090700 SINGLE 00018110838 DILUTOR DUAL CHANNEL DUAL CHANNEL
PN 00018110655 TEMPERATURE DUAL CHANNEL ROTOR H.M. ASSY
SINGLE CHANNEL DILUTOR ELECTROVALVE OPT. SWIT. ASSY OPTICAL PN 00018102515 PN 00006721805
FAN ASSY ACL SENSOR OPTICAL ACL 10000
CHANNEL OPTICAL ELECTROVALVE 3-WAY A PN PN SWITCH HORZ PN 00007090800 LED SOCKET COAGULIMETRIC
10000 SWITCH VERT
Optical Switch SWITCH 3-WAY SAMPLE PN 000110830 00019069200 00008486939 PN PN M. DUAL CHANNEL PN 00018110802 ASSY, ACL 9000 FIBER OPTIC
PN 00018100072 M.
REAGENT MTR SAMPLE MTR REAGENT Autosampler BARCODE AUTOSAMPLER 00018100073 00018110071 OPTICAL SWITCH ROTOR COVER ASSY
PN 00018110834 PELTIER #1 ASSY FAN ASSY P/N 00019085607
Movement Assembly READER ASSY EXTERNAL NOTE: PELTIER 2 ASSY is not FAN ASSY FAN ASSY R. COVER M. SENSOR
PN 00019085647 DILUTOR CHAMBER WITH ELECTROVALVES SECONDARY, ACL TIP MOVEMENT ASSY UNIVERSAL
(Autosampler Module) (internal) RING SENSOR on the ELITE PN 00018110850 ROTOR HOLDER MOVEMENT ASSY
9000 PELTIER, ACL AUXILIARY, Analysis Compartment Module
9000 ACL 9000
Legend
NOT SALEABLE
NS
A DESCRIPTION PROVIDED FOR A
TROUBLESHOOTING PURPOSES
ONLY!
Instrumentation Checked: Date: 2016-02-11
Laboratory
PN 00019085689
HARDDRIVE WITH ACL
TiPle: ELITE/ELITE PRO INTERCONN DWG -
ELITE/ELITE PRO SW PRE RoHS
PN 00019085689 H E
PMrP NumNer:
S/S ASSY, SYSTEM SATA GrMRn: JPETTERMAN E 
HDD, W/ELITE SW 3.X
F L0018200229 2
ormMP: MicrosofP F E
isio N/A 1 O 1
AIE ET
4 3 2 1
Appendix C Page 2 of 2
Appendix D Utilities
The Utility portion of the ACL Elite/Elite Pro software groups all functions related to
saving data and handling the ACL software.
D.1 UTILITY SUBMENU...................................................................................................................... 1
D.2 UTILITY – UPGRADE IL LIBRARY ............................................................................................... 1
D.3 UTILITY – BACKUP AND RESTORE .............................................................................................. 2
D.4 UTILITY – ARCHIVE .................................................................................................................... 4
D.5 UTILITY – SOFTWARE – SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION .............................................................. 5
D.6 UTILITY – SOFTWARE – SOFTWARE UPLOAD/UPGRADE ......................................................... 6
D.7 UTILITY – SAVE ROTOR MAP...................................................................................................... 7
D.8 UTILITY – SAVE TRACE FILE ...................................................................................................... 8
D.9 UTILITY – TEST/MATERIAL – BACKUP AND UPLOAD.................................................................. 8
D.10 ELITE ALL-IN-ONE UTILITY .................................................................................................... 10
D.1 UTILITY Submenu

Press the UTILITY button on the menu bar to access all utility options.
D.2 UTILITY – Upgrade IL Library

This utility is used to upgrade the IL tests library. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
The screen indicates to insert the USB storage device (flash drive) containing the IL
Library Upgrade into a USB port and or the IL library diskette into the floppy disk
drive and press continue. See Section 1.4.16 - USB Port for All-In-One Utility on
page 40 for location of the USB port.
At the end of the IL Library Upgrade all modifications are listed on the screen. The
modifications can also be printed on a report.
Appendix D Page 1 of 13
D.3 UTILITY – Backup and Restore

Use this screen to backup system configuration settings and the patient data on the
instrument or restore a backup.
This section assumes you have a device with a USB port and you use that port for
all download and upload procedures. Refer to earlier versions of the ACL
Elite/Elite Pro Operator's Manual for specific instructions on backing up data to
and restoring data from a floppy diskette if yourinstrument has a disk drive.
WARNINGS:
• To avoid infecting the instrument with a software virus, use only the USB
storage devices (flash drives) supplied with the instrument. These storage
devices are formatted to FAT* standard. The NTFS# standard is not
supported.
FAT* = File Allocation Table. Format includes FAT, FAT32.
NTFS# = New Technology File System.
• You can back up an ACL Elite and restore it to an ACL Elite Pro. However
you cannot backup an ACL Elite Pro and restore it to an ACL ELite.
NOTE: For all Backup and Restore operations, the Elite All-In-One Utility flash drive
is used as the storage device. The Elite All-In-One Utility maintenance programs
cannot be accessed from the ELITE User Interface.
Data is backed up to and restored from the aclbckup file located in the root directory
of the All-In-One Utility USB storage device.
Patient data includes:
• Patient demographic information
• Sample IDs
• Patient test results
• Clot curves
Configuration settings include:
• Host
• Printer
• Barcode, internal and external
• Keyboard
• Tests, including QC, default and reflex tests
• Profiles
• Test groups
• Liquids
• Interference table
• Analytical Reference settings
D.3.1 Creating a Backup File

WARNINGS:
• Each time the instrument performs a backup, it creates a backup file named
aclbckup (not case-sensitive, with no extension). If a file named aclbckup
currently exists on the All-In-One Utility USB storage device (root directory),
the instrument will overwrite this file during the backup operation.
• To prevent loss of data, IL recommends moving the previous backup file from
the USB storage device to another permanent storage media or computer, and
to rename the backup file with the date and instrument serial number.
1. Connect the All-In-One Utility storage device to one of the USB ports located
on the front or rear of the instrument.
2. Select Utility > Backup / Restore in the Elite menu bar.
3. Select Backup on the Backup/Restore screen.
4. When the backup operation completes, move the backup file from the All-In-
One Utility USB storage device to another permanent storage device or
computer, and append the date and instrument serial number to the backup
filename.
D.3.2 Restoring a Backup File

NOTE: In order to prevent loss of data it is important to understand the following
types of restore options available on the ACL ELITE:
• Configuration Restore – Restores only the instrument configuration settings.
This operation does not restore patient data, and will overwrite the existing
configuration settings on the instrument. The filename of the backup file to
restore must be: aclbckup (no extension).
• Full Restore – Restores both instrument configuration settings and patient data
to the analyzer. This operation overwrites existing configuration settings and
patient results on the instrument. The filename of the backup file to restore
must be: aclbckup (no extension).
1. Copy the backup file you want to restore to the All-In-One Utility USB
storage device and rename it to aclbckup (not case-sensitive, with no
extension).
2. Connect the All-In-One Utility storage device with the aclbckup backup file to
one of the USB ports located on the front of the instrument.
3. Select Utility > Backup / Restore in the Elite menu bar.
4. Select the appropriate button on the Backup/Restore screen.
Options:
• Backup – Saves both patient data and the instrument configuration settings.
• View Backup Date – Displays the date when backup file was created.
• Configuration Restore – Restores only the instrument configuration settings.
This operation does not restore patient data, and will overwrite the existing
configuration settings on the instrument. The filename of the backup file to
restore must be: aclbckup (no extension).
• Full Restore – Restores both instrument configuration settings and patient data
to the analyzer. This operation overwrites existing configuration settings and
patient results on the instrument. The filename of the backup file to restore
must be: aclbckup (no extension).
• Storage Media – Displays the USB storage device where the aclbckup backup
file resides.
• Green check ( )
– Closes the screen.
D.4 UTILITY – Archive

This utility is used to copy/transfer data to an external storage media.
Four checkboxes allow selection of the set of data to be copied/transferred:

• PATIENT DATA (Sample Entry date range is selectable)
Patient data is archived based upon the sample entry date and not the date the
sample was analyzed.
• QC DATA (date range, QC liquid, and tests are selectable)
• AR DATA (date range and tests are selectable)
• CAL DATA (tests are selectable)
Enabling the checkbox Remove Data After Archive will delete the selected data for
completed samples from the ACL database.
To start the archiving procedure, press the START button.
The file name created by the instrument is composed of two letters and six numerical
characters: the two letters identify the kind of selection made by the operator (CD =
Calibration Data, QC = Quality Control, PD = Patient Data, AR = Analytical
Reference), the numbers correspond to the date when this operation is carried out
(ddmmyy). The file extension is .000. These files are viewable using common
programs capable of reading text data.
The Data archived includes the following: test name, patient name with related
demographics, results, flags and calibration curve parameters, depending on the
selection made.
WARNING: Archived data cannot be restored back to the ACL Elite/Elite Pro.
D.5 UTILITY – SOFTWARE – Software Identification

Selecting the Utility button on the menu bar and selecting Software Identification
opens the SW Identification screen.
The following information can be viewed but not edited on this screen:
• MASTER SW IDENTIFICATION
• SLAVE SW IDENTIFICATION
• REM SW IDENTIFICATION (Not available on the ACL Elite)
• IL TEST LIBRARY
The Confirm button leaves the screen and the system goes back to the Main screen.
D.6 UTILITY – SOFTWARE – Software

Upload/Upgrade
Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade the instrument software when a new
release becomes available.
To begin:
1. Select the software to upload and install (Slave, Master or REM).
2. Connect the USB media device containing the upgrade to the instrument.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
The procedure to load a new software revision is done in two steps for each of the
three areas of the software (Slave, Master and REM).
1. The software Upload operation copies the files on the USB media device to
the Elite hard drive.
2. The software Upgrade operation installs the software on the system from the
Elite hard drive.
Master Upload and Upgrade*
First operation is the Master Upload (copying information to the Elite hard drive):
1. Connect the USB media device containing the master upgrade to the
instrument. Select Master Upload and continue.
2. When the Upload procedure is complete, select Master Upgrade (software
installation from the Elite hard drive ) and continue.
Slave Upload and Upgrade*
Second operation is the Slave Upload (copying information to the Elite hard drive ):
1. Connect the USB media device containing the slave upgrade to the instrument.
Select Slave Upload and continue.
2. When the Upload procedure is complete, select Slave Upgrade (software
installation from the Elite hard drive) and continue.
REM Upload and Upgrade*
Third operation is the REM Upload (copying information to the Elite hard drive ).
Connect the USB media device containing the REM upgrade to the instrument. Select
REM Upload and continue.
When the Upload procedure is complete, select REM Upgrade (software installation
from the Elite hard drive) and continue.
*Each Upgrade kit includes detailed instructions that supercede the above
instructions, if different.
At the end of each operation please verify that the Software Identification reports the
correct revision number.
WARNING: Follow the Upgrade package instructions to perform Upload and
Upgrade operations.
D.7 UTILITY – Save Rotor Map

Selecting the Utility button on the menu bar and selecting Save Rotor Map, opens the
Save Last Rotor screen shown below.
This utility is used to save the analysis raw data to an external storage media. The
system retains the raw data for all testing performed for the last 31 days.
The user can type the file name and select the file format by checking the appropriate
checkbox.
DAT files are only compatible for use with the Windows Research Program.
NOTE: The DAT file is only available if one test (up to 19 samples maximum) is
executed on the rotor. If more tests are executed on the same rotor the DAT file option
cannot be used.
NOTE: IL recommends saving data to TXT files. TXT files are ASCII files
compatible with text editors and spreadsheets (i.e., MS-Word or MS-Excel).
A maximum of 8 characters can be used for file name. Do not enter the filename
extension when entering a file name. The extension will automatically be added
depending upon the checkbox selected (TXT or DAT).
The file name format is: RMdxxhyy
• xx = day of the month the run was performed
• yy = hour of the day the run was performed
Insert the media to save the file to and press Continue. The Cancel button will exit to
the main screen.
D.8 UTILITY – Save Trace File

This utility is used to save all the operations performed by the instrument.
This utility is used for troubleshooting purposes in case a software defect may appear
(i.e. database error, system lockups, etc.).
The system saves up to 31 trace files, one for each day for the past 31 days.
Type the file name using the following format: Trace_XX.txt. Using a file name
already saved will overwrite the previous file.
XX is the day of the month you want to save the trace on.
For example, to save the trace for the 10th day type: Trace_10.txt
In case the system may need to be rebooted, the trace file can still be performed after
restarting the analyzer.
Select available storage media for your system
NOTE: The trace file will only monitor internal software or database errors. A trace
file does not include information about abnormal results.
D.9 UTILITY – Test/Material – Backup and Upload

This feature allows single material and test definitions to be saved and uploaded.
Selecting the Backup option from the menu displays the following screen:
• The Test/Material drop down box allows you to select a material ID, Test ID
or Test Group to backup.
• The Test/Material list below the selection will then display either the material
IDs, Tests or Test Group based upon the above selection.
• In the Filename box enter the filename (8 characters maximum with no
extension needed) Select desired storage media available for your system.
• Press the Confirm button to start the backup or the Cancel button to exit the
screen.
• Selecting the Upload option from the menu displays the following Upload
Test/Material screen.
NOTE: Only user-defined Materials, Tests and Test Groups can be backed up. Users
cannot backup IL-defined Materials, Tests and Test Groups.
1. Select Test/Material from the drop down box.

A check in the Overwrite box will cause the new information uploaded to
replace the information currently defined in the system.
2. Enter the Filename of the Material or test to be uploaded (8 characters
maximum with no extension needed).
3. Select desired storage media available for your system
4. Press the Confirm button to start the backup or the Cancel button to exit the
screen.
NOTE: After uploading Test Groups verify the “Max Sample Value” is set correctly
for the uploaded test groups in the Test Group Definition screen.
D.10 Elite All-In-One Utility

The ACL Elite/Elite ProAll-In-One Utility is a set of DOS-based programs contained
on a USB flash drive, an accessory that comes with the ACL Elite/Elite Pro
instrument.
The All-In-One Utility is completely standalone, and separate from the Elite
application.
Procedures in this section:
D.10.1 Comparison: Elite All-In-One Utility versus Elite UI
D.10.2 Perform Hard Drive Maintenance
D.10.3 Perform Database Backup
D.10.4 Perform Database Restore
D.10.5 Perform Rotor Map Extraction
D.10.6 Perform Trace (Log) File Extraction
D.10.7 EXIT to DOS prompt
D.10.1 Comparison: Elite All-In-One Utility versus Elite UI

Variations of the operations contained in the Elite All-In-One Utility can be
performed through the Elite user interface. The variations are described in the
following table:
Operation Elite All-In-One Utility Elite UI
Hard Drive Maintenance Checks and repairs file None.
system errors on the hard
disk, and then defragments
the disk.
Database Backup Performs a full database Performs a full database

backup to the database.zip backup to the aclbckup file
file located in the DB located on the All-In- One
folder on the All-In-One Utility flash drive (root
Utility flash drive. directory). See D.3
UTILITY – Backup and
Restore
Database Restore Restores the full database Option to restore the full
from the database.zip file database or the
located in the DB folder on configuration settings
the All-In-One Utility (only) from the aclbckup
flash drive. file located on the All- In-
One Utility flash drive
(root directory).
Rotor Map Extraction Backs up all the rotor map Backs up a single, user-
files stored on the system selected rotor map file to a
to the RotorMap.zip file in .dat1 or .txt file. See D.7
the RotorMap folder on the UTILITY – Save Rotor
All-In-One Utility flash Map.
drive.
Trace (Log) File Backs up all the trace (log) Backs up a single, user-
Extraction files stored on the system selected trace (log) file on
to the LogFile.zip file in the instrument to a.txt file.
the Log folder on the All- See D.8 UTILITY – Save
In-One Utility flash drive. Trace File.
Exit to DOS prompt Opens the DOS command None.
line.
NOTE: IL recommends saving data to TXT files. TXT files are ASCII files
compatible with text editors and spreadsheets (i.e., MS-Word or MS-Excel).
Using the DOS All-In-One Utility
1. Exit the Elite application and power off the system.

2. Plug the All-In-One Utility flash drive into one of the USB ports. Make sure
there are no other flash drives connected to the instrument.
3. Power on the Elite system.
4. After some initial DOS screens appear, the DOS Utilities List screen appears.
5. Refer to one of the following sections for further instructions.
D.10.2 Perform Hard Drive Maintenance

This utility checks for and repairs file system errors on the hard disk, and then
defragments the hard disk.
1. Select A. Perform Hard Drive Maintenance from the DOS Utilities List
screen.
2. No further action is required.
3. When this maintenance is finished, a message states: Hard Drive Maintenance
is completed.
After completion, the DOS Utilities List screen reappears.
D.10.3 Perform Database Backup

This utility performs a full database backup to file database.zip in the DB folder on
the All-In- One Utility flash drive. This action overwrites the existing database.zip file
in the DB folder, if it exists.
1. To prevent loss of data, rename any existing database.zip in the DB folder, or
copy it to another secure location.
2. Select B. Perform Database Backup from the DOS Utilities List screen.
3. Follow the prompts.
4. The system notifies you when backup is complete.
D.10.4 Perform Database Restore

This utility restores the full database from the database.zip file that resides in the DB
folder on the All-In-One Utility flash drive. This action overwrites all the database
files on the Elite system.
1. Select C. Perform Database Restore from the DOS Utilities List screen.
3. The system notifies you when the full restore is complete.
NOTE: To restore only the instrument configuration settings (omit patient data) see
D.3 UTILITY – Backup and Restore
D.10.5 Perform Rotor Map Extraction

This utility copies all the rotor map files stored on the system to file RotorMap.zip
and in the RotorMap folder on the All-In-One Utility flash drive. This action
overwrites the existing RotorMap.zip file in the RotorMap folder, if it exists.
1. Select D. Perform Rotor Map Extraction from the DOS Utilities List screen.
3. The system notifies you when all the rotor map files have been extracted.
D.10.6 Perform Trace (Log) File Extraction

This utility backs up all the trace (log) files stored on the system to file LogFile.zip in
the Log folder on the All-In-One Utility flash drive. This action overwrites the
existing LogFile.zip file in the Log folder, if it exists.
1. Select E. Perform Trace (Log) File Extraction from the DOS Utilities List
screen.
The system notifies you when all the trace (log) files have been extracted.
D.10.7 EXIT to DOS prompt

This utility exits the Elite All-In-One Utility.
1. Select F. EXIT to DOS prompt from the DOS Utilities List screen.
The DOS screen displays the following information that pertains to the DOS
command line:
At this time you can execute DOS (FreeDOS) commands.
The C: drive refers to the USB drive.
The D: drive refers to the Elite system hard drive.
2. When you are finished entering DOS commands, power off the instrument.
3. After the instrument shuts down, remove the All-In-One Utility flash drive.
4. Before rebooting the instrument remove the All-In-One Utility flash drive, if
necessary.

Elite Service Manual Apr 2017

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elite Service Manual Apr 2017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACL Elite/Elite Pro Service Manual

P/N 00018112114 R03 • March, 2017

Copyright © Instrumentation Laboratory, March, 2017

Manufacturer EU Authorized Representative

Instrumentation Laboratory Co.

Chapter 1 General Information

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 1 of 23

1.1 Product Use

1.2 Measured Parameters

• PT- (Prothrombin Time and PT-Based Fibrinogen concentration)

• ProClot (clotting Protein C)

Page 2 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

The user may program Profiles on patient samples to be performed on a random

1.3 Presentation of Results

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 3 of 23

1.4 Instrument Description and Operation

The ACL is a family of fully automated computer-controlled, microcentrifugal

Page 4 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

1.4.1 Main hardware components

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 5 of 23

Page 6 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

1.4.2 Sample Tray

3 mL Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm) 181108-99

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 7 of 23

Additional Reagents Positions

Page 8 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

Normally, position A1 is usually reserved for a cup containing calibration plasma

1.4.3 Reagent Area

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 9 of 23

Grey: for 10 mL vials

Purple: for 8 mL vials

Green: for 4 mL vials

Dark Blue: for sample tray 4ml

1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area

Page 10 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

1.4.5 Rotor Loading and Analysis Area

Rotor (reaction cuvettes)

The disposable precision reaction cuvettes, made of UV-transparent acrylic, are

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 11 of 23

Page 12 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

Rotor Exchange Module (REM)

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 13 of 23

Rotor Holder and Rotor Loading

Page 14 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

Rotor Waste Area

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 15 of 23

1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

Page 16 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 17 of 23

1.4.8 Interface Connectors

Page 18 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

1.4.9 Internal Cooling System

1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 19 of 23

1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner

1.4.12 External Printer (optional)

An external 80-column printer can be interfaced to the ACL Elite/ElitePro.

1.4.13 USB Port for All-in-One Utility (Newer Models)

Page 20 of 23 Chapter 1 – General Information

1.4.14 Floppy Disk Drive (Older Models)

1.5 Additional Features

1.5.1 Standby Status

Chapter 1 – General Information Page 21 of 23